Trinix NXT

DIGITAL VIDEO ROUTER

Installation and Service Manual

Software Version 3.3.0

071827612
SEPTEMBER 2011
CERTIFICATE
Certificate Number: 510040.001

The Quality System of:

Grass Valley USA, LLC and its Grass Valley Affiliates

Headquarters:
400 Providence Mine Road 15655 SW Greystone Ct. Brunnenweg 9
Nevada City, CA 95945 Beaverton, OR 97006 D-64331 Weiterstadt
United States United States Germany

Kapittelweg 10 2300 So. Decker Lake Blvd.

4827 HG Breda Salt Lake City, UT 84119
The Nederlands United States

Including its implementation, meets the requirements of the standard:

ISO 9001:2008
Scope:
The design, manufacture and support of video and audio hardware and software products and related
systems.

This Certificate is valid until: June 14, 2012

This Certificate is valid as of: December 23, 2010
Certified for the first time: June 14, 2000

H. Pierre Sallé
President
KEMA-Registered Quality

The method of operation for quality certification is defined in the KEMA General Terms And Conditions For
Quality And Environmental Management Systems Certifications. Integral publication of this certificate is allowed.

KEMA-Registered Quality, Inc. Accredited By:

4377 County Line Road ANAB
Chalfont, PA 18914
Ph: (215)997-4519
Fax: (215)997-3809
CRT 001 042108
Trinix NXT
DIGITAL VIDEO ROUTER

Installation and Service Manual

Software Version 3.3.0

071827612
SEPTEMBER 2011
Contacting Grass Valley
International France United States/Canada
+800 8080 2020 or +33 1 48 25 20 20 +1 800 547 8949 or +1 530 478 4148
Support Centers 24 x 7 24 x 7
Hong Kong, Taiwan, Korea, Macau: +852 2531 3058 Indian Subcontinent: +91 22 24933476
Asia Southeast Asia/Malaysia: +603 7805 3884 Southeast Asia/Singapore: +65 6379 1313
China: +861 0660 159 450 Japan: +81 3 5484 6868
Local Support
Centers Australia and New Zealand: +61 1300 721 495 Central/South America: +55 11 5509 3443
(available Middle East: +971 4 299 64 40 Near East and Africa: +800 8080 2020 or +33 1 48 25 20 20
during normal
business hours) Belarus, Russia, Tadzikistan, Ukraine, Uzbekistan: +7 095 2580924 225 Switzerland: +41 1 487 80 02
S. Europe/Italy-Roma: +39 06 87 20 35 28 -Milan: +39 02 48 41 46 58 S. Europe/Spain: +34 91 512 03 50
Europe
Benelux/Belgium: +32 (0) 2 334 90 30 Benelux/Netherlands: +31 (0) 35 62 38 42 1 N. Europe: +45 45 96 88 70
Germany, Austria, Eastern Europe: +49 6150 104 444 UK, Ireland, Israel: +44 118 923 0499

Copyright © Grass Valley USA, LLC. All rights reserved.

This product may be covered by one or more U.S. and foreign patents.

Grass Valley Web Site

The www.grassvalley.com web site offers the following:
Online User Documentation — Current versions of product catalogs, brochures,
data sheets, ordering guides, planning guides, manuals, and release notes
in .pdf format can be downloaded.
FAQ Database — Solutions to problems and troubleshooting efforts can be
found by searching our Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) database.
Software Downloads — Download software updates, drivers, and patches.

4 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

Contents
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Additional Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Safety Terms and Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Terms in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Terms on the Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Symbols on the Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Certifications and Compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
FCC Emission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Canadian EMC Notice of Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
EN 55103 Class A Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Canadian Certified Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Canadian Certified AC Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Laser Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Recommended ESD Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Sources of ESD and Risks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Grounding Requirements for Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Section 8 — Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
SD, HD, and 3GB/s in the Same Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Easy to Create Very Large Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
The Symmetric Trinix Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
The Asymmetric Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Trinix Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Serviceability and Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Broadlinx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Section 9 — Planning Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Trinix Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Sync Reference Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Duplication and Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Output Duplication - Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Output Duplication - Quad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Expanded Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Protected Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Worksheet for Protected Path Implementation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Control Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Jupiter Facility Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 5

Contents

SMS 7000 / Encore Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

LAN and Com Bus Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
System Monitoring Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Environmental. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Section 10 — Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Summary of Installation Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Pre-Installation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Customer-Supplied Rack Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Connecting the Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Connecting and Configuring the Reference Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Configuring Each Output Monitor on the TRX-OPM Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Connecting the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Control and Monitoring Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Optional Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Powering Up the Routing Switcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Setting the Rear Panel Dip Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Power Supply Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Sync Reference Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
NR/SR-33000 / SR-33500/ TRX-SR V-Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Output Board Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Duplication and Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Output Reclocker Bypass Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Input Equalization Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Output Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Monitoring with Expanded Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Frame Number Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Jupiter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
SMS 7000 / Encore Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
LAN and Com Bus Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Replacing Trinix Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations . . 227

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
The External Power Supply Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
The Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Basic Configuration for the Lineage Power Supply Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Trinix Asymmetrical Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Trinix Status Concentrator Board (TRX-SC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
The 128X256 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
The 256X512 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
The 512X1024 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
512X1024 Default Power Supply Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
512X1024 Redundant Power Supply Configurations, Option A . . . . . . . . . . . 257

6 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Contents

Section 12 — Broadlinx Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Updating Compact Flash Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Updating New Broadlinx Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Updating Systems with a Single Broadlinx Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Updating Systems with Two Broadlinx Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Licensing SNMP on Both Broadlinx Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Formatting the Compact Flash Card with the FAT16 Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Alternate methods for Updating a Compact Flash Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Installation FAQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Configuring the Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Opening the Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
SNMP/NetCentral Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Licensing SNMP on Both Broadlinx Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Broadlinx / Internet Explorer Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Firmware Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Trinix Matrix Identification from the NetConfig Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Updating the FPGAs Firmware on Multiple Boards at the Same Time . . . . . 322

Section 14 — Broadlinx Console Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Section 15 — Broadlinx Version and Supported Trinix Boards. . . . . . 337

Matrix Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Section 16 — Protected Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Protected Paths Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Verifying the Parameters on the Broadlinx Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Broadlinx Software with Protected Paths Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Accessing the Protected Path Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Broadlinx Protective Paths Web Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Assigning a Secondary Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
System Alarm Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Protected Path Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Encore Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Jupiter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Operation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Section 17 — Encore Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Encore Control of Trinix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Sync Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 7

Contents

Encore Configuration of Protected Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Section 18 — Analog Input Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

TRX-VI-33100 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Analog Processing Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Customizing Analog Video Processing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Section 19 — Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Incompatible Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Section 20 — Trinix Fiber Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Trinix Fiber Boards Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Fiber Optic Cleaning Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
LED Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Trinix Fiber Boards Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Installing the Trinix Fiber Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Section 21 — Front-Air Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Front-Air Vent (FAV) Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Installing the FAV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Section 22 — Trinix Frame Slot Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Trinix 512x512 Frame Slot Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Trinix 256x256 Frame Slot Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Trinix 128x128 Frame Slot Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Trinix 256x512 Frame Slot Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Trinix 128x256 Frame Slot Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Trinix 512x1024 Frame Slot Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Section 23 — Expanded System Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Expanded Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

8 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

Preface
About This Manual
This manual provides system planning, installation and troubleshooting
information specific to the Trinix Digital Video Router.
The Trinix DV33XXX frames are no longer available to purchase. However,
this manual covers specifics about these DV33XXX frames. The DV33XXX
frames and the TRX-NXTXXX frames are similar except for minor differ-
ences, which are identified in this manual.
The Trinix Digital Video Router can be controlled by the Grass Valley
Jupiter or Encore Control System. Configuration information for the
control system itself is contained in the control system’s documentation set:
Jupiter Control System Release Notes.
Jupiter VM-3000 Installation and Operating Manual.
Jupiter CM-4000 Installation and Operating Manual.
Jupiter CM-4000 Installation and Service Manual.
Jupiter Getting Started Guide.
Encore Control System Release Notes series.
Encore Installation and Service Manual.
Encore Control System User Manual.
Encore Control Panels Manual
An electronic copy of the documentation set is normally provided with the
system on a CD-ROM. The CD Includes SMS7000 Series Control System,
Acappella, Concerto, Encore, Jupiter, JEP 100, Prelude, and Trinix docu-
mentation. The latest versions of these manuals are available on our web
site (see Grass Valley Web Site on page 4)
Individual printed manuals may be ordered by contacting Technical Sup-
port.

Additional Documentation
NetCentral IV TV Facility Monitoring System User Guide.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 9

Preface

10 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

Safety Summary
Read and follow the important safety information below, noting especially
those instructions related to risk of fire, electric shock or injury to persons.
Additional specific warnings not listed here may be found throughout the
manual.

WARNING Any instructions in this manual that require opening the equipment cover
or enclosure are for use by qualified service personnel only. To reduce the
risk of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other than that con-
tained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so.

Safety Terms and Symbols

Terms in This Manual

Safety-related statements may appear in this manual in the following form:

WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that may result in per-
sonal injury or loss of life.

CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that may result in damage
to equipment or other property, or which may cause equipment crucial to
your business environment to become temporarily non-operational.

Terms on the Product

The following terms may appear on the product:
DANGER — A personal injury hazard is immediately accessible as you read
the marking.
WARNING — A personal injury hazard exists but is not immediately acces-
sible as you read the marking.
CAUTION — A hazard to property, product, and other equipment is present.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 11

Safety Summary

Symbols on the Product

The following symbols may appear on the product:

Indicates that dangerous high voltage is present within the

equipment enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock.

Indicates that user, operator or service technician should refer

to product manual(s) for important operating, maintenance,
or service instructions.

This is a prompt to note fuse rating when replacing fuse(s).

The fuse referenced in the text must be replaced with one
having the ratings indicated.

Identifies a protective grounding terminal which must be con-

nected to earth ground prior to making any other equipment
connections.

Identifies an external protective grounding terminal which

may be connected to earth ground as a supplement to an
internal grounding terminal.

Indicates that static sensitive components are present which

may be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Use anti-static
procedures, equipment and surfaces during servicing.

Warnings
The following warning statements identify conditions or practices that can
result in personal injury or loss of life:
Dangerous voltage or current may be present — Disconnect power and remove
battery (if applicable) before removing protective panels, soldering, or
replacing components.
Do not service alone — Do not internally service this product unless another
person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present.
Remove jewelry — Prior to servicing, remove jewelry such as rings, watches,
and other metallic objects.
Avoid exposed circuitry — Do not touch exposed connections, components or
circuitry when power is present.

12 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Safety Summary

Use proper power cord — Use only the power cord supplied or specified for
this product.
Ground product — Connect the grounding conductor of the power cord to
earth ground.
Operate only with covers and enclosure panels in place — Do not operate this
product when covers or enclosure panels are removed.
Use correct fuse — Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this
product.
Use only in dry environment — Do not operate in wet or damp conditions.

Use only in non-explosive environment — Do not operate this product in an

explosive atmosphere.
High leakage current may be present — Earth connection of product is essential
before connecting power.
Dual power supplies may be present — Be certain to plug each power supply
cord into a separate branch circuit employing a separate service ground.
Disconnect both power supply cords prior to servicing.
Double pole neutral fusing — Disconnect mains power prior to servicing.

Use proper lift points — Do not use door latches to lift or move equipment.

Avoid mechanical hazards — Allow all rotating devices to come to a stop before
servicing.

Cautions
The following caution statements identify conditions or practices that can
result in damage to equipment or other property:
Use correct power source — Do not operate this product from a power source
that applies more than the voltage specified for the product.
Use correct voltage setting — If this product lacks auto-ranging power sup-
plies, before applying power ensure that the each power supply is set to
match the power source.
Provide proper ventilation — To prevent product overheating, provide equip-
ment ventilation in accordance with installation instructions.
Use anti-static procedures — Static sensitive components are present which
may be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Use anti-static procedures,
equipment and surfaces during servicing.
Do not operate with suspected equipment failure — If you suspect product damage
or equipment failure, have the equipment inspected by qualified service
personnel.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 13

Safety Summary

Ensure mains disconnect — If mains switch is not provided, the power cord(s)
of this equipment provide the means of disconnection. The socket outlet
must be installed near the equipment and must be easily accessible. Verify
that all mains power is disconnected before installing or removing power
supplies and/or options.
Route cable properly — Route power cords and other cables so that they ar not
likely to be damaged. Properly support heavy cable bundles to avoid con-
nector damage.
Use correct power supply cords — Power cords for this equipment, if provided,
meet all North American electrical codes. Operation of this equipment at
voltages exceeding 130 VAC requires power supply cords which comply
with NEMA configurations. International power cords, if provided, have
the approval of the country of use.
Use correct replacement battery — This product may contain batteries. To
reduce the risk of explosion, check polarity and replace only with the same
or equivalent type recommended by manufacturer. Dispose of used bat-
teries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Troubleshoot only to board level — Circuit boards in this product are densely
populated with surface mount technology (SMT) components and applica-
tion specific integrated circuits (ASICS). As a result, circuit board repair at
the component level is very difficult in the field, if not impossible. For war-
ranty compliance, do not troubleshoot systems beyond the board level.

14 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Safety Summary

Sicherheit – Überblick
Lesen und befolgen Sie die wichtigen Sicherheitsinformationen dieses
Abschnitts. Beachten Sie insbesondere die Anweisungen bezüglich
Brand-, Stromschlag- und Verletzungsgefahren. Weitere spezifische, hier
nicht aufgeführte Warnungen finden Sie im gesamten Handbuch.

WARNUNG Alle Anweisungen in diesem Handbuch, die das Abnehmen der

Geräteabdeckung oder des Gerätegehäuses erfordern, dürfen nur von
qualifiziertem Servicepersonal ausgeführt werden. Um die
Stromschlaggefahr zu verringern, führen Sie keine Wartungsarbeiten
außer den in den Bedienungsanleitungen genannten Arbeiten aus, es sei
denn, Sie besitzen die entsprechende Qualifikationen für diese Arbeiten.

Sicherheit – Begriffe und Symbole

In diesem Handbuch verwendete Begriffe

Sicherheitsrelevante Hinweise können in diesem Handbuch in der fol-
genden Form auftauchen:

WARNUNG Warnungen weisen auf Situationen oder Vorgehensweisen hin, die

Verletzungs- oder Lebensgefahr bergen.

VORSICHT Vorsichtshinweise weisen auf Situationen oder Vorgehensweisen hin, die zu

Schäden an Ausrüstungskomponenten oder anderen Gegenständen oder
zum zeitweisen Ausfall wichtiger Komponenten in der Arbeitsumgebung
führen können.

Hinweise am Produkt
Die folgenden Hinweise können sich am Produkt befinden:
GEFAHR — Wenn Sie diesen Begriff lesen, besteht ein unmittelbares Verlet-
zungsrisiko.
WARNUNG — Wenn Sie diesen Begriff lesen, besteht ein mittelbares Verlet-
zungsrisiko.
VORSICHT — Es besteht ein Risiko für Objekte in der Umgebung, den Mixer
selbst oder andere Ausrüstungskomponenten.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 15

Safety Summary

Symbole am Produkt
Die folgenden Symbole können sich am Produkt befinden:

Weist auf eine gefährliche Hochspannung im Gerätegehäuse

hin, die stark genug sein kann, um eine Stromschlaggefahr
darzustellen.

Weist darauf hin, dass der Benutzer, Bediener oder Servicet-

echniker wichtige Bedienungs-, Wartungs- oder Servicean-
weisungen in den Produkthandbüchern lesen sollte.

Dies ist eine Aufforderung, beim Wechsel von Sicherungen

auf deren Nennwert zu achten. Die im Text angegebene Sich-
erung muss durch eine Sicherung ersetzt werden, die die
angegebenen Nennwerte besitzt.

Weist auf eine Schutzerdungsklemme hin, die mit dem

Erdungskontakt verbunden werden muss, bevor weitere Aus-
rüstungskomponenten angeschlossen werden.

Weist auf eine externe Schutzerdungsklemme hin, die als

Ergänzung zu einem internen Erdungskontakt an die Erde
angeschlossen werden kann.

Weist darauf hin, dass es statisch empfindliche Komponenten

gibt, die durch eine elektrostatische Entladung beschädigt
werden können. Verwenden Sie antistatische Prozeduren,
Ausrüstung und Oberflächen während der Wartung.

Warnungen
Die folgenden Warnungen weisen auf Bedingungen oder Vorgehensweisen
hin, die Verletzungs- oder Lebensgefahr bergen:
Gefährliche Spannungen oder Ströme — Schalten Sie den Strom ab, und ent-
fernen Sie ggf. die Batterie, bevor sie Schutzabdeckungen abnehmen, löten
oder Komponenten austauschen.
Servicearbeiten nicht alleine ausführen — Führen Sie interne Servicearbeiten nur
aus, wenn eine weitere Person anwesend ist, die erste Hilfe leisten und
Wiederbelebungsmaßnahmen einleiten kann.
Schmuck abnehmen — Legen Sie vor Servicearbeiten Schmuck wie Ringe,
Uhren und andere metallische Objekte ab.

16 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Safety Summary

Keine offen liegenden Leiter berühren — Berühren Sie bei eingeschalteter Strom-
zufuhr keine offen liegenden Leitungen, Komponenten oder Schaltungen.
Richtiges Netzkabel verwenden — Verwenden Sie nur das mitgelieferte Netzk-
abel oder ein Netzkabel, das den Spezifikationen für dieses Produkt
entspricht.
Gerät erden — Schließen Sie den Erdleiter des Netzkabels an den Erdung-
skontakt an.
Gerät nur mit angebrachten Abdeckungen und Gehäuseseiten betreiben — Schalten Sie
dieses Gerät nicht ein, wenn die Abdeckungen oder Gehäuseseiten entfernt
wurden.
Richtige Sicherung verwenden — Verwenden Sie nur Sicherungen, deren Typ
und Nennwert den Spezifikationen für dieses Produkt entsprechen.
Gerät nur in trockener Umgebung verwenden — Betreiben Sie das Gerät nicht in
nassen oder feuchten Umgebungen.
Gerät nur verwenden, wenn keine Explosionsgefahr besteht — Verwenden Sie dieses
Produkt nur in Umgebungen, in denen keinerlei Explosionsgefahr besteht.
Hohe Kriechströme — Das Gerät muss vor dem Einschalten unbedingt geerdet
werden.
Doppelte Spannungsversorgung kann vorhanden sein — Schließen Sie die beiden
Anschlußkabel an getrennte Stromkreise an. Vor Servicearbeiten sind beide
Anschlußkabel vom Netz zu trennen.
Zweipolige, neutrale Sicherung — Schalten Sie den Netzstrom ab, bevor Sie mit
den Servicearbeiten beginnen.
Fassen Sie das Gerät beim Transport richtig an — Halten Sie das Gerät beim Trans-
port nicht an Türen oder anderen beweglichen Teilen fest.
Gefahr durch mechanische Teile — Warten Sie, bis der Lüfter vollständig zum
Halt gekommen ist, bevor Sie mit den Servicearbeiten beginnen.

Vorsicht
Die folgenden Vorsichtshinweise weisen auf Bedingungen oder Vorge-
hensweisen hin, die zu Schäden an Ausrüstungskomponenten oder
anderen Gegenständen führen können:
Gerät nicht öffnen — Durch das unbefugte Öffnen wird die Garantie ungültig.

Richtige Spannungsquelle verwenden — Betreiben Sie das Gerät nicht an einer

Spannungsquelle, die eine höhere Spannung liefert als in den Spezifika-
tionen für dieses Produkt angegeben.
Gerät ausreichend belüften — Um eine Überhitzung des Geräts zu vermeiden,
müssen die Ausrüstungskomponenten entsprechend den Installationsan-

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 17

Safety Summary

weisungen belüftet werden. Legen Sie kein Papier unter das Gerät. Es
könnte die Belüftung behindern. Platzieren Sie das Gerät auf einer ebenen
Oberfläche.
Antistatische Vorkehrungen treffen — Es gibt statisch empfindliche Kompo-
nenten, die durch eine elektrostatische Entladung beschädigt werden kön-
nen. Verwenden Sie antistatische Prozeduren, Ausrüstung und
Oberflächen während der Wartung.
CF-Karte nicht mit einem PC verwenden — Die CF-Karte ist speziell formatiert.
Die auf der CF-Karte gespeicherte Software könnte gelöscht werden.
Gerät nicht bei eventuellem Ausrüstungsfehler betreiben — Wenn Sie einen Produk-
tschaden oder Ausrüstungsfehler vermuten, lassen Sie die Komponente
von einem qualifizierten Servicetechniker untersuchen.
Kabel richtig verlegen — Verlegen Sie Netzkabel und andere Kabel so, dass Sie
nicht beschädigt werden. Stützen Sie schwere Kabelbündel ordnungs-
gemäß ab, damit die Anschlüsse nicht beschädigt werden.
Richtige Netzkabel verwenden — Wenn Netzkabel mitgeliefert wurden, erfüllen
diese alle nationalen elektrischen Normen. Der Betrieb dieses Geräts mit
Spannungen über 130 V AC erfordert Netzkabel, die NEMA-Konfigura-
tionen entsprechen. Wenn internationale Netzkabel mitgeliefert wurden,
sind diese für das Verwendungsland zugelassen.
Richtige Ersatzbatterie verwenden — Dieses Gerät enthält eine Batterie. Um die
Explosionsgefahr zu verringern, prüfen Sie die Polarität und tauschen die
Batterie nur gegen eine Batterie desselben Typs oder eines gleichwertigen,
vom Hersteller empfohlenen Typs aus. Entsorgen Sie gebrauchte Batterien
entsprechend den Anweisungen des Batterieherstellers.
Das Gerät enthält keine Teile, die vom Benutzer gewartet werden können.
Wenden Sie sich bei Problemen bitte an den nächsten Händler.

18 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Safety Summary

Consignes de sécurité
Il est recommandé de lire, de bien comprendre et surtout de respecter les
informations relatives à la sécurité qui sont exposées ci-après, notamment
les consignes destinées à prévenir les risques d’incendie, les décharges élec-
triques et les blessures aux personnes. Les avertissements complémen-
taires, qui ne sont pas nécessairement repris ci-dessous, mais présents dans
toutes les sections du manuel, sont également à prendre en considération.

AVERTISSEMENT Toutes les instructions présentes dans ce manuel qui concernent

l’ouverture des capots ou des logements de cet équipement sont
destinées exclusivement à des membres qualifiés du personnel de
maintenance. Afin de diminuer les risques de décharges
électriques, ne procédez à aucune intervention d’entretien autre
que celles contenues dans le manuel de l’utilisateur, à moins que
vous ne soyez habilité pour le faire.

Consignes et symboles de sécurité

Termes utilisés dans ce manuel

Les consignes de sécurité présentées dans ce manuel peuvent apparaître
sous les formes suivantes:

AVERTISSEMENT Les avertissements signalent des conditions ou des pratiques

susceptibles d’occasionner des blessures graves, voire même
fatales.

ATTENTION Les mises en garde signalent des conditions ou des pratiques

susceptibles d’occasionner un endommagement à l’équipement ou
aux installations, ou de rendre l’équipement temporairement non
opérationnel, ce qui peut porter préjudice à vos activités.

Signalétique apposée sur le produit

La signalétique suivante peut être apposée sur le produit:
DANGER — risque de danger imminent pour l’utilisateur.

AVERTISSEMENT — Risque de danger non imminent pour l’utilisateur.

MISE EN GARDE — Risque d’endommagement du produit, des installations

ou des autres équipements.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 19

Safety Summary

Symboles apposés sur le produit

Les symboles suivants peut être apposés sur le produit:

Signale la présence d’une tension élevée et dangereuse dans le

boîtier de l’équipement ; cette tension peut être suffisante
pour constituer un risque de décharge électrique.

Signale que l’utilisateur, l’opérateur ou le technicien de main-

tenance doit faire référence au(x) manuel(s) pour prendre con-
naissance des instructions d’utilisation, de maintenance ou
d’entretien.

Il s’agit d’une invite à prendre note du calibre du fusible lors

du remplacement de ce dernier. Le fusible auquel il est fait
référence dans le texte doit être remplacé par un fusible du
même calibre.

Identifie une borne de protection de mise à la masse qui doit

être raccordée correctement avant de procéder au raccorde-
ment des autres équipements.

Identifie une borne de protection de mise à la masse qui peut

être connectée en tant que borne de mise à la masse supplé-
mentaire.

Signale la présence de composants sensibles à l’électricité sta-

tique et qui sont susceptibles d’être endommagés par une
décharge électrostatique. Utilisez des procédures, des équipe-
ments et des surfaces antistatiques durant les interventions
d’entretien.

Avertissements
Les avertissements suivants signalent des conditions ou des pratiques sus-
ceptibles d’occasionner des blessures graves, voire même fatales:
Présence possible de tensions ou de courants dangereux — Mettez hors tension,
débranchez et retirez la pile (le cas échéant) avant de déposer les couvercles
de protection, de défaire une soudure ou de remplacer des composants.
Ne procédez pas seul à une intervention d’entretien — Ne réalisez pas une interven-
tion d’entretien interne sur ce produit si une personne n’est pas présente
pour fournir les premiers soins en cas d’accident.

20 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Safety Summary

Retirez tous vos bijoux — Avant de procéder à une intervention d’entretien,

retirez tous vos bijoux, notamment les bagues, la montre ou tout autre objet
métallique.
Évitez tout contact avec les circuits exposés — Évitez tout contact avec les connex-
ions, les composants ou les circuits exposés s’ils sont sous tension.
Utilisez le cordon d’alimentation approprié — Utilisez exclusivement le cordon
d’alimentation fourni avec ce produit ou spécifié pour ce produit.
Raccordez le produit à la masse — Raccordez le conducteur de masse du cordon
d’alimentation à la borne de masse de la prise secteur.
Utilisez le produit lorsque les couvercles et les capots sont en place — N’utilisez pas
ce produit si les couvercles et les capots sont déposés.
Utilisez le bon fusible — Utilisez exclusivement un fusible du type et du
calibre spécifiés pour ce produit.
Utilisez ce produit exclusivement dans un environnement sec — N’utilisez pas ce
produit dans un environnement humide.
Utilisez ce produit exclusivement dans un environnement non explosible — N’utilisez
pas ce produit dans un environnement dont l’atmosphère est explosible.
Présence possible de courants de fuite — Un raccordement à la masse est indis-
pensable avant la mise sous tension.
Deux alimentations peuvent être présentes dans l’équipement — Assurez vous que
chaque cordon d’alimentation est raccordé à des circuits de terre séparés.
Débranchez les deux cordons d’alimentation avant toute intervention.
Fusion neutre bipolaire — Débranchez l’alimentation principale avant de pro-
céder à une intervention d’entretien.
Utilisez les points de levage appropriés — Ne pas utiliser les verrous de la porte
pour lever ou déplacer l’équipement.
Évitez les dangers mécaniques — Laissez le ventilateur s’arrêter avant de pro-
céder à une intervention d’entretien.

Mises en garde
Les mises en garde suivantes signalent les conditions et les pratiques sus-
ceptibles d’occasionner des endommagements à l’équipement et aux instal-
lations:
N’ouvrez pas l’appareil — Toute ouverture prohibée de l’appareil aura pour
effet d’annuler la garantie.
Utilisez la source d’alimentation adéquate — Ne branchez pas ce produit à une
source d’alimentation qui utilise une tension supérieure à la tension nomi-
nale spécifiée pour ce produit.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 21

Safety Summary

Assurez une ventilation adéquate — Pour éviter toute surchauffe du produit,

assurez une ventilation de l’équipement conformément aux instructions
d’installation. Ne déposez aucun document sous l’appareil — ils peuvent
gêner la ventilation. Placez l’appareil sur une surface plane.
Utilisez des procédures antistatiques - Les composants sensibles à l’électricité
statique présents dans l’équipement sont susceptibles d’être endommagés
par une décharge électrostatique. Utilisez des procédures, des équipements
et des surfaces antistatiques durant les interventions d’entretien.
N’utilisez pas la carte CF avec un PC — La carte CF a été spécialement formatée.
Le logiciel enregistré sur la carte CF risque d’être effacé.
N’utilisez pas l’équipement si un dysfonctionnement est suspecté — Si vous sus-
pectez un dysfonctionnement du produit, faites inspecter celui-ci par un
membre qualifié du personnel d’entretien.
Acheminez les câbles correctement — Acheminez les câbles d’alimentation et les
autres câbles de manière à ce qu’ils ne risquent pas d’être endommagés.
Supportez correctement les enroulements de câbles afin de ne pas endom-
mager les connecteurs.
Utilisez les cordons d’alimentation adéquats — Les cordons d’alimentation de cet
équipement, s’ils sont fournis, satisfont aux exigences de toutes les régle-
mentations régionales. L’utilisation de cet équipement à des tensions
dépassant les 130 V en c.a. requiert des cordons d’alimentation qui satisfont
aux exigences des configurations NEMA. Les cordons internationaux, s’ils
sont fournis, ont reçu l’approbation du pays dans lequel l’équipement est
utilisé.
Utilisez une pile de remplacement adéquate — Ce produit renferme une pile. Pour
réduire le risque d’explosion, vérifiez la polarité et ne remplacez la pile que
par une pile du même type, recommandée par le fabricant. Mettez les piles
usagées au rebut conformément aux instructions du fabricant des piles.
Cette unité ne contient aucune partie qui peut faire l’objet d’un entretien
par l’utilisateur. Si un problème survient, veuillez contacter votre distribu-
teur local.

22 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

Regulatory Notices
Certifications and Compliances

FCC Emission Control

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equip-
ment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equip-
ment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which
case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Grass Valley Group
can affect emission compliance and could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment.

Canadian EMC Notice of Compliance

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regula-
tions of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Le présent appareil numérique n’emet pas de bruits radioélectriques
dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe A
préscrites dans le Règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicte par le
ministère des Communications du Canada.

EN 55103 Class A Warning

For products that comply with Class A. In a domestic environment this
product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 23

Regulatory Notices

Canadian Certified Power Cords

Canadian approval includes the products and power cords appropriate for
use in the North America power network. All other power cords supplied
are approved for the country of use.

Canadian Certified AC Adapter

Canadian approval includes the AC adapters appropriate for use in the
North America power network. All other AC adapters supplied are
approved for the country of use.

Laser Compliance

Laser Safety Requirements

The device used in this product is a Class 1 certified laser product. Oper-
ating this product outside specifications or altering from its original design
may result in hazardous radiation exposure, and may be considered an act
of modifying or new manufacturing of a laser product under U.S. regula-
tions contained in 21CFR Chapter1, subchapter J or CENELEC regulations
in HD 482 S1. People performing such an act are required by law to recertify
and reidentify this product in accordance with provisions of 21CFR sub-
chapter J for distribution within the U.S.A., and in accordance with
CENELEC HD 482 S1 for distribution within countries using the IEC 825
standard.

Laser Safety
Laser safety in the United States is regulated by the Center for Devices and
Radiological Health (CDRH). The laser safety regulations are published in
the “Laser Product Performance Standard,” Code of Federal Regulation
(CFR), Title 21, Subchapter J.
The international Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Standard 825, “Radi-
ation of Laser Products, Equipment Classification, Requirements and
User’s Guide,” governs laser products outside the United States. Europe
and member nations of the European Free trade Association fall under the
jurisdiction of the Comite European de Normalization Electrotechnique
(CENELEC).
For the CDRH: The radiant power is detected trough a 7 mm aperture at a
distance of 200 mm from the source focused through a lens with a focal
length of 100 mm.

24 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Regulatory Notices

For IEC compliance: The radiant power is detected trough a 7 mm aperture

at a distance of 100 mm from the source focused through a lens with a focal
length of 100 mm.

FCC Emission Limits

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may no cause harmful inter-
ference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesirable operation. This device
has been tested and found to comply with FCC Part 15 Class B limits for a
digital device when tested with a representative laser-based fiber optical
system that complies with ANSI X3T11 Fiber Channel Standard.

Certification

Category Standard Designed/tested for compliance with:

Safety ANSI/UL 1950-1997 3rd Ed. Professional Video and Audio Equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 950-95
EN 60950

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 25

Regulatory Notices

26 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

ESD Protection
Electronics today are more susceptible to electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage than older equipment. Damage to equipment can occur by ESD
fields that are smaller than you can feel. Implementing the information in
this section will help you protect the investment that you have made in
purchasing Grass Valley equipment. This section contains Grass Valley’s
recommended ESD guidelines that should be followed when handling
electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESDS) items. These minimal recommen-
dations are based on the information in the Sources of ESD and Risks area.
The information in Grounding Requirements for Personnel on page 29 is pro-
vided to assist you in selecting an appropriate grounding method.

Recommended ESD Guidelines

Follow these guidelines when handling Grass Valley equipment:
• Only trained personnel that are connected to a grounding system
should handle ESDS items.
• Do not open any protective bag, box, or special shipping packaging
until you have been grounded.

Note When a Personal Grounding strap is unavailable, as an absolute minimum,

touch a metal object that is touching the floor (for example, a table, frame, or
rack) to discharge any static energy before touching an ESDS item.

• Open the anti-static packaging by slitting any existing adhesive tapes.

Do not tear the tapes off.
• Remove the ESDS item by holding it by its edges or by a metal panel.
• Do not touch the components of an ESDS item unless it is absolutely
necessary to configure or repair the item.
• Keep the ESDS work area clear of all nonessential items such as coffee
cups, pens, wrappers and personal items as these items can discharge
static. If you need to set an ESDS item down, place it on an anti-static
mat or on the anti-static packaging.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 27

ESD Protection

Sources of ESD and Risks

The following information identifies possible sources of electrostatic dis-
charge and can be used to help establish an ESD policy.

Personnel
One of the largest sources of static is personnel. The static can be released
from a person’s clothing and shoes.

Environment
The environment includes the humidity and floors in a work area. The
humidity level must be controlled and should not be allowed to fluctuate
over a broad range. Relative humidity (RH) is a major part in determining
the level of static that is being generated. For example, at 10% - 20% RH a
person walking across a carpeted floor can develop 35kV; yet when the rel-
ative humidity is increased to 70% - 80%, the person can only generate
1.5kV.
Static is generated as personnel move (or as equipment is moved) across a
floor’s surface. Carpeted and waxed vinyl floors contribute to static build
up.

Work Surfaces
Painted or vinyl-covered tables, chairs, conveyor belts, racks, carts, anod-
ized surfaces, plexiglass covers, and shelving are all static generators.

Equipment
Any equipment commonly found in an ESD work area, such as solder
guns, heat guns, blowers, etc., should be grounded.

Materials
Plastic work holders, foam, plastic tote boxes, pens, packaging containers
and other items commonly found at workstations can generate static elec-
tricity.

28 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 ESD Protection

Grounding Requirements for Personnel

The information in this section is provided to assist you in selecting a
grounding method. This information is taken from ANSI/ESD S20.20-2007
(Revision of ANSI/ESD S20.20-1999).

Table 1. Product Qualification

Personnel Grounding Technical
Test Method Required Limits
Requirement
Wrist Strap System* ANSI/ESD S1.1 (Section 5.11) < 3.5 x 107 ohm
Flooring / Footwear System – Method 1 ANSI/ESD STM97.1 < 3.5 x 107 ohm
Flooring / Footwear System – Method 2 ANSI/ESD STM97.1 < 109 ohm
(both required)
ANSI/ESD STM97.2 < 100 V

Product qualification is normally conducted during the initial selection of

ESD control products and materials. Any of the following methods can be
used: product specification review, independent laboratory evaluation, or
internal laboratory evaluation.

Table 2. Compliance Verification

Personnel Grounding Technical
Test Method Required Limits
Requirement
Wrist Strap System* ESD TR53 Wrist Strap Section < 3.5 x 107 ohm
Flooring / Footwear System – Method 1 ESD TR53 Flooring Section and ESD < 3.5 x 107 ohm
TR53 Footwear Section
Flooring / Footwear System – Method 2 ESD TR53 Flooring Section and ESD < 1.0 x 109 ohm
(both required) TR53 Footwear Section

* For situations where an ESD garment is used as part of the wrist strap
grounding path, the total system resistance, including the person, garment,
and grounding cord, must be less than 3.5 x 107 ohm.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 29

ESD Protection

30 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Section 8
Introduction
General
The Trinix family of routing switchers represents a revolutionary new
approach to digital signal distribution, which builds on the success of the
best selling routing switcher ever, Venus.
Trinix NXT is the next generation of the Trinix model routing switcher. This
new model offers industry-leading cooling, signal and switching perfor-
mance, as well as field-proven reliability and scalability. Trinix offers more
options for redundancy, and more powerful options, than any other router.

Frame Sizes
Trinix is available in six fixed frame sizes:
• 128 x 128 router in eight Rack Units (RUs)
• 128 x 256 router in 11 RUs
• 256 x 256 router in 15 RUs
• 256 x 512 router in 22 RUs
• 512 x 512 router in 32 RUs
• 512x1024 router in 40 RUs.
These fixed frame designs offer optimal solutions for customers who have
minimum space requirements yet still need a large number of crosspoints.

Features
The reliability and functionality that you have come to expect from the
Trinix line of routing switches enhances the new features. The Trinix NXT
routing switcher’s features include:
• Proven dependability
• Exceptional signal performance
• Standard Definition (SD), High Definition (HD), and 3Gb/s in the same
frame
• 3Gb/s Clean Flow signals
• Easy to service and upgrade

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 31

Section 8 — Introduction

• High density in minimal space

• Each I/O board supports 32 signals
• Same Crosspoint bus control as Venus, providing easy integration with
Jupiter Facility Control Systems.
• Mission critical components are front loading and hot swappable
• Extensive alarm notification/status
• Load sharing power supplies
• Redundant fans
• Protected path operation
• High-density crosspoints in compact frames.
• Fixed matrix sizes can be combined to form larger routers.
• Modular design allows for SD, HD, and 3Gb/s within the same frame.
• Passive expanders for input/output expansion, dual/quad outputs
• Frame design maximizes air flow
• Broadlinx option combines network interface, sync input, and output
monitor circuitry; allows LAN-based control by Encore/SMS and
system monitoring via Microsoft Internet Explorer. SNMP/NetCentral
system monitoring also available

Note The part numbers for the Trinix routers have changed from DV-##### to TRX-
NXT-###x###. The exceptions for this change are noted in this manual. The
DV-##### part number will be shown and described when a disparity occurs.

Additional Options
The Trinix Routing switcher has additional options that will help you to
meet your business needs:
• Fiber Input and Output boards (See Trinix Fiber Option on page 411)
• Trinix Multiviewer (See the Trinix Multiviewer Installation and Service
manual)

SD, HD, and 3GB/s in the Same Frame

Trinix NXT supports SD, HD, and 3Gb/s video in all configurations. The
matrix boards and high-speed backplane are designed for SD, HD, and
3Gb/s signals. The only difference between SD, HD, and 3Gb/s implemen-
tations is the 3G Matrix, Input and Output boards. This similarity makes
upgrading easy for both budgets and implementation; thus solving the
problem of deciding when to prepare for HD and 3Gb/s technology in a
facility.

32 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Easy to Create Very Large Routers
Creating very large routers in the Trinix design is accomplished by using
special circuitry for simple and cost effective expansion. For example,
Using passive port expansion modules, a 1024 x 1024 router can be built
using Grass Valleys 512x512 or 512x1024 Routing switchers.

Using the 512x512 Routing Switcher

A 1024 x 1024 router can be built using four 512 x 512 frames coupled
together with the passive port expanders in four equipment racks. These
expanders can also be used to provide dual or quad, non-inverting outputs.

Using the 512x1024 Routing Switcher

A 1024 x 1024 router can be built using two 512 x 1024 frames coupled
together with the passive port expanders in two equipment racks.

Control Systems
The Trinix router can be controlled by a variety of control systems. The
Trinix router can be controlled by the Jupiter Facility Control System using
a Crosspoint bus connection (see Glossary) and either a VM-3000 System
Controller or a CM-4000 System Controller. The VM and CM controllers
can receive switching commands from a variety of serial sources, including
Jupiter control panels or an automation computer. Trinix can also be con-
trolled using a direct Ethernet (“CPL”) integration with the Grass Valley
Encore or SMS 7000 control system.

The Symmetric Trinix Frame

Trinix was designed with reliability and serviceability in mind. Each frame
has redundant power supplies, redundant fans, and a physical topology
that is designed to maximize cooling. Mission critical modules are front
loading and hot swappable.

Power Supplies
All Trinix frames accommodate a minimum of two load-sharing power
supplies and have two AC inputs. This duplication allows for full redun-
dant operations.
Each power supply is front loading, hot swappable, and has its own fans
for cooling. The 128 x 128 frame includes two fan modules, the 256 x 256
frame includes three, and a 512 x 512 frame includes six fan modules.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 33

Section 8 — Introduction

The Trinix frame offers plenty of power to spare the:

• Trinix DV-33128 runs on a 600W Power Supply Unit (PSU).
• Trinix NXT-128x128 runs on a 1000W PSU.
• Trinix DV-33256 and the DV-33512 both run on a 1250W PSU.
• Trinix NXT-512x512 runs on a 1300W PSU.

Note It is important that you refer to the Trinix rear panel’s frame markings for the
correct Fuse value and Power requirements.

The Asymmetric Frame

The Trinix Asymmetric frame offers the same features as the symmetric
frame but with a different input/output configuration. The same routing
circuit boards that are used in the Symmetric frame can be used in the
Asymmetric frame.
The Trinix Asymmetric frame can use up to two external 1 RU power
supply racks. Each power supply rack can accommodate up to four redun-
dant, load sharing power supply modules. The power supply rack also pro-
vides four AC input connectors. The wattage for each of these modules is:
• 1200 W for AC low line.
• 1800 W for AC high line.
The 128 x 256 frame includes three fan modules, the 256 x512 frame
includes seven, and the 512x1024 frame uses eight, four in each power
supply tray (two PS trays are the minimum).

Trinix Architecture
The architecture of the Trinix signal flow is organized into three boards:
Input board, Matrix board, and Output board. These boards are connected
to a passive backplane circuit board. Each Input and Output board can
accommodate 32 signals, as well as a mixed population of SD, HD, and
3Gb/s boards in increments of 32. Trinix frames may be built in increments
of 32 due to this signal accommodation.
Trinix Routing switchers with the HO-3G, HO-33110 HD and HO-33120
SD/HD/3G output boards can have signal reclocking be set to “Auto On/
Off” or “Off” for each of the 32 outputs. In the “Auto On/Off” mode, prop-
erly-formed standard data rate signals will be reclocked but other signals
will be bypassed (not reclocked). For more information on “Standard” data
rates, see Performance Characteristics on page 114.

34 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The VI-33100 “universal” input board uses inputs 0 - 15 are analog, SD, or
HD. Inputs 16 - 31 are SD or HD. The board auto-senses and accepts 16
composite analog SD, digital SD, or digital HD signals in any combination
and passes them in digital SD or digital HD form (as appropriate) to the
Trinix matrix board. When analog signals are received, an extensive set of
gain, phase, filtering, and other adjustments are available for each signal.
For a list of these adjustments, see the Analog Processing Control section on
page 66.
The BL-33000 Broadlinx option combines network interface, sync input,
and output monitor circuitry. Each board has two sync inputs and two
monitor outputs. Two boards can be installed which will provide four ports
for each. The sync reference supports generation of Vertical Interval Switch
Timing strobe from standard NTSC or PAL Black Burst or HDTV Tri-level
sync defined in the SMPTE 274M-1998 standard (see the Glossary). Sync
reference granularity is 32 outputs. An internal DIP switch is used to select
one of the available references for the respective 32-output blocks. Trinix
can also operate without a sync reference.
The Trinix fixed-frame routers all come standard as pre-wired single-
output units. The dual output option is implemented by adding physical
expanders in increments of 16 up to 256. Both outputs are non-inverting
and fully meet DVB-ASI (see Glossary) specifications.

Serviceability and Reliability

Trinix routing switchers are engineered by the same team that developed
the Venus and Venus2001 family of routing switchers and use many of the
same proven circuit designs that made the Venus line the best selling
routers in the world. In addition, Trinix employs cutting-edge technology
to reduce the number of components, increase the reliability of individual
parts, enhance air movement throughout the frame, and identify potential
system problems in time to take preventive measures.
Trinix also offers Broadlinx technology, which aids serviceability by pro-
viding status displays and monitoring functions through a network con-
nection.
All circuit boards contain some common circuitry for hot swapping, cir-
cuitry for DC-to-DC conversion, and a micro-controller as part of the
Broadlinx technology. Hot swap circuitry is used to simplify field servicing
and upgrades.
The DC-to-DC conversion is necessary because the frame design distrib-
utes one voltage, 48 volts, to all boards. This design requires each board to
convert the voltage level as needed.
Each board has a micro-controller that is part of an overall communications
bus, which is part of the hardware for the Broadlinx technology. This hard-
ware is what gathers all of the particular board information (voltages,

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 35

Section 8 — Introduction

signal presence, reclocking settings, etc.) as well as enables the firmware

updates via network connection.
For Protected Path operations, the Broadlinx software can be configured to
monitor router outputs that are feeding critical downstream equipment
(such as a transmitter). If the “primary” output signal is interrupted, the
system will automatically select the “secondary” output that is carrying the
same signal and trigger a system alarm. Protected path operation is avail-
able for single-frame and redundant frame system configurations. Pro-
tected path operation requires the HO-33120 HD/SD Output Boards or the
HO-3G Output Boards in the paths to be protected. For more information
on, see the Protected Paths section.

Broadlinx
The Broadlinx option, which consists of Broadlinx software running on the
NR-33000 Sync/NIC/OPM board, allows SMS 7000 or Encore control
using Grass Valley CPL (Control Point Language) through an Ethernet con-
nection.
Broadlinx will also support SNMP/NetCentral monitoring with the correct
license.
The monitoring network consists of a Windows PC, network interface con-
nection (NIC) circuitry on the NR-33000 board, and microprocessors on
each circuit board in the system. All of the processors are interconnected via
a communications bus (Com Bus).

Broadlinx Web Page Monitoring

Broadlinx uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) Web pages to deliver
detailed system information through the network to a PC with Microsoft
Internet Explorer 5.0 or newer (Internet Explorer 6 or newer is recom-
mended for best performance).
Broadlinx also provides Web pages for the following operations:
• Network configuration of the NR-33000 boards
• Downloading of software upgrades to the various boards in the system
• System monitoring using Internet Explorer
Typical aspects that can be monitored are “warnings” or alarms for all the
voltages on each circuit board, input signal presence, and output reclocking
status. Information about the current version of firmware that is being used
is also available.
For more information, see Broadlinx / Internet Explorer Monitoring on
page 311.

36 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 SNMP/NetCentral Monitoring
When enabled, the Trinix SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
agent allows the Grass Valley NetCentral application to monitor the Trinix
router. The Trinix SNMP agent is supplied with the 2.2 version (and newer
versions) of the Broadlinx software. By default, the SNMP agent is dis-
abled; a hardware address (MAC) based license key must be obtained for
the agent to become active. This license can be purchased as part of the orig-
inal system or can be purchased later by contacting Grass Valley Technical
Support. The MAC address is shown in the SNMP section of the Configu-
ration Broadlinx web access display. Clicking the Enter License Key button
will allow the entry of the Grass Valley-supplied license key.
Because the license is stored in the NR-33000 (Broadlinx) board’s flash
memory, a new key will have to be obtained if the board is ever replaced.
However, in the case of redundant NR-33000 installations, the Primary
Broadlinx board enables SNMP on the Secondary Broadlinx board. If either
the Primary or Secondary Broadlinx board is replaced, the remaining
Broadlinx board enables SNMP on the new Broadlinx board.

NetCentral
NetCentral is a suite of software modules that can reside on one or more
computers. These modules work together to monitor and report the opera-
tional status of SNMP-enabled devices. For example, Trinix, Encore,
7500NB/WB frames, Concerto Fast Controllers, and so forth.
When the Trinix SNMP Agent is activated, it will automatically send mes-
sages, or reports the device status to the NetCentral Monitoring Station.
(Up to five Monitoring Stations are supported.) These messages are given
a Status Level ranging from “Informational” to “Critical.” The NetCentral
Monitoring Station can be configured to listen to and, depending on Status
Level, respond to these messages in a variety of ways, including:
• Play a sound file or a computer beep.
• Send an E-mail message to one or more addresses.
• Send an E-mail message to pager or cell phone.
• Run a selected program.
• Open web browser and go to specified URL.
For example, when a Critical message is received, NetCentral can be
configured to open an Internet Explorer window and then go to the
Broadlinx web page’s Home page.
This configuration step is described in the Broadlinx / Internet Explorer
Monitoring on page 311 section.
The Trinix SNMP Agent provides support for NetCentral, but does not
include the actual NetCentral product, which is available separately. Once
the Trinix SNMP Agent is installed and configured, it can be monitored by

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 37

Section 8 — Introduction

NetCentral, or by any other SNMP management application. For more

information, please refer to the NetCentral User Guide.

Non-NetCentral Managers
For information concerning registration of Monitoring Stations (SNMP
Managers) for use with non-NetCentral SMNP management applications,
please refer to Configuring an SNMP Manager’s IP Address on page 303.

38 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Section 9
Planning Guide
Introduction
The information in this section is an overview of the Trinix Digital Video
router; as well as a guide to help understand the Trinix Routing switcher’s
configuration possibilities.
If you are installing the router at this time, please read this section before
reading the Hardware Installation section.
The details that are needed for the planning and designing of your facility
with the Trinix router in mind are included in this section.
The beginning of this section includes the conceptual descriptions and
drawings for those who need a basic understanding of the product and its
configuration options. Later subsections provide additional detail such as
connection diagrams and ordering information.
Grass Valley recommends that you terminate all unused outputs. Properly
shielded 75-ohm terminators or spare infrastructure coax cables should be
used. This step will ensure EMC compliance. Spare BNC panels that are not
connected to boards do not need to be terminated.
Grass Valley recommends that the cable lengths be no less than 10 Meters
(32.8 Feet) when re-entering the Trinix routing switcher through 3Gb/s
Input boards. This length does not apply to HD and SD operations.

Trinix Frames
The Symmetrical Trinix NXT and Trinix router switchers are available in
three fixed frame sizes each:

Note The DV33XXX frames are no longer available to purchase. However, this
manual covers specifics about these DV33XXX frames. The DV33XXX frames
and the TRX-NXTXXX frames are similar except for minor differences, which
are identified in this manual.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 39

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Legacy Frames
• DV-33128: 128 x 128 in 8 rack units (RU). See Figure 1 and Figure 2.
• DV-33256: 256 x 256 in 15 RUs. See Figure 4
• DV-33512: 512 x 512 in 32 RUs. See Figure 7 and Figure 8.

Trinix NXT Frames

• TRX-NXT-128x128: 128 x 128 in 8 rack units (RU). See Figure 3 on
page 42.
• TRX-NXT-256x256: 256 x 256 in 15 RUs. See Figure 5 on page 44.
• TRX-NXT-512x512: 512 x 512 in 32 RUs. See Figure 9 on page 48.

Trinix Asymmetrical Frames

The Asymmetric Trinix router is currently available in three frame sizes:
• TRX-NXT-128x256: 128x256 in 11 RUs. See Figure 11 on page 49 and
Figure 12 on page 50
• TRX-NXT-256x512: 256 x 512 in 22 RUs. See Figure 14 on page 51.
• TRX-NXT-512x1024: 512 x 1024 in 40 RUs + 1 RU top fan + 1 RU
bottom fan. Two (2) 1RU power supplies are also required. See
Figure 16 on page 52.

Figure 1. TRX-NXT-128x128 Front View (Door Removed).

Power supplies

FAN ALARM

SR-33000 Sync Fan modules

FAN ALARM
Reference / NR-33000
Broadlinx Board slots

Input/output boards Matrix board

(configuration varies)

40 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Frames

Figure 2. DV-33128 Rear Panel.

LEVEL
SUPER
0 0
96 112 16 32 14 15 1 2
80 48 13 3
64 64 12 4
48 80 11 5
INPUT EXPAND 32 16 112 96 10 9 7 6
OUTPUT EXPAND ULTRA 0 8
SYNC REDUNDANT
INT XPT CNTL
60Hz ENABLE MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR FRAME
A 1024 256 128 0
B 512 1536 512 768 256 384 14 15 1 2
C 2048 1024 512 13 3
12 4
11 5
DV-33256
DV-33512 DV-33128 10 9 7 6
128 x 256

LEVEL
SUPER
0 0
9611216 32 14 15 1 2
80 48 13 3
64 64 12 4
48 80 11 5
32 16 11296 10 9 7 6
0 8

MONITOR FRAME
128384 0
256 14 15 1 2
512 13 3
12 4
11 5
10 9 7 6
GPIO/TC 8

SECONDARY PRIMARY
OUTPUT MONITOR REF IN OUTPUT MONITOR REF IN
4 3 4 3 2 1 2 1

CONSOLE B COM BUS LAN B CROSSPOINT BUS CONTROL CONSOLE A COM BUS LAN A CROSSPOINT BUS

IP EXPAND
OP EXPAND
VIT REDUNDANT
INT XPT
60Hz ENABLE
OUTPUTS

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
A
97-128

B
C
ALARM

10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

9
17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
65-96

10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

9
17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
33-64

10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

9
17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
OUTPUTS

WARNING: FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION

AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE ONLY
1-32

WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE

115: 6.0A 250V SLOW BLOW
10

11

12

13

14

15

16
230: T2.5A 240V
1

9
17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
AUTO SELECT
INPUTS
97-128

100-130V/200-240V
6.0A/2.5A
47-63HZ
10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

9
17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
DC IN + DC IN -
INPUTS
65-96

10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

9
17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
INPUTS
33-64

PS B PS A
L N
10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

E E
17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
INPUTS

N L
1-32

10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 41

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 3. TRX-NXT-256x256 Rear Panel.

071827609_NXT-12xx128_rear

42 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Frames

Figure 4. DV-33256 Rear Panel

SECONDARY PRIMARY
NIC B NIC A

3 1

OP OP
MON MON

4 2
COM BUS COM BUS

3 1
CONSOLE CONSOLE
B A
REF REF
IN IN

PS B PS A See Figure 5 for detail 4 2

LEVEL CONTROL GPIO/TC CROSSPOINT BUS

IN EXPAND 0 SUPER
14150 2
OP EXPAND 961121632 1
VIT REDUNDANT 80 48 13 3
INT XPT CNTL 64 64 12 4
48 80 11 5
60Hz ENABLE
A 32 16 112
96 10 9 7 6
0
ULTRA 8
B
C
MONITOR FRAME
128 0
256384 1415 1 2
512 13 3
12 4
11 5
10 9 7 6
8

DC INPUT
42 - 54 VDC
30-24 AMPS
DC IN + DC IN -

WARNING: FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION ALARM

AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE ONLY
PS B PS A
WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE
115: 12.5A 250V SLOW BLOW
N 230: T6.3A 240V
L
E E
AUTO SELECT
N L 100-130V/200-240V
10.0A/5.0A
47-63HZ
INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS

INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS
1-32 33-64 65-96 97-128 1-32 33-64 65-96 97-128 129-160 161-192 193-224 225-256 129-160 161-192 193-224 225-256

17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24

8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27

11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11

28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13

30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15

32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32

16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 43

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 5. The DIP, Level, and Monitoring Switch for the DV-33256 and TRX-NXT 256x256
LEVEL
INPUT EXPAND 0 SUPER
14150 2
961121632 1
OUTPUT EXPAND 80 48 13 3
SYNC REDUNDANT 64 64 12 4
48 80 11 5
INT XPT CNTL
3216 112
96 10 9 7 6
60Hz ENABLE 0
ULTRA 8
A
B MONITOR FRAME
C 128
256384 141501 2
512 13 3
12 4
11 5
10 9 7 6
8

44 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Frames

Figure 6. TRX-NXT 256x256 Rear panel

071827609_NXT-256x256_rear.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 45

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 7. DV-33512 Main frame and Associated Power Supply Unit.

SR-33000 Sync

VADJOK OK
Reference /

AC DC
NR-33000

AC DC
VADJ OKOK
Broadlinx Board Power supply unit may be
slots
mounted above or below

VADJ OK OK
main chassis

AC DC
PS A PS C

AC DC
VADJ OK OK
PRIMARY

SECONDARY
PS B PS D

FAN ALARM

FAN ALARM

FAN ALARM

FAN ALARM

FAN ALARM

FAN ALARM
Fan modules

FAN A FAN B FAN C FAN D FAN E FAN F

POWER ALARM IFC

Input/output
boards
(configuration
varies)

OP
MON

INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS 2

481 - 512 449 - 480 417 - 448 385 - 416 225 - 256 193 - 224 161 - 192 129 - 160 97 - 128 65 - 96 33 - 64 1 - 32 97 - 128 65 - 96 33 - 64 1 - 32
INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS REF
IN

3
INPUTS 1 - 256 / OUTPUTS 1 - 256

4
INPUTS 257 - 512 / OUTPUTS 1 - 256

Matrix boards
INPUTS 1 - 256 / OUTPUTS 257 - 512
INPUTS 257 - 512 / OUTPUTS 257 - 512

INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS

INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS
353 - 384 321 - 352 289 - 320 257 - 288 353 - 384 321 - 352 289 - 320 257 - 288 481 -512 449 - 480 417 - 448 385 - 416 225 - 256 193 - 224 161 - 192 129 - 160

Rear view. See Figure 8

and Figure 10 for detail
Input/output
boards
(configuration
varies)

46 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Frames

Figure 8. DV-33512 Main Frame and Power Supply Frame.

PS IFC FAN IFC

A

1 XPT BUS

B
DC INPUT 2 NOT FUSED
42 - 54 VDC OP
MON
30 - 24 AMPS
A
DC IN + DC IN -
3

4
RP-33500
B
board. See
DC INPUT 1 NOT FUSED
42 - 54 VDC
Figure 10 COM BUS COM BUS
ALARM

30 - 24 AMPS

DC IN + DC IN -
1
for detail

2
LEVEL
0 SUPER 0
961121632 1415 1 2
REF 80 48 13 3
64 64 12 4
IN 48 80 11 5
321611296 10 9 7 6
ULTRA 0 8

INPUT EXPAND
MONITOR FRAME OUTPUT EXPAND
3 1024 0 SYNC REDUNDANT
512 1536 1415 1 2 INT XPT CNTL
2048 13 3 60Hz ENABLE
12 4 A
11 5
10 9 7 6 B
8 C

INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS

INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS
129 - 160 161 - 192 193 - 224 225 - 256 385 - 416 417 - 448 449 - 480 481 - 512 257 - 288 289 - 320 321 - 352 353 - 384 257 - 288 289 - 320 321- 352 353 - 384

DC OUTPUT 2 DC OUTPUT 1
42 - 54 VDC 42 - 54 VDC
30 - 24 AMPS 30 - 24 AMPS
DC OUT + DC OUT - DC OUT + DC OUT - PRIMARY

2 1
REF IN
COM BUS NIC A

CONSOLE A

SECONDARY
DC INPUT 2 DC INPUT 1
42 - 54 VDC 42 - 54 VDC 4 3
30 - 24 AMPS 30 - 24 AMPS REF IN
COM BUS NIC B
DC IN + DC IN - DC IN + DC IN -

CONSOLE B
AC INPUT: 100-240 V ~, 10.0-5.0A, 50-60Hz AC INPUT: 100-240 V ~, 10.0-5.0A, 50-60Hz GPIO/TC FRAME IFC
XPT BUS
100-120V: 12.5A, 250V, SLO BLO 100-120V: 12.5A, 250V, SLO BLO
200-240V: T6.3A, 250V 200-240V: T6.3A, 250V CONTROL
PS D PS C PS B PS A

L N L N
E E E E
N L N L
WARNING: FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION
AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE ONLY
WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 47

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 9. TRX-NXT-512x512 Rear Panel

071827609_trx-512x512_connections

48 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Frames

Figure 10. DIP, Switch, and Monitor settings DV- 33512 and TRX NXT512x512
LEVEL

071827609_DIP, Switch, and Monitor settings- 512

0 SUPER 0
961121632 1415 1 2
80 48 13 3
64 64 12 4
48 80 11 5
3216 11296 10 9 7 6
ULTRA 0 8

INPUT EXPAND
MONITOR FRAME OUTPUT EXPAND
1024 0 SYNC REDUNDANT
512 1536 1415 1 2 INT XPT CNTL
2048 13 3 60Hz ENABLE
12 4 A
11 5
10 9 7 6 B
8 C

Figure 11. TRX-NXT-128x256 Asymmetric Frame-Front

Fan modules

Matrix
boards

Broadlinx
Boards
071827610_128x256_Front

Input Boards

Output Boards

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 49

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 12. TRX-NXT-128x256 Asymmetric Frame-Back

Fan modules and Exhaust

vents

Input and Output boards

The outer four slots are
Output boards
The inner eight slots are
See Input boards
Figure 13
for detail
DC Power inputs
OPM
Board Matrix boards

SR module

Figure 13. The Level, Monitor, and Frame Switch For the 128x256 Routing Switcher 071827610_128x256_rear
27612_LEVEL_MONITOR_128x256

50 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Frames

Figure 14. TRX-NXT-256x512 Asymmetric Frame, Front and Back

Fan modules and Exhaust

vents

Input and Output

boards
The outer four slots are
Output boards
The inner eight slots are
Input boards

DC Power inputs

Matrix boards
071827609_256X512-Frame_Front-view

071827609_256X512-Frame_Back-view
SR module

Broadlinx boards See Figure 15

for detail

Output boards

Figure 15. The Level, Monitor, and Frame Switch For the 256x512 Routing Switcher
071827612_LEVEL_MONITOR_256x512

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 51

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 16. TRX-NXT-512x1024 Asymmetric Frame, Front and Back

Fan modules

Output Boards

DC Power inputs

Matrix and Primary

Broadlinx boards

See Figure 17 on
page 53 for detail

Input Boards

Matrix and Sec-

ondary Broadlinx
boards

DC Power inputs

Output Boards

Fan modules

52 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Frames

Figure 17. The Level, Monitor, and Frame Switch For the 512x1024 Routing Switcher

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 53

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 18. Protected Paths, Signal Flow, and Power Supply System for TRX-NXT-512x512 Router.

54 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Frames

Power Supplies
The symmetrical Trinix routing family uses an internal power supply. The
128 and 256 frames can use two power supplies. The optional (and recom-
mended) second power supply provides redundancy and increased reli-
ability due to load sharing; both supplies work less, creating less strain and
decreasing the likelihood of failure of either unit.
All power supplies are front loading, can be hot-swapped, and has its own
fan for cooling. The supply uses automatic line sensing technology to adapt
the supply to all major power standards throughout the world.

Note Grass Valley strongly recommends, whenever possible, using the AC high
line to reduce line currents and heat within the power supplies.

In AC power applications, the 512x512 frames are equipped with two

power supplies mounted in a separate frame. Space for two additional sup-
plies for redundancy is provided. Redundant power supplies are highly
recommended for On-Air or Business-critical routers. The 512x512 router’s
power supply frame may be mounted above or below the router’s main
frame, depending on video cable routing requirements (or weight distribu-
tion requirements).
The back panel of the frame provides a separate AC connector for each
power supply. Each power supply has its own separate IEC AC power
cord. Each power cord should be plugged into a separate dedicated (20A
AC low line, 10A AC high line) power circuit. This action prevents the
router from having one failed supply being able to trip the breaker on a
heavily loaded circuit, and then temporarily shutting off other functioning
power supplies or equipment. The back panel of the frame also provides an
optional 48VDC input connector. The 48VDC input connector is an option
for additional power redundancy. DC power can be supplied by an
external “Tertiary” supply (a Trinix option), or by a customer provided
48VDC power source. (See DC Power Input section for the Trinix power
requirements.)

CAUTION External 48 VDC Inputs are not fused. Customers must ensure that the 48
VDC power sources, which they must provide, are properly fused.

Each power supplies deliver 48 volts to all components and the individual
components convert down the voltages for their particular need.
It is possible to operate the router with a combination of internal power
supplies and an external DC power source for additional redundancy.

Asymmetrical Router

Note For information about optional Power Supply configurations for the Asym-
metrical routers, see Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations on
page 227.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 55

Section 9 — Planning Guide

The Asymmetrical Trinix router provides two isolated DC input power

connectors only. An external AC to DC power supply provides power for
these connectors or a customer may provide a 48 VDC power source.

CAUTION External 48 VDC Inputs are not fused. Customers must ensure that the 48
VDC power sources, which they must provide, are properly fused.

An external power supply rack is available that will accommodate up to

four redundant, load sharing power supply modules for each power con-
nector on the frame. The 128x256 and 256x512 frames each have two power
connectors. The back panel of the power supply rack provides a separate
AC connector for each power supply. Each power supply cord should be
plugged into a separate dedicated (20A AC low line and 10A AC high line)
power circuit.

Note Grass Valley strongly recommends, whenever possible, using the AC high
line to reduce line currents and heat within the power supplies.

The Trinix 512x1024 frames have a minimum of two PS trays with four
power modules in each tray. Every power supply module that is used in an
Asymmetrical frame has its own separate IEC AC power cord. The Primary
power supply trays connect to the frame in the rear of the chassis on the A1
and A2 correctors. Secondary power supplies may be added to the B1 and
B2 connectors using an additional pair of power supply trays (See Trinix
Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations on page 227, for more informa-
tion).
(See the DC Power Input section of the Electrical Specifications, for the Asym-
metrical Trinix power requirements.)

Cooling System
The Trinix router uses fan modules (FM-33000) for cooling the main
chamber of the frame. A fan module consists of two blower-type fans that
are housed in a mechanical assembly. The 128 x 128 frame uses two mod-
ules, the 256 x 256 frame uses three, and the 512 uses six. The 128x256 frame
uses three fan modules, and the 256x512 frame uses seven fan modules. The
fan modules are front-loading and can be hot-swapped.

Note The door on the front of all Trinix frames should be closed when the router is
in use.

Airflow openings for the 128 frame are shown in Figure 19. Air is taken in
from the sides of the frame (primarily the left side), where the air is drawn
across the Input and Output boards, past the matrix board, and up to the
top rear of the frame where it is expelled from the router. A small amount
of air is drawn from the right side of the frame as well to help cool the
matrix boards. A Front-Air Vent is provided as an additional router-cooling
option. This option is described on page 425.

56 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Frames

Figure 19. Airflow Openings for TRX-NXT-128x128 Frame.

OUT OUT
IN

IN

IN

Right side Rear Left side

Airflow openings for the 256 and 512 frames are shown in Figure 20 and
Figure 21. Air is taken in from the bottom of the frame (cut-outs are located
on the very bottom of the sides), and from the central area of the left and
right sides. The air is drawn to the top rear of the frame, across all of the
Input and Output boards as well as the Matrix boards, and then expelled
out the back of the router.

Figure 20. Airflow Openings for TRX-NXT-256x256 Frame.

OUT
Right side Rear Left side

IN IN

IN IN

IN IN

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 57

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 21. Airflow Openings for TRX-NXT-512x512 Power Supply and Main Frame.
Right side Rear Left side
IN IN

OUT
OUT

IN IN
IN IN

IN IN

Using a set of central fan modules to cool the main chamber eliminates the
possibility of cooling loss in one area due to failure of a single fan.The
system will continue to operate if a fan does fail. Grass Valley recommends
that you replace the fan and return the system to normal redundant opera-
tion as soon as possible.

Cooling Asymmetric Frames

Air is taken in from the bottom of the frame (cut-outs are located on the
very bottom of the sides). This air is then drawn up through all of the Input
and Output boards as well as the matrix boards to the top rear of the frame.
The air is then expelled out the back of the router. The airflow openings for
the 128x256 frame are shown in Figure 22 on page 59. The airflow openings
for the 256x512 frame are shown in Figure 23.
The 512x1024 frame is the result of years of researching how to cool a
routing switcher. The routing switcher has two fans, one on the top and one
on the bottom. Air is drawn in from the bottom of the fans and is exhausted
through the top of the frame. A two (2) RU space should be kept free on the
bottom of the frame and fan to ensure enough airflow. Do NOT place any-
thing on the top of the 512x1024 frame to prevent over heating.
A two (2) RU vent option is also available to draw intake air in from the
front of the frame (Figure 24 on page 60).

58 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Frames

Figure 22. Airflow Openings for the TRX-NXT-128x256 Main Frame

OUT

071827609_128x256-Cooling
IN

Figure 23. Airflow Openings for the TRX-NXT-256x512 Main Frame.

Side Rear

OUT

071827609_256X512-Frame_Cooling

IN

A two (2) RU space should be kept free on the bottom of the frame and fan
to ensure enough airflow to prevent the routing switcher from overheating.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 59

Section 9 — Planning Guide

A two (2) RU vent option is also available to draw intake air in from the
front of the frame.

Figure 24. TRX-NXT-512x1024

OUT

1 RU Fans located at
the top and bottom
of the frame
071827612-512x1024-w-fans_r1.ai

2 RU Air Vent
located at the
bottom of the frame
071827612-512x1024-w-fans_r1.ai

IN

60 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Frames

Sync Reference Options

For synchronous vertical interval switching the same sync reference signal
must be sent to the control system (for example, Jupiter CM-4000 or CM-
4400) and to the Trinix. (The Trinix will operate without a sync connection
but switching will be non-synchronous.) Each sync input uses looping 75-
ohm BNC connectors.
The sync signal can be NTSC or PAL black burst, or tri-level (HD) sync, and
up to four sync signals can be mixed within the same frame on an output-
board basis. For example, NTSC sync could be used for one set of 32
outputs and HD sync for another set of 32 outputs.
In the TRX-NXT-128x128, TRX-NXT-256x256, and theTRX-NXT-512x1024
Routing switchers, one or two independent sync signals can be connected
to a NR-33000 Broadlinx board and either of these can then be selected for
use on each output board. Adding a second Broadlinx board provides four
independent sync sources.
In TRX-NXT-512x512 Routing switchers, which are normally supplied
with an SR-33500 Sync/OPM board, up to four independent sync sources
can be connected and any of the four can be selected for each output board.
If desired, an NR-33000 board can be installed in the associated power
supply frame to provide Broadlinx capability. It is also possible to divide
the sync sources between the SR-33500 and the Broadlinx board but the
maximum number of sync sources is always four.
In TRX-NXT-256x512 Routing switchers, which are normally supplied
with a TRX-SR Sync/OPM board, up to four independent sync sources can
be connected and any of the four can be selected for each output board. It
is also possible to divide the sync sources between the TRX-SR and the
Broadlinx board but the maximum number of sync sources is always four.
In the TRX-NXT-128x256 and TRX-NXT-512x1024 Routing switchers, the
TRX-OPM board does not process sync references. Sync is supplied exclu-
sively from the NR-33000 boards.

Sync Redundant mode

For all Trinix routers Two Broadlinx boards can be operated in the Sync
Redundant mode. That is, the sync signals are looped through each board.
If the primary Broadlinx board fails, the system will switch automatically
to the secondary board. The number of sync signals is limited to two for
redundant operation.
For Sync reference details, see Sync Reference Connections on page 157.

Output Monitoring
The TRX-NXT-128x128, and the TRX-NXT-256x256 frames, uses two pairs
of output monitor ports, which are provided by the NR-33000 board (one
side of each pair is inverted). Two additional dual ports are optionally

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 61

Section 9 — Planning Guide

available when a second NR-33000 is added; this would provide four

monitor ports.
• The SR-33500 Sync/OPM board, on the TRX-NXT-512x512 frames, pro-
vides four monitoring ports.
• The TRX-SR Sync/OPM board, on the TRX-NXT-256x512 frames, pro-
vides four monitoring ports.
• The TRX-OPM board, on the TRX-NXT-128x256 and TRX-NXT-
512x1024 frames, provides four monitoring ports.

Symmetric Frames
For configurations that require multiple frames, the monitor signals are
brought through a Port expander used as a combiner (see Monitoring with
Expanded Systems).

Asymmetric Frames
The TRX-SR Sync/OPM and TRX-OPM boards provide four monitor
inputs to accommodate cascading multiple frames into a single output
monitor stream. These boards are specific to the asymmetrical routers, for
more information see Asymmetrical Frames on page 200 in the Monitoring
section.

3Gp/s Output Monitoring

The TRX-GPMEZ-3G mezzanine module on the TRX-HO-3G base Output
Module in the Trinix Symmetrical frame, receives a stream that is
1080p59.95, it is the down-converted to 1080i59.95.
The TRX-SR Sync/OPM and TRX-OPM boards support 3Gp/s Output
Monitoring in the asymmetrical frames.

Signal Flow
Trinix is a three-board routing system, where the input board, output
board, and matrix board are the basic modules.
The signal flow through a 128 x 128 routing system is shown in Figure 25
on page 63 as an example. Inputs are received and outputs are delivered to
the rear of the frame directly with a connection to the rear panels (no
cabling).

62 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Frames

Figure 25. Input and Output Routing Through Matrix Board For 128 x 128 Routing Switcher.

32 Input 32 Output
Card Card

32 Input 32 Output
Card Card
Matrix Card
(128 x 128)
32 Input 32 Output
Card Card

32 Input 32 Output
Card Card

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 63

64
B
B
CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS
0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96 Outputs 480-511 JO_75
Inputs 480-511

1F
JI_15 12

0F
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
(mez) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127
Inputs 448-479 JMx_47 480-511 448-479 416-447 384-415 384-415 416-447 448-479 480-511 Outputs 448-479 JO_74

1E

0E
JI_14
Section 9 — Planning Guide

Inputs 416-447 CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS Outputs 416-447 JO_73

1D

0D
JI_13
0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96
16
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
Inputs 384-415
(base) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127 Outputs 384-415 JO_72

1C
JMx_46 352-383 320-351 288-319 256-287 287-256 319-288 351-320 383-352

0C
JI_12

B
CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS
Inputs 352-383 0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96 Outputs 352-383 JO_71
1B

JI_11 11

0B
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
(mez) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127

A
JMx_45 224-255 192-223 160-191 128-159 511-480 479-448 447-416 415-384 Outputs 320-351 JO_70

A
Inputs 320-351
1A

JI_10

0A
B
Inputs 288-319 CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS Outputs 288-319 JO_69
19h

JI_09
0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96

09
15
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
Inputs 256-287
(base) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127 Outputs 256-287 JO_68
JMx_44 96-127 64-95 32-63 0-31 352-383 320-351 288-319 256-287
18h

JI_08

08
A
B

CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS

Inputs 224-255 0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96 Outputs 224-255 JO_67
13
17h

JI_07

07
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
(mez) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127

A
Inputs 192-223 JMx_43 384-415 416-447 448-479 480-511 128-159 160-191 192-223 224-255 Outputs 192-223 JO_66
16h

JI_06

06
B
Inputs 160-191 CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS Outputs 160-191 JO_65
15h

JI_05

05
0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96
17
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
Inputs 128-159
(base) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127 Outputs 128-159 JO_64
JMx_42 256-287 288-319 320-351 352-383 31-0 63-32 95-64 127-96
14h

JI_04

04
(0x37) (0x36) (0x35) (0x34)

(0x27) (0x26) (0x25) (0x24)

Figure 26. Signal Flow for the 512x1024 Routing Switcher - Top

CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS

A
A

Inputs 96-127 0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96 Outputs 96-127 JO_63

10
13h

03
JI_03
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
(mez) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127
Inputs 64-95 JMx_41 128-159 160-191 192-223 224-255 255-224 223-192 191-160 159-128 Outputs 64-95 JO_62
12h

JI_02

02
Inputs 32-63 CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS Outputs 32-63 JO_61
11h

JI_01

01
0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96
14
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
Inputs 0-31
(base) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127 Outputs 0-31 JO_60
JMx_40 0-31 32-63 64-95 96-127 96-127 64-95 32-63 0-31
10h

JI_00

00
(0x33) (0x32) (0x31) (0x30)

(0x23) (0x22) (0x21) (0x20)

A

A
(Logical)
Physical

(Logical)
Physical
071827612_Trinix 512x1024 top Layout.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 65
Trinix Frames

(Logical)
Physical
071827612_Trinix 512x1024 Bottom Layout.
Physical
(Logical)

A
CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS

(0x33) (0x32) (0x31) (0x30)

0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96

10
14 Outputs 512-543 JO_80
(0x23) (0x22) (0x21) (0x20)
00

JII_20 Inputs 0-31 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3

(mez) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127
A

JMx_50 0-31 32-63 64-95 96-127 608-639 576-607 544-575 512-543

11
Outputs 544-575 JO_81
01

JII_21 Inputs 32-63

CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS

12
Outputs 576-607 JO_82
0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96
02

JII_22 Inputs 64-95 10

0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
(base) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127

13
JMx_51 128-159 160-191 192-223 224-255 736-767 704-735 672-735 640-671
Outputs 608-639 JO_83
03

JII_23 Inputs 96-127

A
Figure 27. Signal Flow for the 512x1024 Routing Switcher - Bottom

CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS

(0x37) (0x36) (0x35) (0x34)

B
0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96
17

14
Outputs 640-671 JO_84
(0x27) (0x26) (0x25) (0x24)

0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
04

JII_24 Inputs 128-159

(mez) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127
JMx_52 256-287 288-319 320-351 352-383 512-543 544-575 576-607 608-639

15
Outputs 672-703 JO_85
05

JII_25 Inputs 160-191

CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS

16
Outputs 704-735 JO_86
0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96
06

JII_26 Inputs 192-223 13

A

0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
(base) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127

17
JMx_53 384-415 416-447 448-479 480-511 640-671 672-735 704-735 736-767
Outputs 736-767 JO_87
07

JII_27 Inputs 224-255

B
CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS
0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96

18
15 JO_88
A

Outputs 768-799
08

JII_28 Inputs 256-287 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3

(mez) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127
JMx_54 96-127 64-95 32-63 0-31 864-895 832-863 800-831 768-799

19
JO_89

A
Outputs 800-831
09

JII_29 Inputs 288-319

CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS

1A
Outputs 832-863 JO_90
0A

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

JII_30 0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96
Inputs 320-351 11
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
B
(base) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127

1B
JMx_55 224-255 192-223 160-191 128-159 992-1023 960-991 928-959 896-927
Outputs 864-895 JO_91
0B

JII_31 Inputs 352-383

A
CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS

B
0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96

1C
16 Outputs 896-927 JO_92
JII_32 Inputs 384-415 0C 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
(mez) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127
JMx_56 352-383 320-351 288-319 256-287 768-799 800-831 832-863 864-895

1D
Outputs 928-959 JO_93

0D

B
JII_33 Inputs 416-447
CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS JO_94

1E
Outputs 960-991
0 32 64 96 0 32 64 96

0E
JII_34 Inputs 448-479 12
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
(base) 31 63 95 127 31 63 95 127

1F
Outputs 992-1023 JO_95
JMx_57 480-511 448-479 416-447 384-415 896-927 928-959 960-991 992-1023

0F
JII_35 Inputs 480-511

B
B
Section 9 — Planning Guide

For a description of the various Input, Output, and Matrix boards available
for Trinix, contact your Grass Valley account representative.

Analog Processing Control

The VI-33100 universal input module accepts analog as well as digital sig-
nals. Adjustments for analog signals include the following:

• Save/recall settings • Insert Error Detec- • Blank video (per

tion and Handling VBI line)
• Mono mode
(EDH) data
• Add setup (per VBI
• Setup on/off
• Contrast / Y gain line)
• Chroma kill
• Saturation / • Reserve VBI line for
• Comb/trap filter chroma gain data
• AGC on/off • Brightness / Y • Horizontal timing
offset
• Manual gain control • Detail enhancement
• Hue / chroma
• ACC on/off • Display channel
phase
status
• Manual chroma
• Notch decode on/
control
off (VBI)
• Chroma kill (VBI)

For more information about the VI-33100 module, please refer to Chapter
6: Analog Input Processing on page 375.

Pre-wiring
All Trinix Routing switchers are pre-wired to the size of the frame. For
example, a 128-frame is pre-wired to 128 x 128 with all rear panels and
BNCs in place; the 256-frame is pre-wired to 256 x 256.
By convention, Routing switcher sizes are shown as:
M x N (P x Q)
This indicates that the functional router size is M x N and is pre-wired to (P
x Q). Symmetrical Trinix pre-wiring is only possible in multiples of 128 x
128, as that is the smallest frame size increment.

Connector Numbering
Late-model Trinix routers have video input/output connectors that begin
with “1” instead of “0.” An adhesive overlay set, which indicates connector
groups using a 0-based numbering scheme (for example, Inputs “0-31,”
Inputs “32-63,” etc.) is provided for customers who are using a 0-based
control system such as Jupiter.

66 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Frames

Alarm System
The operation of cooling fans, frame power supplies, on-board power sup-
plies, and primary vs. secondary Broadlinx boards are all monitored. Any
alarm for these critical items is treated as a Primary alarm. With the release
of Broadlinx 3.1, the router’s system alarm has two modes, “No alarms”
and “Primary alarm.” All alarms (multiple fan failure, power supply
failure, etc.) are considered Primary alarms. All major components include
a local alarm LED.
The master alarm indicator is on the front panel (Power/Alarm) where
green indicates normal operation and red indicates a Primary alarm.

Symmetrical Frame
The rear panel Alarm BNC is configured to report primary alarms only. The
TRX-NXT-128x128 and TRX-NXT-256x256 is configured via jumper on the
NR/SR-33000 board. The location of the board is shown in Figure 63 on
page 136 and Figure 65 on page 138. The TRX-NXT-512x512 is configured
via a jumper on the RP-33500 512 x 512 Rear Panel board as shown on
Figure 68 on page 141.
The Alarm BNC for the TRX-NXT-256x512 version is configured the same
as the TRX-NXT-128x128 or TRX-NXT-256x256. In other words, through
the jumper on the NR-33000 board. See Figure 28.

Note Secondary alarms are no longer supported.

Fan and Power Supply alarm status is concentrated on the SC board and is
reported through the OPM board for the Asymmetrical frames. The Power
Supply alarms are configured with the dual in-line package (DIP) switches
on the SC boards. (See Configuration DIP Switches on page 231)

Figure 28. Rear Panel Master Alarm Circuit (left) and Example Of Customer-supplied Indicator
Circuit (right).

EXTERNAL CIRCUIT
(EXAMPLE)
REAR PANEL BNC
NOT TO EXCEED
24 VDC @ 20 mA

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 67

Section 9 — Planning Guide

All of the alarm and status information is gathered by the Broadlinx tech-
nology to make it available to the user via Web pages. For more informa-
tion, see Section 13-Broadlinx Software on page 285.

68 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

Duplication and Expansion

Trinix router’s inputs and outputs are designed to duplicated or expanded
using passive splitter/combiner expansion panels. Unused connectors
should be terminated for optimum performance.

Note For Jupiter-controlled (0-based) systems, the input/output numbers in the

following discussion should be decreased by one (1). For example, block 1-
256 should be understood as block 0-255, etc.

Frame numbers are determined by the input/output blocks served by the

particular frame. For example, for a TRX-NXT-256x256 router, inputs 1-256
and outputs 1-256 must be connected to frame zero. For more information
about frame numbering, see Frame Number Settings on page 212.

Output Duplication - Dual

The PE-33016 and PE2X2-3G Port expanders are passive, transformer-
based modules that can be used to provide two copies of the same signal.
The PE-33016 should be used for SD and HD signals. The PE2x2-3G pro-
vides the necessary bandwidth for 3Gp/s operations. The PE2x2-3G can
also be used for SD and HD operation. Functionality of the expander is bi-
directional and depends on connections only; no configuration is required.
Figure 29 and Figure 30 show a splitting application. In the figures below,
the PE33016 Port expander is used for an example only. Use the PE33016
Port expander for HD operations and the PE2x2-3G Port expander for
3Gp/s operations. Unused connectors should be terminated for optimum
performance.

Figure 29.

0 -255 16 0 -255
0 - 255 Trinix PE 33016
used as
256x256 splitters Dual outputs

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 69

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 30. PE-33016 Used to Provide 16 Dual Outputs.

1A 1A

1B 1B
(Terminated)

Interior side Exterior side

In the splitting application, a port expander can be used to provide dual

outputs in groups of 16 outputs. Use the PE33016 Port expander for HD
operations and the PE2x2-3G Port expander for 3Gp/s operations. All
outputs are non-inverting. For example, a 256 x 256 router could be
arranged as follows:
• 256 inputs x 240 single outputs and 16 dual outputs - uses 1 Port
expander, or
• 256 inputs x 224 single outputs and 32 dual outputs - uses 2 Port
expander, or
• 256 inputs x 208 single outputs and 48 dual outputs - uses 3 Port
expander... etc.
Figure 31 shows a router with 240 single outputs and 16 dual outputs. In
the figure below, the PE33016 Port expander is used as an example.

Figure 31. 240 Single Outputs and 16 Dual Outputs Example

1
1 - 16 PE 33016 1 - 16
Frame 0 used as
splitter Dual outputs

1 - 256

Trinix
17 - 256
256 x 256
Single outputs

70 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

In this application, 16 of the PE-33016 or PE2x2-3G rear BNCs can be used

for inputs (outputs from the router) and all 32 of the front BNCs can be used
for outputs.1
The MK-33000 Mounting kit can have a maximum of 16 PE-33016 or PE2x2-
3G modules mounted. The mounting kit is eight rack units high and is
approximately four inches deep. Figure 32 on page 72 shows a 128 input
router with a single port expander mounted in an MK-33000. The port
expander can be either the PE33016 or the PE2x2-3G Port expanders. Using
a single port expander provides 112 single outputs and 16 dual outputs.
Figure 33 on page 73 shows a 256 input router with 256 dual outputs; this
arrangement requires 16 PE-33016 Port expanders.

1. All unused connectors must be terminated. 16 terminators are supplied with each PE-33016.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 71

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 32. Use of Single PE-33016 to Provide Dual Outputs for 16 Switcher Outputs

1 2 3 16
PE-33016-1 PE-33016-1
Dual outputs Exterior Interior
390-1796-00 390-1797-00
1A
1B These 16
2A cables connect
2B to rear of PE
3A
3B

16A
16B
Unused BNCs
Terminate

72 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

Figure 33. PE-33016 Port Expanders Provides 256 Dual outputs for 256 Input Switcher.

A
B
C

EXTERIOR

16 PE-30016 Expander
Modules in MK-33000
Mounting Kit

INTERIOR

3.25 in.
(82 mm)

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 73

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Output Duplication - Quad

The PE-33008 Port expander can provide quad outputs in groups of 16
outputs for SD or HD options. The PE-33008 Port expander functions for
data rates from 270Mb to 1.5 Gb. All outputs are non-inverting. A 128 x 128
Routing switcher could be arranged in the following manner:
• 128 inputs x 112 single outputs and 16 quad outputs - uses 2 port
expanders
or
• 128 inputs x 96 single outputs and 32 quad outputs - uses 4 port
expanders
or
• 128 inputs x 80 single outputs and 48 dual outputs - uses 6 port
expander... etc.
In this application, the eight (8) PE-33008 rear BNCs are used for inputs
(outputs from the router) and all 32 of the front BNCs are used for outputs.1
Up to 16 PE-33008 modules can be mounted in an MK-33000 Mounting Kit,
which is 8 RU high and approximately 4 inches (100 mm) deep.
Figure 34 shows a 128 input router with two PE-33008s mounted in an MK-
33000; this provides 112 single outputs and 16 quad outputs. A 256 input
router with 128 single outputs and 128 quad outputs would appear similar

1.
All unused connectors must be terminated with 75-ohm terminators; for PE-33008 applications terminators must be supplied
by end-user.

74 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

to the system shown in Figure 33; this arrangement would require 16 PE-
33008 Port expanders.

Figure 34. Use of 2

PE 33008s to Provide
Quad Outputs for 16
Switcher Outputs

Connections
to 2nd
PE-33008
are similar

PE-33008-1 PE-33008-1
Exterior Interior
1 2 3 8
390-1795-00 390-1794-00
Quad outputs

1A
1B
1C
1D
2A
2B
2C
2D These cables
connect to
3A rear of PE
3B
3C
3D
8A
8B
8C
8D
Unused BNCs
Unused BNCs

Terminate
Terminate

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 75

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Expanded Systems
The PE-33016, PE-2X2 3G, and PE-33008 Port expanders can be used to
combine outputs (SD and HD options) for an input expansion application.
The PE-2X2 3G is required for 2X2 expansion in 3G systems, but will also
work for SD and HD systems. The PE-33016 and PE-33008 will not work
with 3G systems. In Figure 35 and Figure 36, a PE-33016 or PE-2X2 3G is
downstream of the router. The router will present only one of the two pos-
sible signals to each combiner, which will then produce two copies of that
signal. Only one of the input signals will be present at a time and this signal
is then duplicated. Any unused connectors should be terminated for
optimum performance.
The port expanders are mounted in an MK-33000 Mounting Kit as
described previously (Figure 33 on page 73).

Figure 35. PE-33016 Used as a Combiner.

1A 1A

1B 1B

Interior side Exterior side

76 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

Possible expanded configurations include:

• 1024 inputs x 512 dual outputs
• 1024 inputs x 1024 dual outputs
• 512 inputs x 1024 outputs
• 2048 inputs x 2048 outputs (SD and HD only)
• 1024 inputs x 1024 outputs
Some of these configurations are shown on the following pages. Notice that
the same port expander type is used for both downstream combining (for
input expansion) and upstream splitting (for output expansion). All
outputs are non-inverting. In the figures below the PE33016 Port expander
is used as an example. Use the PE33016 Port expander for HD operations
and the PE2x2-3G Port expander for 3Gp/s operations.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 77

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 36. Examples of Input and Output Expansion.

Frame 0

1 - 512

Trinix 1 - 512
512 x 512
Inputs expanded
to 1024 32 1 - 512
PE 33016
used as
combiners Dual outputs

Frame 1

513 - 1024 512 - 1024

Trinix
512 x 512
1 - 16
Frame 0
1 - 512

Trinix 17 - 512
512 x 512
Inputs expanded
to 1024 (restricted) 32 17 - 512
PE 33016
used as
combiners Dual outputs

Frame 1

513 - 1024 1 - 512

Trinix
512 x 512

Frame 0

1 - 512 1 - 512

Trinix
512 x 512

Outputs
expanded
32
PE 33016
to 1024
1 - 512
used as
splitters
Frame 2 1 - 16
Frame 0

1 - 512 513 - 1024

1 - 512

17 - 512 Trinix
Trinix 512 x 512
512 x 512

Outputs
expanded
32
PE 33016
to 1024
17 - 512
used as (restricted)
splitters
Frame 2

17 - 512 513 - 1024

Trinix
512 x 512

The term “restricted” refers to a wiring scheme where some signal paths are
not available. For example, the second system shown in the above figure
will not allow outputs 1-16 to receive inputs 513-1024.

78 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

Figure 37. 1024 x 1024 Systems.

Frame 0

1 - 512
Trinix
1 - 512 32
512 x 512
PE-33016 1 - 512
used as
1 - 512 32 combiners Dual outputs
513 - 1024
PE-33016
used as
splitters

Frame 2

1 - 512

Trinix
512 x 512
Inputs and outputs
expanded to 1024

Frame 1

513 - 1024

Trinix
1 - 512
512 x 512 32
PE-33016 513 - 1024
513 - 1024
32 used as
PE-33016 combiners Dual outputs
used as 513 - 1024
splitters

Frame 3
513 - 1024

Trinix
512 x 512

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 79

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 38. 1024 x 2048 Systems

Frame 0

1 - 512 32
PE-33016 1 - 512
used as Dual outputs
combiners
Trinix
512 x 512

Frame 2

1 - 512

Trinix
512 x 512 Outputs expanded to 2048
64
Inputs PE-33008
used as
1 - 512 1x4
splitters
Frame 8

1 - 512

Trinix
512 x 512
32
PE-33016 513 - 1024
used as Dual outputs
combiners
Frame 10

1 - 512

Trinix
512 x 512

Inputs expanded to 1024

Frame 1

513 - 1024

Trinix
512 x 512
32
PE-33016 1025 - 1536
used as
combiners Dual outputs
Frame 3

513 - 1024

Trinix
512 x 512
64
Inputs PE-33008
used as
513 - 1024 1x4
splitters
Frame 9

513 - 1024

Trinix
512 x 512

Frame 11
32
513 - 1024 PE-33016 1537 - 2048
used as Dual outputs
combiners

Trinix
512 x 512

80 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

Figure 39. 2048 x 1024 System

Frame 0

1 - 512

Trinix
512 x 512
32
Inputs PE-33016
1 - 512 used as
splitters
Frame 2 Outputs expanded to 1024
1 - 512

Trinix
512 x 512
64
PE-33008 1 - 512
Inputs expanded to 2048 used as
4x1 Dual outputs
combiners
Frame 1

513 - 1024

Trinix
512 x 512
32
Inputs PE-33016
513 - 1024 used as
splitters
Frame 3

513 - 1024

Trinix
512 x 512

Frame 4

1025 - 1536

Trinix
512 x 512
32
Inputs PE-33016
1025 - 1536 used as
splitters
Frame 6

1025 - 1536

Trinix
512 x 512
64
PE-33008 513 - 1024
used as
4x1 Dual outputs
combiners
Frame 5

1537 - 2048

Trinix
512 x 512
32
Inputs PE-33016
1537 - 2048 used as
splitters
Frame 7

1537 - 2048

Trinix
512 x 512

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 81

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 40. 2048 x 2048 System

Frame 0
1 - 512
64
Trinix PE-33008 1 - 512
used as
512 x 512 4x1 Dual outputs
combiners
Inputs and outputs expanded to 2048
Frame 2
1 - 512
Trinix
64 512 x 512
Inputs PE-33008
used as
1 - 512 1x4
splitters Frame 8
1 - 512

Trinix
512 x 512

Frame 10
Frame 1 1 - 512
513 - 1024
Trinix
Trinix 512 x 512
512 x 512

Frame 3
64
513 - 1024 PE-33008 513 - 1024
Trinix used as
4x1 Dual outputs
64 512 x 512 combiners
Inputs PE-33008
used as
513 - 1024 1x4
splitters Frame 9
513 - 1024
Trinix
512 x 512

Frame 11
513 - 1024 Frame 4
1025 - 1536
Trinix
512 x 512 Trinix
512 x 512

Frame 6
1025 - 1536
Trinix
64 512 x 512
Inputs PE-33008
used as
1025 - 1536 1x4 64
splitters Frame 12 PE-33008 1025 - 1536
1025 - 1536 used as
4x1 Dual outputs
Trinix combiners
512 x 512

Frame 14
Frame 5 1025 - 1536
1537 - 2048
Trinix
Trinix 512 x 512
512 x 512

Frame 7
1537 - 2048
Trinix
64 512 x 512
Inputs PE-33008
used as
1537 - 2048 1x4
splitters Frame 13
1537 - 2048
Trinix
512 x 512

64
PE-33008 1537 - 2048
Frame 15 used as
4x1 Dual outputs
1537 - 2048 combiners
Trinix
512 x 512

82 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

The 512x1024 Routing Switcher

The 512x1024 Routing switcher can be duplicated to form the following
frames:
• 1024x1024
• 512x2048
• 1024x2048
• 2048x2048

Note The 2048x2048 frame can only process SD or HD signals do to the port
expander that must be used (TRX-PE-33008).

Examples of each of these frames can be found on the pages that follow.

The 1024x1024 Frame

This configuration can process SD,HD and 3Gb/s signals.

Figure 41. Example of the 1024x1024 Frame

071827612_1024x1024 System_512x1024
Frame 0

1-512

Trinix
512 x1024
64
TRX-PE-2x2-3G
1-1024
used as
Combiners

Frame 2

513-1024

Trinix
512 x1024

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 83

Section 9 — Planning Guide

The 512x2048 Frame

This configuration can process SD,HD and 3Gb/s signals.

Figure 42. Example of the 512x2048 Frame

Frame 0

1-1024

Trinix
512 x1024

32
TRX-PE-2x2-3G
1-512
used as
Splitters

071827612_512x2048 System_512x1024
Frame 8

1025-2048

Trinix
512 x1024

84 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

The 1024x2048 Frame

This configuration can process SD,HD and 3Gb/s signals.

Figure 43. Example of the 1048x2048 Frame

Frame 0

64
TRX-PE-2x2-3G
1-1024
Trinix used as
512 x1024 Combiners

32
TRX-PE-2x2-3G
1-512
used as
Splitters

Frame 8

64
TRX-PE-2x2-3G
1025-2048
Trinix used as
512 x1024 Combiners

Frame 1

Trinix
512 x1024

32
TRX-PE-2x2-3G
513-1024
used as
071827612_1024x2048 System_512x1024

Splitters

Frame 9

Trinix
512 x1024

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 85

Section 9 — Planning Guide

The 2048x2048 Frame

This configuration can only process SD and HD signals.

Figure 44. Example of the 2048x2048 Frame

Frame 0

Trinix 128
32 512 x1024 TRX-PE-33008 1-1024
TRX-PE-2x2-3G used as
1-512
used as Combiners
Splitters Frame 8

Trinix 128
512 x1024 TRX-PE-33008 1025-2048
used as
Combiners
Frame 1

Trinix
32 512 x1024
TRX-PE-2x2-3G
513-1024
used as
Splitters Frame 9

Trinix
512 x1024

Frame 4

Trinix
32 512 x1024
TRX-PE-2x2-3G
1025-1536
used as
Splitters Frame 12

Trinix
512 x1024

071827612_2048x2048 System_512x1024
Frame 5

Trinix
32 512 x1024
TRX-PE-2x2-3G
1537-2048
used as
Splitters Frame 13

Trinix
512 x1024

86 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

Termination for Pre-wired Expansion Frames

The unused BNC connectors on the port expanders should be terminated
for best performance. However, it may be desirable to install an empty or
partially filled frame with associated cabling to simplify future expansion.
When such cabling connects to a Port expander that is carrying active sig-
nals, special termination hardware is required. Since the presence of pre-
wired cabling will not permit standard BNC terminators to be installed on
the expander, an LD-33100 Loader board must be installed in the associ-
ated frame in place of an input or output board to provide correct termina-
tion.
Grass Valley recommends that you terminate all unused outputs that may
be driven with an active signal. Properly shielded 75-ohm terminators or
spare infrastructure coax cables should be used. This step will ensure EMC
compliance. Spare output BNC panels that are not populated with output
boards and spare input BNCs do not need to be terminated.

Figure 45. LD-33100 Loader Board

Input Expansion
For example, the figure below (Figure 46) shows a 512 x 512 system that has
been expanded to 1024 x 512:

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 87

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 46. 512 x 512 System Expanded to 1024 x 512

Frame 0
1 - 512

Trinix 1 - 512
512 x 512

32 outputs
PE 33016
used as 1 - 512
combiners

Frame 1
Future input (unused) Installed pre-wiring
wiring

Trinix
Output slots should be terminated
512 x 512 using LD-33100 Loader boards

Frame 1 contains no input or output boards, but the wiring has already
been installed between Frame 1 and the PE-331016 Port expanders.
Now consider Output 1 of Frame 0. This signal is connected to Input 1A of
the first PE-33016 Port expander. See Figure 47 below.

Figure 47. Detail of One PE-33016

Input 1A - from Frame 0 Output 1 Output 1A - to downstream equipment

Input 1B - from Frame 1 Output 1. Output 1B - not used. Termination provided by

Termination provided by LD-33000 75-ohm BNC terminator
in upstream Trinix frame.

In this example:
• Only Input 1A and Output 1A are presently functional.
• Output 1B is fitted with a 75-ohm BNC terminator, which is following
the rule that unused connectors should be terminated.
• Input 1B is pre-wired to Frame 1, so there is no place for a terminator.
In this case, termination will be provided by an LD-33100 Loader board,
which has been installed in output board slot 1-32 of Frame 0. Further-
more, in this example all 16 output slots of Frame 0 should have an LD-
33000 installed.
• When the system is upgraded to 1024 x 512, the LD-33000 boards will
be removed and replaced by output boards. The cabling to the port
expanders is already in place.

88 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

The concepts in this example can be applied equally to both HD and SD

systems with PE-33008 Port expanders. For example, they would apply to
a 1024 x 1024 system that is pre-wired for expansion to 2048 x 1024 (similar
to the system shown in Figure 37 on page 79, where LD-33100 Loader
boards would be installed in place of output boards in Frames 4 through 7).

Output Expansion
The LD-33100 Loader boards may also be used for output-expandable sys-
tems. For example, Figure 48 on page 89, below shows a 512 x 512 system
expandable to 512 x 1024:

Figure 48. A 512 X 512 System Expanded to 512 x 1024

Frame 0

1 - 512 1 - 512

Trinix
512 x 512

32
1 - 512 PE 33016
used as
splitters Frame 1
(unused)
Future output
wiring

Installed pre-wiring
Trinix
512 x 512
Input slots should be terminated
using LD-33100 Loader boards

Again, considering one signal path (below in Figure 49), pre-wired cable
connections do not allow for installation of individual terminators. Instead,
the LD-33100 Loader boards are installed in the unused frame. However, in
this case they are installed in the input slots.

Figure 49. Detail of one PE-33016 shown above in Figure 48

Input 1A - from upstream equipment Output 1A - to Frame 0 Input 1

Input 1B - not used. Termination Output 1B - to Frame 1 Input 1.

provided by 75-ohm BNC terminator Termination provided by LD-33100
in Frame 1.

Input and Output Expansion

The rules just described for use of LD-33100 Loader boards will also apply
to systems designed for expansion of both inputs and outputs. An example

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 89

Section 9 — Planning Guide

would be a 512 x 512 pre-wired for expansion to 1024 x 1024 (similar to the
system that is shown in Figure 37 on page 79). Only frame 0 would be
active in the 512 x 512 router, so only the port expanders connected to
Frame 0 would be in use. Frame 1’s inputs are connected to the top left PE;
while Frame 2’s outputs are connected to the top right PE. Therefore Frame
1’s input slots would require LD-33100s and Frame 2’s output slots would
require LD-33100s. No LD boards would be needed for Frame 3.

Monitoring with Expanded Systems

Symmetric Frame
Output monitor signals must be sent through a combiner in expanded sys-
tems. An example of an output-expanded system in shown in Figure 50 on
page 91; an input-expanded system is shown in (Figure 119 on page 209).

Note Output monitoring is not available for input-expanded systems controlled by

an SR-33000 Sync/OPM board.

90 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

Figure 50. Monitoring With Output-expanded System.

Frame 0

1 - 256 1 - 256

Trinix
256 x 256

PE-33016s
1 - 256 used as Output monitor video
splitters

Frame 2

1 - 256 257 - 512

Trinix
256 x 256

PE-33016
used as QC station
combiner
Output monitor video

Frame 0

1 - 256
1 - 256

Trinix
256 x 256

32
PE-33016s
used as 1 - 256
combiners Dual outputs

Frame 1

257-512
257 - 512

Trinix
256 x 256

PE-33016
Output monitor video used as QC station
combiner

Asymmetrical Frames
Output monitor signals are cascaded from the expansion frame to the main
frame (frame 0) via the TRX-SR Sync/OPM board.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 91

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 51. Expansion of two 128X256 Frames to form a 256x256 with Output Monitoring.

Legend: MON outs (4) MON outs (4)

(Outputs 257-260)
CAS = Cascade
Trinix
MON = NXT
128x256
Monitor Inputs 1-128
Switcher
Outputs 1-256

Ins = Inputs Frame 0

Outs = Outputs
CAS ins (4)

4 75 ohm coaxial cables

16 ea.
16x2:2 Outputs 1-256 System Outs
Note: The order of the COMBINERS
frames for the monitor
cascade does not matter.

MON outs (4)

071827611_expansion_2_frame-256^2_woutput-mon
Trinix
NXT
128x256
Inputs 129-257 Outputs 1-256
Switcher

Frame 1

No Connect
CAS ins (4)
Or Test Signal

92 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

Figure 52. Expansion of two 512x1024 Frames with Output Monitoring.

Legend: MON outs (4) MON outs (4)
(Outputs 513-516)
CAS = Cascade
Trinix
MON = NXT
512x1024
Monitor Inputs 1-512
Switcher
Outputs 1-1024

Ins = Inputs Frame 0

Outs = Outputs
CAS ins (4) X 2

4 75 ohm coaxial cables

16 ea.
16x2:2 Outputs 1-1024 System Outs
Note: The order of the COMBINERS
frames for the monitor
cascade does not matter.

MON outs (4)

071827609_expansion_2_frame-512x1024^2_woutput-mon
Trinix
NXT
512x1024
Inputs 513-1024 Outputs 1-1024
Switcher

Frame 1

No Connect
CAS ins (4) X 2
Or Test Signal

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 93

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Figure 53. Expansion of two 256x512xFrames with Output Monitoring.

Legend:
MON outs (4) MON outs (4)
CAS = Cascade (Outputs 513-516)

MON = Trinix
NXT
Monitor 256x512
Inputs 1-256 Outputs 1-512
Switcher
Ins = Inputs Frame 0
Outs = Outputs
CAS ins (4)

4 75 ohm coaxial cables

32 ea.
16x2:2 Outputs 1-512 System Outs
Note: The order of the COMBINERS
frames for the monitor
cascade does not matter.

MON outs (4)

071827609_expansion_2_frame-512^2_woutput-mon
Trinix
NXT
256x512
Inputs 513-768 Outputs 1-512
Switcher

Frame 1

No Connect
CAS ins (4)
Or Test Signal

94 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Protected Paths

Protected Paths

Overview
The Protected path function is designed to monitor router outputs that are
feeding critical downstream equipment and, in the event of signal loss, will
automatically select the output that is carrying the same signal and trigger
the system alarm.
The Protected path function assumes the following:
• Supported Output Boards provide the output signals that will be mon-
itored. These boards allow individual outputs to be enabled or disabled
using software controls.
• Protection is provided for paths, that is, input/output pairs. The installer
must identify critical outputs and an associated critical input for each.
For redundancy, two paths must be defined: a Primary path and a
failover Secondary path.
• Protected pairs should be hard wired to back-panel connectors that will
provide the most independent possible paths through the router. For
example, the two paths should use different input boards and different
output boards. Depending on router size, the two paths may also be
able to use different matrix boards and different power sources.
• Two copies of each protected input must be wired to the router for full
redundancy. For example, the Master Control switcher output could be
sent through a passive splitter upstream of the router. One copy is used
for the primary path, and the other for the secondary path. If an
upstream splitter is used, steps must be taken to boost the gain for the
appropriate block of inputs.
• The primary output and the secondary output must be wired to a
passive combiner; the output of the passive combiner is then connected
to the downstream equipment. The Protected path software will auto-
matically boost individual outputs as needed for proper gain level
through the splitter. Outputs not configured for Protected path opera-
tion should be set for gain levels as described in the manual. (The Pro-
tected path software will override the manual settings as needed.)
• The control system (for example, Encore or Jupiter) must be operated
so that the secondary path is always ready to provide a copy of the pro-
tected signal. For example, the operator would switch the Master
Control output to the transmitter on the primary path; the control
system would then switch the secondary path automatically. For more
information, see Jupiter Facility Control System on page 106.
Figure 54 on page 96 shows an example of a TRX-NXT-512x512 router with
a pair of Protected paths (Depending on system requirements, the
upstream splitter may or may not be needed). The signal detector monitors

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 95

Section 9 — Planning Guide

the primary path and if necessary will disable the primary path output
driver and enable the secondary path output driver. Notice that the two
paths use independent sets of hardware.

Figure 54. Example of Protected Paths for TRX-NXT-512x512 Router

Output Status
Signal OK, driver ON

Output assigned to
protected path, driver OFF

Primary path

Powered by Powered by
PS C and PS D PS A and PS B

Output 1 Input 1
385-512

129-256

Input/Output
Outputs

Outputs
Inputs

Inputs
1-128

1-128
boards

Splitter DM-33501/2 Combiner

Matrix boards
257-384

257-384

385-512

129-256

Input/Output
Outputs

Outputs
Inputs

Inputs

boards

Input 257 Output 257

Secondary path

96 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Protected Paths

Figure 55. Example of Protected Paths for TRX-NXT-512x1024 Router

Primary Path

071827612_512x1024_PP
Out
1-256
Primary Path
In
1-256 Primary
Path

Splitter Combiler

Secondary
Path
Secondary
Path
Out
513-769

In
257-512

Secondary
Path

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 97

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Planning
The following section describes the Protected path planning process.

Note The following discussion is based on a 1-based numbering scheme (Encore

Control system). If you are using a zero-based numbering system (Jupiter
AccuSwitch Control system), subtract 1 from all instances of input/output
numbers.

TRX-NXT-512x512
The recommended Protected path ranges for TRX-NXT-512x512 routers are
as follows:

Table 3. Recommended Protected path Ranges

Primary Path Secondary Path
Output Input Output Input
1-256 1-256 257-512 257-512

For example, to protect an output in the range 1-128, choose a corre-

sponding input in the range 1-128; this will be the primary path. For the sec-
ondary (failover) path, choose an output in the range 257-384 and a
corresponding input in the range 257-384.
Alternatively, the high-range of connectors can be used for the primary
path and the low range for the secondary path, as shown in Table 4:

Table 4. Alternative Protected Path Ranges

Primary Path Secondary Path
Output Input Output Input
257-384 257-384 1-128 1-128

Using either of these schemes will provide the most independent possible
paths through a TRX-NXT-512x512. In other words, the primary path will
use one set of input, matrix, and output boards connected to one power
source while the secondary path will use a different set of boards connected
to a different power source.
The maximum number of Protected paths for a TRX-NXT-512x512 router is
256.
A more detailed example is shown in Table 5. This table shows a sequential
wiring scheme for a system yet to be installed or a system where cables will

98 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Protected Paths

be re-arranged in a symmetrical pattern in order to simplify Protected path

configuration.

Table 5. TRX-NXT-512x512Protected Paths (Example of Sequential Numbering)

Primary Path Secondary Path
Out In Out In
Name No. Name No. Name No. Name No.
AirPP 1 MCPP 1 AirSP 257 MCSP 257
Sat1PP 2 StuAPP 2 Sat1SP 258 StuASP 258
Sat2PP 3 StuBPP 3 Sat2SP 259 StuBSP 259
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
NetPP 256 MainPP 256 NetSP 512 MainSP 512

The numbers shown here correspond to the connector numbers used

during router configuration (but not, in most cases, to the actual silk screen
number on the rear panel itself since the silk screen numbers only run from
“1” to “32.”)
In Jupiter-controlled systems, the Name column in these tables corre-
sponds to the “logical input/output name.” The entries in the number
column correspond to the “physical” input/output number.
The next example applies to existing systems where re-arrangement of
cables in a sequential pattern is not practical or desirable:

Table 6. TRX-NXT-512x512 Protected Paths (Example of Non-sequential Numbering)

Primary Path Secondary Path
Out In Out In
Name No. Name No. Name No. Name No.
AirPP 21 MCPP 12 AirSP 390 MCSP 265
Sat1PP 253 StuAPP 254 Sat1SP 413 StuASP 348
Sat2PP 109 StuBPP 98 Sat2SP 289 StuBSP 409
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
NetPP 4 MainPP 256 NetSP 440 MainSP 454

Notice that in all cases the primary path I/O numbers are always in the 1-
256 range while the secondary path I/O numbers are always in the 257-512
range.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 99

Section 9 — Planning Guide

TRX-NXT-256x256
Recommended Protected path ranges for TRX-NXT-256x256 routers are as
follows:

Table 7. Recommended Protected Path Ranges

Primary Path Secondary Path
Out In Out In
1-128 1-128 129-256 129-256

For example, to protect an output in the range 1-128, choose a corre-

sponding input in the range 1-128; this will be the primary path. For the sec-
ondary (failover) path, choose an output in the range 129-256 and a
corresponding input in the range 129-256.
This will provide the most independent possible paths through a TRX-
NXT-256x256. That is, the primary path will use one set of input, matrix,
and output boards while the secondary path will use a different set of
boards.

CAUTION With a TRX-NXT-256x256, it is not possible to arrange completely indepen-

dent paths, that is, paths that use different power supplies. Protected path
configuration for TRX-NXT-256x256 routers provides redundancy for matrix
boards and input and output boards only.

The maximum number of Protected paths for a TRX-NXT-256x256 router is

128.
A more detailed example is shown in Table 8. This table shows a sequential
wiring scheme for a system yet to be installed or a system where cables will
be re-arranged in a symmetrical pattern in order to simplify Protected path
operation.

Table 8. TRX-NXT-256x256 Protected Paths (Example Of Sequential Numbering)

Primary Path Secondary Path
Out In Out In
Name No. Name No. Name No. Name No.
AirPP 1 MCPP 1 AirSP 129 MCSP 129
Sat1PP 2 StuAPP 2 Sat1SP 130 StuASP 130
Sat2PP 3 StuBPP 3 Sat2SP 131 StuBSP 131
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
NetPP 128 MainPP 128 NetSP 256 MainSP 256

The numbers shown here correspond to the connector numbers used

during router configuration (but not, in most cases, to the actual silk screen

100 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Protected Paths

number on the rear panel itself since the silk screen numbers only run from
“1” to “32.”)
In Jupiter-controlled systems, the Name column in these tables corre-
sponds to the “logical input/output name.” The entries in the Number
column will correspond to the physical input/output number.

Figure 56. Example of Protected Paths for TRX-NXT-256x256 Router

DM-33100
Matrix boards
129-256

Input/Output
129-256
Outputs

Outputs
Inputs

Inputs
1-128
1-128

boards
Output Status
Signal OK, driver ON

Output assigned to
protected path, driver OFF
Input 128 Output 128 Output 1 Input 1

Primary path

Combiner
Splitter

Secondary path

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 101

Section 9 — Planning Guide

The next example applies to existing systems where re-arrangement of

cables in a sequential pattern is not practical or desirable:

Table 9. TRX-NXT-256x256 Protected Paths (Example of Non-Sequential Numbering)

Primary Path Secondary Path
Out In Out In
Name No. Name No. Name No. Name No.
AirPP 21 MCPP 12 AirSP 190 MCSP 165
Sat1PP 53 StuAPP 54 Sat1SP 133 StuASP 248
Sat2PP 109 StuBPP 98 Sat2SP 189 StuBSP 129
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
NetPP 4 MainPP 56 NetSP 144 MainSP 145

Notice that in all cases the primary path I/O numbers are always in the 1-
128 range while the secondary path I/O numbers are always in the 129-256
range.

TRX-NXT-128x128
Recommended Protected path ranges for TRX-NXT-128x128 routers are as
follows:

Table 10. Recommended Protected Path Ranges

Primary Path Secondary Path
Out In Out In
1-32 1-32 33-128 33-128
1-32, 1-32,
33-64 33-64
65-128 65-128
1-64, 1-64,
65-96 65-96
97-128 97-128
97-128 97-128 1-96 1-96

For example, to protect an output in the range 1-32, choose a corresponding

input in the range 1-32; this selection will be the Primary path. For the Sec-
ondary (failover) path, choose an output in the range 33-128 and a corre-
sponding input in the range 33-128.
This will provide the most independent possible paths through a TRX-
NXT-128x128, that is, the primary path will use one pair of input and
output boards while the secondary path will use a different pair of boards.

CAUTION With a TRX-NXT-128x128, it is not possible to arrange completely indepen-

dent paths, that is, paths that use different matrix boards and power supplies.
Protected path configuration for TRX-NXT-128x128 routers provides redun-
dancy for input and output boards only.

102 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Protected Paths

The maximum number of Protected paths for a TRX-NXT-128x128 router is

64.
A more detailed example is shown in Table 11. This table shows a sequen-
tial wiring scheme for a system yet to be installed or a system where cables
will be re-arranged in a symmetrical pattern in order to simplify Protected
path operation.

Table 11. TRX-NXT-128x128 Protected Paths (Example Of Sequential Numbering)

Primary Path Secondary Path
Out In Out In
Name No. Name No. Name No. Name No.
AirPP 1 MCPP 1 AirSP 33 MCSP 33
Sat1PP 2 StuAPP 2 Sat1SP 34 StuASP 34
Sat2PP 3 StuBPP 3 Sat2SP 35 StuBSP 35
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
NetPP 64 MainPP 64 NetSP 128 MainSP 128

The numbers shown here correspond to the connector numbers used

during router configuration (but not, in most cases, to the actual silk screen
number on the rear panel itself since the silk screen numbers only run from
1” to 32.”)
In Jupiter-controlled systems, the Name column in these tables corre-
sponds to the logical input/output name”; the entries in the number
column will correspond to the physical” input/output number.
The next example applies to existing systems where re-arrangement of
cables in a sequential pattern is not practical or desirable:

Table 12. TRX-NXT-128x128 Protected Paths (Example Of Non-sequential Numbering)

Primary Path Secondary Path
Out In Out In
Name No. Name No. Name No. Name No.
AirPP 21 MCPP 12 AirSP 33 MCSP 33
Sat1PP 53 StuAPP 54 Sat1SP 1 StuASP 1
Sat2PP 109 StuBPP 95 Sat2SP 96 StuBSP 64

Notice that I/O numbers conform to the ranges that are shown in Table 10
Recommended Protected Path Ranges on page 102.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 103

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Asymmetrical Frames
When Using the Protected Paths feature with the Asymmetrical frames,
you will be able to protect half the outputs but those protected outputs
cannot be greater than half the number of inputs. For example, the 128x256
router:
• Outputs 0 – 127 (1-128) could protect outputs 128 - 255 (129-256) but
only 64 of these outputs.
That means:
• Outputs 0 – 63 (1-64) could protect outputs 128 – 191 (129 – 192)
• or Outputs 64 – 127 (65 – 128) could protect outputs 192 – 255 (193 –
256).

TRX-NXT-128x256
Recommended Protected path ranges for TRX-NXT-128x256 routers are as
follows:

Table 13. Recommended Protected Path Ranges

Primary Path Secondary Path
Out In Out In
1-64 1-64 65-128 65-128

TRX-NXT-256x512
Recommended Protected path ranges for TRX-NXT-256x512 routers are as
follows:

Table 14. Recommended Protected Path Ranges

Primary Path Secondary Path
Out In Out In
1-128 1-128 129-256 129-256

TRX-NXT-512x1024
Recommended Protected path ranges for TRX-NXT-512x1024 routers are as
follows:

Table 15. Recommended Protected Path Ranges

Primary Path Secondary Path
Out In Out In
1-256 1-256 513-769 257-512

104 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Protected Paths

Worksheet for Protected Path Implementation

Based on the preceding examples, specific primary and secondary paths
should be identified and noted. The following worksheet is provided for
this purpose.

Table 16. Protected Paths Worksheet

Primary Path Secondary Path
Output Input Output Input
Name No. Name No. Name No. Name No.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 105

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Control Systems

Jupiter Facility Control System

The Jupiter control system can be used to operate the Trinix router using a
VM-3000, CM-4000 or CM-4400 System Controller (Figure 57). The VM/
CM can receive switching commands from a variety of serial sources,
including Jupiter control panels or an automation computer.

Figure 57. Control Connections to Jupiter Facility Control System (example).

Trinix routing
switcher(s)

Jupiter file T
server

Crosspoint bus
Ethernet switch terminator

10/100BaseT
LAN

Crosspoint bus
Jupiter control panels

MPK bus
CM-4000
System
Controller

In this application, the Trinix is operated in the External Crosspoint Bus

Control mode, during which the Broadlinx board releases control of the
Crosspoint bus. Switch commands arriving at the Crosspoint bus connector
on the rear of the frame will be executed.

CC-2010 Matrix (Crosspoint Bus) Cable

Connection from a Jupiter VM-3000 or CM-4000 System Controller is via a
Crosspoint bus cable, which can be supplied in 3, 10, 25, or 50 foot lengths.
The Crosspoint bus connector is looped out in order to connect the bus to
the next item under Crosspoint control.

106 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Control Systems

Depending on the size of the Routing switcher, this bus may require inter-
mediate buffering through a CB-3000 Control Buffer. A CB 3000 is required
in the following cases:
• TRX-NXT-128x128 - eight or more frames
• TRX-NXT-256x256 - four or more frames
• TRX-NXT-512x512 - two or more frames
• TRX-NXT-128x256 - four or more frames
• TRX-NXT-256x512 -two or more frames
• TRX-NXT-256x512 -more than one frame
The CB-3000 is described in detail in the Jupiter Installation and Operating
manual.
In Trinix applications, the Crosspoint bus must be terminated at the point
farthest from the control processor using a Crosspoint Bus Terminator.
The CC-2010 is a 10-conductor (plus ground) cable. Ready-made cables,
with installed 15-pin D male connectors, are available from Grass Valley.
All rear-panel Crosspoint bus connectors are 15-pin D, female.
For those who wish to prepare their own cables, pin-outs are shown in
Figure 125 on page 216. The cable itself should be Belden 9505 or equiva-
lent. User-supplied matrix cables for VDE installations require a ferrite core
over each end of the cable, adjacent to the connector. Details concerning
ferrite cores are given on page 216.

Jupiter Control System Installation

Refer to the Jupiter VM-3000 System Controller Installation and Operation
Manual or the Jupiter CM-4000 System Controller Installation and Opera-
tion Manual for the Installation instructions.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 107

Section 9 — Planning Guide

SMS 7000 / Encore Control

These control systems use an Ethernet connection to the Broadlinx applica-
tion, which runs on the NR-33000 Sync/NIC/OPM board.
The system is operated in the Internal Crosspoint Bus Control mode,
during which the Broadlinx board sends commands to the Crosspoint bus.
Refer to the SMS 7000 or Encore documentation for control system plan-
ning information.

108 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 LAN and Com Bus Connections

LAN and Com Bus Connections

The LAN (NIC) connections use a standard 10/100BaseT twisted pair cable
with RJ-45 connectors (Cat 5E Enhanced is recommended). Shielded cable
is also recommended, maximum length 60 meters.1 The maximum length
for a non-shielded cable is 100 meters.

LAN Monitoring Only (Jupiter Control)

In this arrangement, the router is under Jupiter control. The only purpose
of the connection is LAN monitoring using Broadlinx web pages or SNMP.
See Figure 58.

Figure 58. LAN Connections for LAN Monitoring Only (Jupiter Control)

NIC A
Trinix
connector

NIC B
connector

Ethernet switch

Monitoring PC

Another Ethernet cable must be connected from the NIC B jack to the
network switch if you plan to use a secondary Broadlinx board.
If the Trinix LAN is connected to the Internet, the connection should be
made through a firewall.

Note Do not use Broadlinx with either the Dynex DX-ESW8, 10/100M Fast Ethernet
Switch or the Zonet Model ZFS3124.

1. Compliance with EEC, EMC, EN series, UL- 1950, and CSA C22.2 No. 950-M89 standards requires use of a shielded cable.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 109

Section 9 — Planning Guide

SMS Control
In this arrangement, the router is under SMS control via a LAN connection.
The PC is used to configure the SMS and is available for Broadlinx or SNMP
monitoring. See Figure 59.

Figure 59. SMS Connections to Trinix.

NIC A
Trinix
7000 SMS connector
MCPU frame
Ethernet
connector

NIC B
connector

Ethernet switch

PC

Another Ethernet cable must be connected from the NIC B jack to the
network switch if you plan to usea secondary NR-33000 board.
If the Trinix LAN is connected to the Internet, the connection should be
made through a firewall.

Note Do not use Broadlinx with either the Dynex DX-ESW8, 10/100M Fast Ethernet
Switch or the Zonet Model ZFS3124.

110 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 LAN and Com Bus Connections

Encore Control
For information about the Encore control system working with Trinix, see
Encore Control on page 371.

Com Bus
In multi-frame systems, a Com Bus” is used to loop through each frame, up
to a maximum of four. The Com Bus is intended to provide Routing
switcher monitoring of multiple frames using Broadlinx web pages or
SNMP. The Com Bus uses a 10/100BaseT (Cat 5 twisted pair) cable with RJ-
45 connectors. Shielded cable is recommended, maximum length 60
meters.1 Maximum length for a non-shielded cable is 100 meters.

Figure 60. Com Bus Example

Trinix frames
with SR-33000
Sync/OPM
Trinix frame or SR-33500
with NR-33000 Sync/OPM
Sync/NIC/ boards
OPM board
(Broadlinx
board)

Com Bus cable

(see discussion
for specifications)

In TRX-NXT-512x512 systems, if the power supply frame is equipped with

an NR-33000 Broadlinx board, a Cat 5 twisted pair cable must be installed
between the power supply frame Com Bus connector associated with the
NR board and one of the main frame Com Bus connectors.
The Com Bus should be daisy-chained to any additional TRX-NXT-512x512
main frames in the systems that do not have Broadlinx boards. For an illus-
tration, see Figure 67 on page 140.

1. Compliance with EEC, EMC, EN series, UL- 1950, and CSA C22.2 No. 950-M89 standards requires use of a shielded cable.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 111

Section 9 — Planning Guide

System Monitoring Applications

For a detailed description of Broadlinx web page monitoring using Internet
Explorer, see Broadlinx / Internet Explorer Monitoring on page 311.
For a brief description of system monitoring using SNMP/NetCentral, see
SNMP/NetCentral Monitoring on page 37.

112 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Specifications

Specifications

Electrical
General
Connectors: 75-ohm BNC
Input boards: 32 inputs each.
Output boards: 32 outputs each.
Matrix boards:
DM-256-3G: 256 inputs x 256 outputs
DM-128-3G: 128 inputs x 128 outputs
DM-128R-3G: 128 inputs x 128 outputs
DM-33512: 256 inputs x 256 outputs
DM-33100: 128 inputs x 128 outputs.

Serial Digital Inputs

Level: 800 mV p-p (+/-10%) 75-ohm terminating
Return Loss: 3G: >/= 15 dB from 5 MHz to 3 GHz (20 dB typical).
HD: >/=15 dB from 5 MHz to 1.5 GHz
SD: >/=15 dB from 5 MHz to 540 MHz

Sync Inputs
Level: Nominal 1 Vp-p (+/-6 dB) video or black burst
Tri-level sync also accepted
Video Standard: NTSC/PAL/HDTV, auto-detected
Return Loss: >/=40 dB from 100 kHz to 20 MHz
>/=30 dB from 20 MHz to 30 MHz

512x1024 Asymmetric Sync Inputs

Level: Nominal 1 Vp-p (+/-6 dB) video or black burst
Tri-level sync also accepted
Video Standard: NTSC/PAL/HDTV, auto-detected
Return Loss: >/= 40dB from 100 KHz to 5 MHz
>/= 35dB from 5 MHz to 10 MHz
>/= 25dB from 10 MHz to 30 MHz

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 113

Section 9 — Planning Guide

256X512 Asymmetric Sync Inputs

Level: Nominal 1 Vp-p (+/-6 dB) video or black burst
Tri-level sync also accepted
Video Standard: NTSC/PAL/HDTV, auto-detected
Return Loss: >/= 36dB from 100 KHz to 5 MHz
>/= 30dB from 5 MHz to 10 MHz
>/= 20dB from 10 MHz to 30 MHz

128x256 Asymmetric Sync Inputs

Level: Nominal 1 Vp-p (+/-6 dB) video or black burstTri-level sync
also accepted
Video Standard: NTSC/PAL/HDTV, auto-detected
Return Loss: >/= 40dB from 100 KHz to 20 MHz
>/= 30dB from 20 MHz to 30 MHz

Serial Digital Outputs

Level: 800 mV p-p +/-10% 75-ohm
Return Loss: 3G: >/= 15 dB from 5 MHz to 3 GHz (Typical).
HD: >/=15 dB from 5 MHz to 1.5 GHz

Performance Characteristics
Maximum data rate: 3.0 Gb/s for 3G, 1.5 Gb/s for HD, and 540 Mbps for SD
Minimum Data Rate: 270Mbps for 3G/s circuit boards and 3.072 Mbps for HD and
SD circuit boards.
Signal Standards: SMPTE 292M-1998,1 SMPTE 259M-19971 (Output rise and fall
times correspond to SMPTE 292M).
The HO-3G conforms to SMPTE 259M (270 Mb/S), 292M
(1.5Gb/S) and 424M (3Gb/S). The output rise and fall times
adjust according to the detected data-rate.

Equalization: HI-3G Input board: For SD operation, equalization is automatic

up to 380 meters using Belden 8281 (or an equivalent coax
cable) and 500 meters using Belden 1694A. For HD operation,
equalization is automatic up to 160 meters of Belden 1694A or
an equivalent coax cable. For 3Gp/s operation, equalization is
automatic up to 140 meters of Belden 1694A, when installed in
a Trinix NXT frames.

1. See Glossary

114 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Specifications

HI-33200 Input board (SD/HD): For SD operation, equalization

is automatic up to 300 meters using Belden 1694A or an equiva-
lent coax cable. For HD operation, automatic up to 100 meters
of Belden 1694A or an equivalent coax cable.

SI-33110 Input board (SD): equalization is automatic up to 300

meters of Belden 1694A, 250 meters using 8281 or an equivalent
coax cable for SD equalizer at 270 Mbps. Reducing to 150
meters at 540 Mbps.

HI-33110 Input board (SD/HD): equalization is automatic up

to 100 meters using Belden 1694A or an equivalent coax cable.

VI-33100 Input board (SD/HD): For digital SD operation,

equalization is automatic up to 300 meters using Belden 1694A
or an equivalent coax cable. For HD operation, automatic up to
100 meters of Belden 1694A or an equivalent coax cable.

Data Reclocking: Switch selectable on an output-by-output basis.

The HO-3G Output Board provides reclocking for 270Mbps
1.485, and 3Gp/s or non-reclocking for other data rates.

The HO-33120 Output Board provides individual selection of

reclocking On or Off for the supported data rates. The data rate
for reclocking is automatically selected by the circuitry on the
board for 1.485 Gb/s, 540 Mbps, 360 Mbps, 270 Mbps, 177
Mbps, and 143 Mbps. Other data rates will not be reclocked.
The SO-33110 Output Board is non-reclocking.

The HO-33110 Output Board provides individual selection of

reclocking for 1.485 Gb/s or non-reclocking for all data rates.

Output Jitter: 3G: </= 0.3 unit interval (excluding incoming jitter)
HDSD: </= 0.2 unit interval

AC Power Input
Main Connection: IEC Connector, AC separate mains input for each power sup-
ply module.

Note Each power supply must be connected to a separate AC mains branch circuit
with an over-current protector rated at no more than 20A.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 115

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Voltage Range: 100-240 VAC 50-60 Hz, universal, auto-ranging (fuses must be
selected and installed as appropriate for mains voltage) For
fuses F101, F105, F110- F113, F201, F205, and F210-F213 replace
with fuse rated “5A 125V Fast Acting” (GV PN: 59-5053-00,
LITTELFUSE PN: 39515000440) These fuses are accessible from
the rear panel (underneath the two fuse covers on the rear of
chassis).
Operating Current: The Operating current will vary depending on the specific con-
figuration of the router. The two cases below will serve as a ref-
erence.
CASE A: Fully configured system
DV-33128 and NXT-128
5.7 A @ 120 VAC and 2.9 A @ 240 VAC
DV-33256 and NXT-256
10 A @ 120 VAC and 5 A @ 240 VAC
DV-33512 and NXT-512
20 A @ 120 VAC and 10 A @ 240 VAC
TRX-NXT-128x256
10 A @ 120 VAC and 5 A @ 240 VAC
TRX-NXT-256x512
19 A @ 120 VAC and 10 A @ 240 VAC

CASE B: Fully configured system that is operating in boosted

mode.
DV-33128 and NXT-128
6 A @ 120 VAC and 3 A @ 240 VAC
DV-33256 and NXT-256
12.5 A @ 120 VAC and 6.3 A @ 240 VAC
DV-33512 and NXT- 512
25 A @ 120 VAC and 12.6 A @ 240 VAC
TRX-NXT-128x256
12 A @ 120 VAC and 6.3 A @ 240 VAC
TRX-NXT-256x512
20 A @ 120 VAC and 10 A @ 240 VAC
TRX-NXT-512x1024
20 A @ 120 VAC and 10 A @ 240 VAC

Inrush Current 128 x 128 frame: 49.05 A

256 x 256 frame: 55.0 A
512 x 512 frame: 45 A

116 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Specifications

128 x 256 frame: 25.0 A

256 x 512 frame: 25.0 A
512 x1024 frame: 25.0 A

Hold-up Time: Minimum 15 ms at full load

Conducted Emissions: per FCC Class B, EN55022 Class B

Power Supply DC Output

Voltage: +48 (+/-0.5) VDC
Current: 128 x 128 frame: 20 A/supply (full redundancy)
256 x 256 frame: 26 A/supply (full redundancy)
512 x 512 frame: approximately. 26 A/supply (full redundancy)
128x256 frame: 25 A/ supply (full redundancy)
256x512 frame: 25 A/ supply (full redundancy)
512x1024 frame: 25 A/ supply (full redundancy)

Note The 256 x 256 and the 512 x 512 routing frames use the same power supply.
All Asymmetrical frames use the same power supply

Current Sharing: Yes, maximum 20% differential unbalance

Ripple/Noise: <500 mVp-p

DC Power Input
Input voltage Range 42-54 VDC +/- 0%
Operating Current The Operating current will vary depending on the specific con-
figuration of the router. The two cases below will serve as a ref-
erence.
CASE A: A fully configured system
DV-33128 and NXT-128
12 A @ 48 VDC
DV-33256 and NXT-256
23 A @ 48 VDC
DV-33512 and NXT-512
46 A @ 48 VDC
TRX-NXT-128x256
21 A @ 48 VDC
TRX-NXT-256x512
42 A @ 48 VDC
TRX-NXT-512x1024

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 117

Section 9 — Planning Guide

42 A @ 48 VDC

CASE B: A fully configured system that is operating in boosted

mode.
DV-33128 and NXT-128
13.2 A @ 48 VDC
DV-33256 and NXT-256
26.3 A @ 48 VDC
DV-33512 and NXT- 512
52.5 A @ 48 VDC
TRX-NXT-256x512
23 A @ 48 VDC
TRX-NXT-256x512
44 A @ 48 VDC
TRX-NXT-512x1024
44 A @ 48 VDC

Inrush Current 128 x 128 frame: 15 A

256 x 256 frame: 21 A
512 x 512 frame: Approximately 25 A
128 x 256 frame: 25 A
256 x 512 frame: 25 A
512x1024 frame: 25 A

Alarm
The alarm connector is a BNC type and meets SMPTE 269M-1999.

Environmental
0 to +35 degrees C (+32 to +95 F)
10 to 90%, Non-condensing

Air Flow
The Door should remain closed during operation for all Trinix models.
Requirements for the Trinix 512x1024’s airflow and clearance:

118 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Specifications

Intake: Minimum of 2RU below the Trinix 512x1024 chassis for cool intake air.
Exhaust: Minimum of 3RU above for warm exhaust air. The 3RU area requires a total
exhaust area (top, sides, back or front) of 516 sq. CM (80 sq. in.).
Airflow requirements for chassis: 31 cubic meters/minute (1085 cubic feet /minute).

Physical

Frames

128 x 128 Frames

Main frame: 8 RU: 14 in. high x 19 in. wide x 17.50 in. deep (356 x 483 x 445 mm)

256 x 256 Frames

Main frame: 15 RU: 26.25 in. high x 19 in. wide x 17.5 in. deep (667 x 483 x 445 mm)

512 x 512 Frames

Main frame: 28 RU: 49 in. high x 19 in. wide x 17.5 in. deep (1245 x 483 x 445 mm)
Power supply frame: 4 RU: 7 in. high x 19 in. wide x 21 in. deep (178 x 483 x 533 mm)

128 x 256 Frames

Main frame: 11 RU: 19.25 in. high x 19 in. wide x 17.5 in. deep (489 x 483 x 445 mm)

256 x 512 Frames

Main frame: 22 RU: 38.5 in. high x 19 in. wide x 17.5 in. deep (978 x 483 x 445 mm)
Power Supply frame: 1.71 inches (1 RU) high x 19 in. wide x 17.25 in. deep (43.4 x 483
x 413 mm)

512 x 1024 Frames

Main frame: 40 RU: 70 in. high x 19 in. wide x 17.5 in. deep (1778 x 483 x 445 mm)
Power Supply frame (Two power supplys per frame.): 1.71 inches (1 RU) high x 19 in.
wide x 17.25 in. deep (43.4 x 483 x 413 mm)
Optional TRX-FAV-512x1024 (Front air vent unit) 3.5" (2 RU) high x 19 in. wide x 16.4
in. deep (88 x 483 x 417 mm)
Fans units (one on top, one on bottom): 2 x 1 RU: 1.75 in. high x 19 in. wide x 17.5 in.
deep (44.45 x 483 x 444 mm)

MK-33000 Mounting Kit (for port expansion)

14 inches (8 RU) high x 19 in. 4 in. deep (356 x 483 x 100 mm)

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 119

Section 9 — Planning Guide

120 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

Configuration
Quick Look
Building Block Size: 32 Inputs or 32 Outputs
Options: 3G, HD, or SD rate I/O modules
Dual outputs (3G, HD, and SD), quad outputs (HD and SD
only)
Additional monitor outputs (2)
Redundant sync inputs (2)
Redundant monitor/status/control
Redundant power supplies
Standards Supported: SMPTE 259M-1997, SMPTE 292M-1998, SMPTE 424M
Standard Connectors:75-Ohm BNC
Output Monitor: Yes, 2 standard
Sync Reference Input:Yes, 2. Granularity: per 32 outputs
Control Options: Jupiter, SMS 7000, Encore

Frame, Board, Weight, and Power Summary for Select Matrix Sizes
The following tables provide a summary of the information for all of the
Trinix frames. All weights are approximations.
Table 17. 128x128 Matrix Specifications

32 64 96 128
Matrix Size x x x x
32 64 96 128

# of Frame 1 1 1 1

# Input Boards 1 2 3 4

# Output Boards 1 2 3 4

# of Matrix Boards 1 1 1 1

Weight in pounds 75 81 88 94
(kilograms) (34) (37) (40) (43)

Power Consumption* (W) ~350 ~400 ~440 ~480

*Approximate

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 121

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Table 18. 256x256 Matrix Specifications

Matrix Size 160 192 224 256

x x x x
160 192 224 256

# of Frame 1 1 1 1

# Input Boards 5 6 7 8

# Output Boards 5 6 7 8

# of Matrix Boards 4 4 4 4

Weight in pounds 163 169 176 182

(kilograms) (74) (77) (80) (83)

Power Consumption* (W) ~850 ~900 ~950 ~1000

Table 19. 128x256 Matrix Size Specifications

128
Matrix Size x
256

# of Frame 1

# Input Boards 4

# Output Boards 8

# of Matrix Boards 4

Weight in pounds
141
(kilograms)
With two power supplies (64)

Power Consumption* (W) ~480

Table 20. 256x512 Matrix Size Specifications

160 192 224 256 256 256

Matrix Size x x x x x x
160 192 224 256 256 512

# of Frame 1 1 1 1 8 8

# Input Boards 5 6 7 8 8 16

# Output Boards 5 6 7 8 1 2

~300 ~350
# of Matrix Boards 4 4 4 4
(~140) (~160)

122 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

160 192 224 256 256 256

Matrix Size x x x x x x
160 192 224 256 256 512

Weight in pounds 32 32
163 169 176 182
(kilograms)
(74) (77) (80) (83)
With two power supplies

Power Consumption* (W) ~850 ~900 ~950 ~1000 ~1000 ~1400

Table 21. 512x512 Matrix Size Specifications (cont.)

512 512 512 512

Matrix Size x x x x
256 512 768 1024

# of Frames 1 1 2 2

# Input Boards 16 16 32 32

# Output Boards 8 16 24 32

# of Matrix Boards 2 4 6 8

Weight* in pounds ~350 ~400 ~750 ~800

(kilograms) (~160) (~180) (~340) (~360)

# of RUs 32 32 64 64

Power Consumption* (W) ~1600 ~2000 ~3500 ~4000

Table 22. 512x512 Matrix Size Specifications (cont.)

768 768 1024 1024 2048

Matrix Size x x x x x
512 768 512 1024 2048

512 Frame

# of Frames 2 4 2 4 16

# Input Boards 24 48 32 64 256

# Output Boards 32 48 32 64 256

# of Matrix Boards 6 9 8 16 64

Weight* in pounds ~750 ~1400 ~800 ~1600 ~6400

(kilograms) (~340) (~640) (~360) (~730) (~2900)

# of RUs 64 192 64 192 512

Power Consumption* (W) ~4000 ~6000 ~4000 ~8000 ~32000

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 123

Section 9 — Planning Guide

Table 23. 512x1024 Matrix Size Specifications

1024 1024 2048

Matrix Size x x x
512 1024 2048

# of Frames 1 4 16

# Input Boards 32 64 256

# Output Boards 32 64 256

# of Matrix Boards 8 16 64

Weight* in pounds ~800 ~1600 ~6400

(kilograms) (~360) (~730) (~2900)

# of RUs 64 192 512

Power Consumption* (W) ~4000 ~8000 ~32000

124 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Section 10
Hardware Installation
Summary of Installation Procedure
The following list is a summary of the steps that are needed for the
installation of the Trinix Routing Switcher System.
1. Pre-installation steps

2. Rack requirements

3. Connecting the Power supplies

4. Connecting and Configuring the Reference signals

5. Connecting the cables

6. Control and Monitoring Systems

7. Optional steps

8. Power up the Routing switcher

Additional details may be found elsewhere in this manual as indicated.

Pre-Installation Steps
Prior to starting the Installation process and unpacking the equipment,
inspect the shipping carton for evidence of freight damage.
After unpacking, carefully inspect all equipment for freight damage. If
there has been damage to the contents:
• Notify the carrier and Grass Valley of the damage.
• Retain all shipping cartons and padding material for inspection by
the carrier.
• Do NOT return damaged merchandise to Grass Valley until an
appropriate claim has been filed with the carrier and a material
return authorization number has been received from Grass Valley.

Installation and Service Manual125

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Customer-Supplied Rack Requirements

The Routing switcher is shipped without a rack; the router should be
mounted into a 19-inch wide frame or other suitable enclosure that pro-
vides power and cooling facilities for the equipment.
A two (2) RU space should be kept free beneath the fan on each 512x1024
frame to ensure enough airflow to prevent the routing switcher from over-
heating. A two (2) RU vent option is also available to help draw air in from
the front of the frame.
The following items should be considered when choosing a rack:
a. It may be necessary to install special rack spacers so that the router's
access door can be opened far enough to permit removal of
components on the right side of the frame (such as power supply
modules).
• The spacers, which are available on request, should only be
installed when the rack's mounting holes are recessed more than
0.6 inch (15.2 mm) from the front surface of the rack. For more
information, see Figure 61 on page 134.
b. Some Routing switchers are supplied with port expanders, which
depending on the configuration can be used to provide dual
outputs, quad outputs, input expansion, output expansion, and
multi-frame output monitoring.
• For illustrations of port expander applications, see Duplication
and Expansion on page 69.
c. Power requirements are shown in the AC Power Input on page 115
section.

Note Grass Valley recommends each power supply have its own dedicated 20A
circuit breaker. The possibility of having a failed supply shut down a breaker
is a possibility if circuit breakers are shared. This failure will remove a func-
tioning Power supply from operation.
Where possible, we recommend running different supplies on different
phases of the AC mains. This configuration will provide additional protection
from power interruption if there is an unrelated phase problem with the
power distribution.

d. Environmental limits are shown in the Environmental section on

page 118.

Connecting the Power Supplies

The Power supplies for the Trinix are factory-installed and auto-sensing.
NO field-adjustments to the actual power supply should be necessary.

126 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Note For more information about Power Supply connections with Asymmetric
frames, see Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations on
page 227. Grass Valley strongly recommends, whenever possible, using
the AC high line to reduce line currents and heat within the power sup-
plies.

The following items should be considered during the installation pro-

cess.

Fuse Differences
Make sure that you use the correct fuse when you change from 120Vac
to 220Vac. There is a fuse difference on the rear panel of the 128 x 128,
the 256 x 256, and the 512 x 512 frames.

Note See the markings on the router’s rear panel frame for the correct Fuse
value requirements.

For additional power supply information, see Power Supply Notes on

page 151.

Asymmetric Frames
For fuse information in the Asymmetrical frames, see Trinix Asymmet-
rical Power Supply Configurations on page 227.

Power Supplies for TRX-NXT-512x512

Power supplies for TRX-NXT-512x512 Routing switchers are mounted
in a separate frame.
• You will need to attach the supplied cable from the DC
Output connector on the power supply frame to the DC
Input connector on the Routing switcher’s frame.
• The power supply for the TRX-NXT-512x512 frames may be
mounted above or below the main frame, depending on the
video cable routing and weight distribution requirements.

Using IFC cables with the TRX-NXT-512x512

CAUTION In order to avoid damaging the Routing switcher, the power must be
turned OFF before installing the “IFC” cables as described in the fol-
lowing step.

Installation and Service Manual127

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Install the supplied “IFC” cables:

1. Connect the long cable from the FRAME IFC connection on the power
supply frame to the PS IFC connection on the main frame.
• The FRAME IFC connection is located in the lower right side of the
power supply frame (Figure 68 on page 141).
2. Connect the short cable from the FAN IFC connection on the center
right side of the main frame to the FAN IFC connection in the fan
module section, which is above the Input and Output connectors.
• For an illustration of the location of the IFC connections, see
Figure 68.

Note The IFC cables cannot be swapped. To prevent this, the cable for the Fan IFC
cable has a different connection than the Power IFC cable

Power Supplies for Asymmetrical Frames

Power supplies for TRX-NXT-128x256, TRX-NXT-256x512, and TRX-NXT-
512x1024 Routing switches are mounted in a separate chassis that requires
attaching the power supply cable to the DC Input connector on the Routing
switcher frame.
• The power supply frame can be mounted above or below the TRX-
NXT-128x256, TRX-NXT-256x512 Routing switcher frames.
• Do not obstruct air flow to the top or bottom of the TRX-NXT-
512x1024 frame. A 2 RU space should be kept free under the fan.

Note For more information about Power Supply connections with Asymmetric
frames, see Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations on page 227.

Connecting and Configuring the Reference Settings

Follow these steps to connect and configure reference signals:
1. Connect the appropriate house reference signals.
Depending on the system, up to four independent sync references can
be used.
The SR-33000 Sync Reference / OPM board, the NR-33000 NIC/Sync/
OPM board, or (in TRX-NXT-512x512 units) the SR-33500 Sync Refer-
ence board can be used to lock the system to a Reference sync.

128 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Summary of Installation Procedure

Note The 512x1024 uses the NR-33000 NIC/Sync/OPM boards exclusively for
sync reference.

Video standard operation (that is, NTSC, PAL, or HDTV) is detected

automatically by the system. The sync signal can be video, black burst,
2 V composite sync, 4 V composite, or tri-level.

Note Tri-level reference should be used with HD.

Each sync input uses looping-75-ohm BNC connectors; if a loop

through is not used, the loop BNC should have a 75-ohm terminator.
2. Re-configure the switch point if desired.
The switch point is factory-set to the recommended video line for the
standard that is detected.
A V-phasing feature is available with the following boards:
• NR-33000
• SR-33000 with Rev B FPGA Software Update
• SR-33500
• TRX-SR
The V-phasing feature allows you to adjust the switch point from the-1
line to +2.5 lines if necessary. For more information, see NR/SR-33000 /
SR-33500/ TRX-SR V-Phasing on page 170.

Note If you make adjustments on the SR-33500 as part of this step, you may want
to wait until all remaining steps in this list have been followed and any addi-
tional adjustments made before reinstalling the board.

3. Select the desired sync reference line on each Output board.

This step applies to systems with more than one sync reference. Each
output board provides a block of 32 outputs and each block is assigned
to Sync line 1 by factory default.
• Sync line 1 corresponds to the Primary Ref IN 1 connector on
the rear panel. If additional references are used, the DIP
switches can be set to assign each board to one of four possible
sync lines. See Output Board Configuration on page 185.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 129

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

4. On High Definition and 3G Routing switchers:

a. The Signal reclocking mode can be set for each output on an output
board. Auto is the factory default setting.
• This setting means that properly-formed standard data-rate
signals will be reclocked. Other signals will be bypassed or not
reclocked. See Output Reclocker Bypass Settings on page 197 for
details.
This reclocking feature is not included with SD Routing switchers
do not include the reclocking feature.

Configuring Each Output Monitor on the TRX-OPM Boards

The Sync selection setting of each output monitor on the TRX-OPM
boards is provided in Table 24. The TRX-OPM boards are in the
128x256 and 512x1024 frame only. The DIP Switch that is to be con-
figured is located on the rear side, near the bottom, of the TRX-OPM
board.
The settings are the same as a standard Trinix Output VIT selection
switch. Code 00 (off, off) thru code 11 (on, on) selects the first thru
the fourth reference input, respectively, for the preferred output.
Table 24. OPM DIP- Switch Settings

Switch Description

S1-1 Least Significant Bit (LSB) of reference source used for Moni-
tor Output 1

S1-2 Most Significant Bit (MSB) of reference source used for Moni-
tor Output 1

S1-3 LSB of reference source used for Monitor Output 2

S1-4 MSB of reference source used for Monitor Output 2

S1-5 LSB of reference source used for Monitor Output 3

S1-6 MSB of reference source used for Monitor Output 3

S1-7 LSB of reference source used for Monitor Output 4

S1-8 MSB of reference source used for Monitor Output 4

130 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Summary of Installation Procedure

Connecting the Cables

1. Make sure all boards and cards are seated in their backplane sockets.
This step is generally not a problem since the boards and cards are held
in place with locking extractors.
As previously described in Duplication and Expansion on page 69, either
the PE-33016 or PE-2X2-3G Port expanders can be used to provide dual
outputs in blocks of 16. The PE-33008 Port expander can be used to
provide quad outputs in blocks of 16.
2. Ensure that the input/output expansion DIP switches and jumpers are
in the correct position if the system is supplied with port expanders.
These switches and jumpers are normally set at the factory and are
based on the configuration that is specified in the sales order. For more
information, see Duplication and Expansion on page 69.
3. Connect the desired input and output video cables.

Note Grass Valley recommends using 75-ohm BNC connectors (rather than 50
ohm) for HDTV applications.

The following items should be considered when connecting the input

and output video cables:
• All unused BNC connectors must be terminated with 75-ohm ter-
minators when the system includes port expanders.
• The labels on the rear-panel of the TRX-NXT-512x512 units are cor-
rect. The output connectors are NOT arranged in a left-to-right
sequence.

Note Labels for Jupiter control systems are available. Jupiter uses“0-based” num-
bering schemes are.

Control and Monitoring Systems

There are numerous ways to control and monitor the Trinix router. You will
need to connect your preferred Control and Monitoring method.
1. Connect the Routing switcher to the Grass Valley control system of
your choice:
• For Jupiter control system connections and settings, see Jupiter
Control on page 214.
• For SMS 7000 or Encore control system connections and settings,
see SMS 7000 / Encore Control on page 219.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 131

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

2. Connect and configure the LAN and Com Bus for the Broadlinx board
(NR-33000 NIC/Sync/OPM board).
• These Configuration steps are covered in the specific control sys-
tems.
The Broadlinx software can be configured to monitor router outputs
that are feeding critical downstream equipment (such as a transmitter)
for Protected path operations. If the Primary output signal is inter-
rupted, the system will automatically select the Secondary output that
is carrying the same signal and then trigger a system alarm. For wiring
information, see Figure 54 on page 96. For Protected path configuration
instructions, see Protected Paths on page 345.
The Broadlinx board is equipped with a plug-in, rechargeable lithium-
ion battery that is used to back up the Routing switcher status for
Encore-controlled systems. This battery is rated for approximately 500
power cycles. If there is a power failure and the battery fails to provide
power, the Broadlinx board will need to obtain the router status from
the Encore System Control Module (this data will be sent automati-
cally). For the location of this battery, see Figure 88 on page 174.
• An extensive set of gain, phase, filtering, and other adjustments are
available for each signal if the router is equipped with the VI-33100
“universal” input boards, and analog signals are received. For more
information about the VI-33100 input board, please refer to Section 6-
Analog Input Processing on page 375.
3. If output monitoring is required, refer to Output Monitoring on page 200.

4. Check the Frame number switches on multi-frame systems. See Frame

Number Settings on page 212.

Optional Connections
1. Connect the rear panel ALARM BNC to the facility alarm system (This
step is optional). The alarm port operates according to the SMPTE
standard 269M-1999.
For an overview of the alarm system, see the Alarm System section on
page 67.
The rear panel Alarm BNC can be configured to report primary alarms.
TRX-NXT-256x256/33256 configuration is via a jumper on the NR/SR-
33000 board, as shown on Figure 88 on page 174 and Figure 89 on
page 175. TRX-NXT-512x512 configuration is via a jumper on the RP-
33500 512 x 512 Rear Panel board as shown on Figure 94 on page 179.
TRX-NXT-256x512 configuration.
For the TRX-NXT-128x256, the configuration is through a jumper on the
NR/SR-33000 board, which is shown in Figure 88 on page 174 and
Figure 89 on page 175.

132 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Summary of Installation Procedure

Note All alarms are now reported as primary alarms. For example, a single fan
failure, which would be a secondary alarm in the past, will now be reported
as a primary alarm.

Powering Up the Routing Switcher

Connect the AC power cords to power up the system.
• If the LED on the front panel turns to green after the first few seconds
of operation, the system is operating properly.
• If the LED continues to glow red, power down the system and diagnose
the problem before powering up the system again. For an explanation
of LED alarm lights, see Troubleshooting on page 389.

CAUTION For TRX-NXT-512x512 Routing switchers: In order to avoid damage, the

power MUST be turned Off before removing/installing the “IFC” cables.

Keep the front door closed as much as possible when the system is running
to maximize the airflow and cooling system. Leave a 2 RU space beneath
the 512x1024 routing switcher to ensure proper air flow.

Note The front door should be closed during normal operation. Although the Trinix
Routing switcher will function properly with the door open, leaving the frame
open on a continuous basis will result in shortened product life.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 133

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 61. Installation of Rack Spacers

INSTALL RACK SPACERS ONLY

WHEN MOUNTING HOLES ARE
RECESSED MORE THAN 0.6 INCH
(15.2 MM) FROM FRONT SURFACE
OF RACK (DIMENSION ). SPACERS
WILL POSITION SWITCHER CHASSIS
SO THAT ACCESS DOOR CAN BE
OPENED FAR ENOUGH TO PERMIT
REMOVAL OF RIGHT-HAND
COMPONENTS. EACH SPACER IS
SECURED WITH 2 RACK SCREWS
(SUPPLIED).

RACK SPACERS FOR

DV-33128 CHASSIS
(KIT NO. 44-052989-001)

RACK SPACERS FOR

DV-33512 CHASSIS/
POWER SUPPLY NOT
RACK SPACERS FOR SHOWN. (KIT NO.
DV-33256 CHASSIS 650-4352-00)
(KIT NO. 44-052990-001)

134 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Summary of Installation Procedure

Figure 62. TRX-NXT-128x128 and 256x512 Front View (door removed).

Power supplies
Power supplies
FAN ALARM

FAN ALARM

SR-33000 Sync Fan modules

FAN ALARM
Reference / NR-33000
Broadlinx Board slots Fan modules
FAN ALARM

SR-33000 Sync
Reference / NR-33000
Broadlinx Board slots

Input/output boards Matrix board

(configuration varies)
Input/output boards Matrix board
(configuration varies)

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 135

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 63. TRX-NXT-128x128 Rear Panel

LEVEL
SUPER
0 0
96 112 16 32 14 15 1 2
80 48 13 3
64 64 12 4
48 80 11 5
INPUT EXPAND 32 16 112 96 10 9 7 6
OUTPUT EXPAND ULTRA 0 8
SYNC REDUNDANT
INT XPT CNTL
60Hz ENABLE MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR FRAME
A 1024 256 128 0
B 512 1536 512 768 256 384 14 15 1 2
C 2048 1024 512 13 3
12 4
11 5
DV-33256 9 7
DV-33512 DV-33128 10 6
128 x 256

LEVEL
0 SUPER 0
9611216 32 14 15 1 2
80 48 13 3
64 64 12 4
48 80 11 5
32 16 11296 10 9 7 6
0 8

MONITOR FRAME
128384 0
256 14 15 1 2
512 13 3
12 4
11 5
10 9 7 6
GPIO/TC 8

SECONDARY PRIMARY
OUTPUT MONITOR REF IN OUTPUT MONITOR REF IN
4 3 4 3 2 1 2 1

CONSOLE B COM BUS LAN B CROSSPOINT BUS CONTROL CONSOLE A COM BUS LAN A CROSSPOINT BUS

IP EXPAND
OP EXPAND
VIT REDUNDANT
INT XPT
60Hz ENABLE
OUTPUTS

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
A
97-128

B
C
ALARM
10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

9
17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
65-96

10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

9
17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
33-64

10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

9
17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
OUTPUTS

WARNING: FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION

AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE ONLY
1-32

WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE

115: 6.0A 250V SLOW BLOW
10

11

12

13

14

15

16
230: T2.5A 240V
1

9
17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
AUTO SELECT
INPUTS
97-128

100-130V/200-240V
6.0A/2.5A
47-63HZ
10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

9
17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

DC IN + DC IN -
INPUTS
65-96

10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

9
17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
INPUTS
33-64

PS B PS A
L N
10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

E E
17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
INPUTS

N L
1-32

10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

136 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Summary of Installation Procedure

Figure 64. TRX-NXT-256 X 256 Front View (door removed).

SR-33000 Sync Reference /

NR-33000 Broadlinx Board Fan modules Power supplies
slots

AC DC AC DC
VADJOKOK VADJOKOK

FAN ALARM

FAN ALARM

FAN ALARM

Matrix boards

Input/output
boards
(configuration
varies)

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 137

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 65. DV-33256 Rear Panel

SECONDARY PRIMARY
NIC B NIC A

3 1

OP OP
MON MON

4 2
COM BUS COM BUS

3 1
CONSOLE CONSOLE
B A
REF REF
IN IN

PS B PS A
See Figure 63 on page 136 4 2

for details
LEVEL CONTROL GPIO/TC CROSSPOINT BUS
IN EXPAND 0 SUPER
14150 2
OP EXPAND 961121632 1
VIT REDUNDANT 80 48 13 3
INT XPT CNTL 64 64 12 4
48 80 11 5
60Hz ENABLE
A 3216 112
96 10 9 7 6
0
ULTRA 8
B
C
MONITOR FRAME
128
256384 141501 2
512 13 3
12 4
11 5
10 9 7 6
8

DC INPUT
42 - 54 VDC
30-24 AMPS
DC IN + DC IN -

WARNING: FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION ALARM

AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE ONLY
PS B PS A
WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE
115: 12.5A 250V SLOW BLOW
N 230: T6.3A 240V
L
E E
AUTO SELECT
N L 100-130V/200-240V
10.0A/5.0A
47-63HZ
INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS

INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS
1-32 33-64 65-96 97-128 1-32 33-64 65-96 97-128 129-160 161-192 193-224 225-256 129-160 161-192 193-224 225-256

17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24

8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27

11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11

28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13

30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14

31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15

32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32

16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16

138 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Summary of Installation Procedure

Figure 66. TRX-NXT-256x256 Rear Panel.

071827609_NXT-12xx128_rear

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 139

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 67. DV-33512 (512 x 512) Front and Rear View

FAN ALARM

FAN ALARM

FAN ALARM

FAN ALARM

FAN ALARM

FAN ALARM
Fan modules

FAN A FAN B FAN C FAN D FAN E FAN F

POWER ALARM IFC

Input/output
boards
(configuration
varies)

OP
MON

Power and control cables

A

2
INPUTS 0 - 255 / OUTPUTS 0 - 255

REF
INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS IN

480 - 511 448 - 479 416 - 447 384 - 415 224 - 255 192 - 223 160 - 191 128 - 159 96 - 127 64 - 95 32 - 63 0 - 31 96 - 127 64 - 95 32 - 63 0 - 31
INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS 3

4
INPUTS 256 - 511 / OUTPUTS 0 - 255

INPUTS 0 - 255 / OUTPUTS 256 - 511

Matrix boards
INPUTS 256 - 511 / OUTPUTS 256 - 511

INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS

INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS
352 - 383 320 - 351 288 - 319 256 - 287 352 - 383 320 - 351 288 - 319 256 - 287 480 -511 448 - 479 416 - 441 384 - 415 224 - 255 192 - 223 160 - 191 128 - 159

Rear view. See Figure 68

Input/output
boards for detail.
(configuration
varies)

SR-33000 Sync
VADJOK OK

Reference /
AC DC

NR-33000
ACDC
VADJOKOK

Broadlinx Board Power supply unit may be

slots
mounted above or below
VADJOK OK

main chassis
AC DC

PS A PS C
AC DC
VADJOK OK

PRIMARY

SECONDARY
PS B PS D

140 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Summary of Installation Procedure

Figure 68. DV-512 main frame and power supply frame connections.

To Fan IFC connector

To additional frames
(or terminate)

RP-33500 board is
accessed by removing
this panel

PS IFC FAN IFC

A

1 XPT BUS

A
SR-33500 2

B
DC INPUT 2 NOT FUSED
42 - 54 VDC OP
MON
30 - 24 AMPS
A
DC IN + DC IN -
3

A Fan IFC cables

4

COM BUS COM BUS

DC INPUT 1 NOT FUSED ALARM
42 - 54 VDC
30 - 24 AMPS
1
DC IN + DC IN -

2
LEVEL
0 SUPER
961121632
0
1415 1 2
To additional frames
REF 80 48 13 3
64 64 12 4
IN 48 80 11 5
321611296 10 9 7 6
ULTRA 0 8

INPUT EXPAND
MONITOR FRAME OUTPUT EXPAND
3 1024 0 SYNC REDUNDANT
512 1536 1415 1 2 INT XPT CNTL
2048 13 3 60Hz ENABLE
12 4 A
11 5
10 9 7 6 B
8 C

See Power Supply Notes

for power cable details
4

RP-33500.
See Figure 94
for details

INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS

INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS INPUTS
129 - 160 161 - 192 193 - 224 225 - 256 385 - 416 417 - 448 449 - 480 481 - 512 257 - 288 289 - 320 321 - 352 353 - 384 257 - 288 289 - 320 321 - 352 353 - 384

Com Bus

DC OUTPUT 2 DC OUTPUT 1
42 - 54 VDC 42 - 54 VDC
30 - 24 AMPS 30 - 24 AMPS
DC OUT + DC OUT - DC OUT + DC OUT - PRIMARY

2 1
REF IN
COM BUS NIC A

CONSOLE A

SECONDARY
DC INPUT 2 DC INPUT 1
42 - 54 VDC 42 - 54 VDC 4 3
30 - 24 AMPS 30 - 24 AMPS REF IN
COM BUS NIC B
DC IN + DC IN - DC IN + DC IN -

CONSOLE B

AC INPUT: 100-240 V ~, 10.0-5.0A, 50-60Hz AC INPUT: 100-240 V ~, 10.0-5.0A, 50-60Hz GPIO/TC FRAME IFC
XPT BUS
100-120V: 12.5A, 250V, SLO BLO 100-120V: 12.5A, 250V, SLO BLO
200-240V: T6.3A, 250V 200-240V: T6.3A, 250V CONTROL
PS D PS C PS B PS A

L N L N
E E E E
N L N L
WARNING: FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION
AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE ONLY
WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE

This XPT cable required only

for SMS/Encore control

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 141

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 69. TRX-NXT-512x512 Rear Panel

071827609_trx-512x512_connections

142 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Summary of Installation Procedure

Figure 70. TRX-NXT-128x256 Asymmetric Frame, Front

Fan
modules
Matrix
boards

Broadlinx
Boards

071827610_128x256_Front
Input Boards

Output Boards

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 143

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 71. TRX-NXT-128x256 Asymmetric Frame-Back

Fan modules and Exhaust

vents

Input and Output boards

OPM
Board The outer four slots are
Output boards
The inner eight slots are
Input boards
See Figure 2
for detail

DC Power inputs

Matrix boards

SR module

071827610_128x256_rear

144 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Summary of Installation Procedure

Figure 72. TRX-NXT-256x512 Asymmetric Frame, Front and Back

Fan modules and Exhaust

vents

Input and Output

boards
The outer four slots are
Output boards
The inner eight slots are
Input boards

DC Power inputs

Matrix boards
071827609_256X512-Frame_Front-view

071827609_256X512-Frame_Back-view
SR module

Broadlinx boards See Figure 73

for detail

Output boards

Figure 73. The Level, Monitor, and Frame Switch For the 256x512 Routing Switcher
071827612_LEVEL_MONITOR_256x512

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 145

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 74. TRX-NXT-512x1024 Asymmetric Frame, Front and Back

Fan modules

Output Boards

DC Power inputs

Matrix and Primary

Broadlinx boards

See Figure 75 on
page 147 for detail

Input Boards

Matrix and Sec-

ondary Broadlinx
boards

DC Power inputs

Output Boards

Fan modules

146 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Summary of Installation Procedure

Figure 75. The Level, Monitor, and Frame Switch For the 512x1024 Routing Switcher

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 147

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Setting the Rear Panel Dip Switch

OPEN CLOSED

INPUT EXPAND
OUTPUT EXPAND
SYNC REDUNDANT
INT XPT CNTL
60Hz ENABLE
A
B
C

The above figure is an example of a DIP switch that is located on the rear
panel of the routing switcher. The different settings on this switch are
explained in the sections below

Input/Output Expand
See Duplication and Expansion on page 186.

Sync Redundant

Note This switch may be labeled “VIT Redundant” on some units.

If the system is equipped with a secondary NR-33000 board, closing this

switch will provide continued operation in case of a single NR failure.
However, operating in the redundant mode will limit the number of pos-
sible sync sources to two. In TRX-NXT-512x512 systems, if Sync Redundant
mode is selected the “C” switch must also be closed. For more information,
see Figure 79 on page 158 and Figure 80 on page 159.

Internal XPT (Crosspoint) Control

Open = Trinix Crosspoint bus is controlled by an external Crosspoint bus
controller (for example, a Jupiter VM-3000 or CM-4000; or, an NR board in
another frame).
Closed = Trinix Crosspoint bus is controlled by an internal Crosspoint con-
troller (for example, an NR-33000 Sync/NIC/OPM board). This setting is
used when the NR is in turn being controlled through a LAN connection to
a control system such as a Grass Valley Series 7000 Signal Management
System or Encore.
For more information, see SMS 7000 / Encore Control on page 219 and Jupiter
Control on page 214.

60 Hz Enable Switch
This switch is reserved for future use.

A B C Switches
The “A” switch is closed to disable a frames active NR33000 board from
driving the Com Bus. The switch is only read on startup. If the switch posi-

148 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Setting the Rear Panel Dip Switch

tion is changed, the board must be rebooted. This switch is used in multiple
frame systems when there are multiple active NR boards that are connected
to the Com Bus. For example, if two 128 or 256 size frames are used in a
fully redundant protected path system.

Note If the “A” switch is closed when the NR33000 board is installed in the frame,
it will not drive the Com Bus.

The “B” switch is closed in output-monitor-expanded systems where

output monitor signals are brought through a combiner. See Monitoring
with Expanded Systems on page 207.
The “C” switch must be closed in TRX-NXT-512x512 systems whenever the
Sync Redundant switch is closed. This will prevent use of any sync refer-
ence connected to the SR-33500 Sync/OPM board.

A B C Switches and the TRX-NXT-512x512 Systems

This section applies to both the TRX-NXT-512x1024 and TRX-NXT-512x512
systems as well.
When using Telnet, or replacing a NR33000 (Broadlinx) board, in a network
controlled-redundant system, you will need to manualy set the Network
parametrs on the secondary frame
The “A” switch is labeled "COM SLAVE" and if the “A” switch is closed
when the NR33000 board is installed in the frame, it will not drive the Com
Bus.
The "B" switch is ignored since Monitor expansion is done through the
"daisy-chaining" method, which eliminates the need for combiners.
The "C" switch is ignored.

Miscellaneous Rear Panel Connectors

GPIO/TC - General Purpose / Time Code connector

The GPIO connection is reserved for future use.
The "TC" input is used for SMPTE LTC time-code. It supplies LTC to the
Active Broadlinx card and then to any Trinix Multi-viewer cards through
the Active Broadlinx.

Note Multi-viewer cards that are in other frames without Broadlinx cards may
receive this LTC data through the Com Bus.

Console A & B connectors

These connectors are for serial connection and type various Broadlinx com-
mands.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 149

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Control Connector
This connector is reserved for future use.

150 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Power Supply Notes

Power Supply Notes

Power supply specifications are shown in AC Power Input on page 115.
Ventilation is critical for the Trinix power supplies. The power supplies
should not be run when the fan is not working. The power supply will shut
down automatically to prevent damage if the supply begins to overheat.

Note Grass Valley strongly recommends that you use redundant power supplies.

The back panel of the frame provides a separate AC connector for each
supply. Each power supply must be connected to a separate AC mains
branch circuit with an over-current protector that is rated at no more than
20A AC low line and 10 A AC high line.

Note Grass Valley strongly recommends, whenever possible, using the AC high
line to reduce line currents and heat within the power supplies.

The following fuses: F101, F105, F110- F113, F201, F205, and F210-F213 Must
be replaced with fuses that are rated “5A 125V Fast Acting” (GV PN: 59-
5053-00, LITTELFUSE PN: 39515000440). These fuses are accessible from
the rear panel. The location for the rear cover for each of the frames is
shown below.

The 128x256 Asymmetrical Frame

The fuse reference designators for the 128x256 frames are F5, F6, andF7.
These fuses are labeled A through C on the back of the router.

Figure 76. Fuse Location for the 128x256 Router

071827611_fuse-loc_128x256

Location of
Fuses

The 256x512 Asymmetrical Frame

The fuse reference designators for the 128x256 frames areF1 - F7. These
fuses are labeled A through G on the back of the router.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 151

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 77. Fuse Location for the 256x512 Router

071827611_fuse-loc_256x512
Location of Fuses

The 512x1024 Asymmetrical Frame

The fuse locations for the 512x1024 Asymmetric frame is similar to the
256x512 frame, except there are two fuse covers, one in the upper section
and one in the lower section. The upper fuses are for the fan modules, both
the upper (F110-F113) and lower fans (F210-F213). These fuses have LEDs
to indicate the presence of a blown fan fuse. The Fuse cove has little holes
that may be used to see if any of these LEDs are lighted, which indicates a
blown fan fuse. The fuses are labeled “Fan Fuse A” or “B” to indicate which
fuse goes with which fan module in the 1 RU fan assembly.

Figure 78. Fuse Location for the 512x1024 Router

071827612_Fuse location 512x1024

Location of Fuses

Two fuses under each cover support additional power supply redundancy
for the TRX-OPM and Broadlinx (NR-33000) cards. The fuses are: F101,
F105, F201, and F205.
• Fuses F101 and F105, fuse the secondary 48V DC path from the A1 & B1
power supply trays to the lower portion of the frame supporting the
lower TRX-OPM and the secondary NR-3300.
• Fuses F201 & F205, fuse the secondary 48V DC path from the A2 & B2
power supply trays to the upper portion of the frame supporting the
upper TRX-OPM, and primary NR-3300.

CAUTION Unlike the Fan Fuses, fuses F101, F105, F201 & F205 do not have the Blown-
Fuse LED indicators!

152 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Power Supply Notes

Contact Grass Valley's Technical support for replacement fuse information

(see Contacting Grass Valley on page 4).

Installing the TRX-NXT-128x128 and TRX-NXT-256x256 Frames

AC Applications
Power supplies are factory-installed and designed to be hot swappable.

Note Fuses must be selected and installed as appropriate for mains voltage.

For systems with only one power supply, SR/NR-33000 sync cards, the
jumper JN2 must be set to “DC,” otherwise the red “PALARM” LED on the
front edge of the SR/NRs will remain on. If a redundant power supply is
installed later, JN2 must be moved to “AC.” See Figure 89 on page 175.

DC Applications
Connect the DC Input connector to a DC source.

Note For DC applications, fusing must be provided externally in accordance

with local electrical regulations. DC input specifications and characteristics
for the Trinix are shown in the DC Power Input section.

Check to see that the SR/NR-33000 sync cards have jumper JN2 set to
“DC.” See Figure 89 on page 175.

Simultaneous AC and DC Applications

It is possible to connect both AC and DC power sources as part of a system
redundancy scheme. In this case, refer to the AC and DC notes above. SR/
NR-33000 jumper JN2 should be set to AC.

Installing the TRX-NXT-512x512 Frame

AC Applications
The back panel of the frame provides a separate AC connector for each
supply. Each power supply must be connected to a separate AC mains branch
circuit with an over-current protector that is rated at no more than 20A AC low
line, 10A AC high line.

Note Grass Valley strongly recommends, whenever possible, using the AC high
line to reduce line currents and heat within the power supplies.

Power supply modules for the 512 x 512 Routing switchers are mounted in
a separate frame and require cabling (supplied) from the DC Output 1 con-
nector of the power supply frame to the DC Input 1 connector of the
Routing switcher frame; and from DC Output 2 to DC Input 2.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 153

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

CAUTION Do NOT cross these cables. Output 1 MUST go to Input 1 and Output 2 to
Input 2 in order for the alarm system to operate correctly.

The pinouts are shown on Table 26 on page 170. An illustration of the

power connectors is shown on Figure 68 on page 141.
The power supply modules are factory-installed and designed to be
hotswappable.

Note Fuses must be selected and installed as appropriate for mains voltage. It is
important that you refer to the Trinix rear panel’s frame markings for the
correct Fuse value and Power requirements.

For systems with only one power supply, the RP-33500 512 x 512 Rear Panel
card jumper JN1 must be set to DC, otherwise the Alarm LED on the frame
front panel will remain on. If a redundant power supply is installed later,
the JN1 must then be moved to AC. See Figure 94 on page 179.

DC Applications
In DC applications, the TRX-NXT-512x512 may not include a separate
power supply frame. When a separate power supply frame is used:
1. Connect the DC source to the DC Input 1 and DC Input 2 connectors of
the PS frame.
2. Use the supplied cables to connect the DC Output 1 and 2 connectors of
the PS frame to the DC Input 1 and DC Input 2 connectors of the main
frame. Pinouts are shown on Table 26 on page 170.

CAUTION Do NOT cross these cables. Output 1 MUST go to Input 1 and Output 2 to
Input 2 in order for the alarm system to operate properly.

When there is no PS frame, connect the DC source directly to the DC Input

1 and DC Input 2 connectors of the main frame.

Note For DC applications, fusing must be provided externally in accordance

with local electrical regulations. DC input specifications and characteristics
for the Trinix are shown in the DC Power Input section.

An illustration of the power connectors is shown on Figure 68 on page 141.

Check to see that the RP-33500 512 x 512 Rear Panel card has jumper JN1
set to DC. See Figure 94 on page 179.

Simultaneous AC and DC Applications

It is possible to connect both AC and DC power sources as part of a system
redundancy scheme. In this case, refer to the AC and DC notes above. RP-
33500 jumper JN1 should be set to AC.
Table 25. TRX-NXT-512x512 DC Power Cord Pinouts.

154 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Power Supply Notes

Power supply connector Cable description Main frame connector

(Ground) Yellow/green (Ground)

(Ground) (Ground)
Plain black

DC Out + (left) 1 (red) DC In + (left)

DC Out + (right) 2 (blue) DC In + (right)

DC Out - (left) 3 (white) DC In - (left)

DC Out - (right) 4 (yellow) DC In - (right)

TRX-NXT-128x256 and TRX-NXT-256x512

The 128x256 and 256x512Trinix Asymmetrical frames provide two DC input connec-
tors. The 512x1024 Asymmetrical frame has four DC connections A1 & B1 supply the
top half of the frame and A2 & B2 supply the bottom half. Each DC input is isolated
via power OR-ing diodes. For AC applications external power supplies modules are
used.

AC Applications
The back panel of the power supply frame provides a separate AC con-
nector for each power supply. Each power supply should be connected to
a separate 20A AC low line or 10A AC high line power circuit.

Note Grass Valley strongly recommends, whenever possible, using the AC high
line to reduce line currents and heat within the power supplies.

Each power supply frame must be connected to the Trinix Asymmetrical

frame for power distribution and power supply status monitoring. For
more information, see 256X512 Default Power Supply Configurations on
page 318.
For the primary power distribution:
1. Connect the DC power cable to the DC Input A connector on the back
of the main frame.
2. Connect the power IFC cable to the PMBUS A connector on the back of
the main frame.
For the secondary power distribution:
1. Connect the DC power cable to the DC Input B connector on the back
of the main frame.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 155

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

2. Connect the power IFC cable to the PMBUS B connector on the back of
the main frame.

DC Applications
Connect the DC source to the DC Input A and DC Input B connectors of the
main frame.

Note For DC applications, fusing must be provided externally in accordance with

local electrical regulations. DC input specifications and characteristics for
the Trinix are shown in the DC Power Input section.

156 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Sync Reference Connections

Sync Reference Connections

For synchronous vertical interval switching, the same sync reference signal
must be sent to the control system and to the Trinix. (Trinix will operate
without a sync connection but switching will be non-synchronous.) For
SMS 7000 and Encore systems, sync must be connected to the Sync 1 input.

Note Some TRX-NXT-512x512 power supply units are not labeled correctly. See
Figure 68 on page 141 for correct REF IN connector labeling.

The SR-33000 Sync Reference / OPM board

The following can be used to lock the system to Reference sync:
• The NR-33000 NIC/Sync/OPM board
• The SR-33500 Sync Reference board (in TRX-NXT-512x512 units)
• The TRX-SR board (in the Trinix Asymmetrical frames).
The video standard operation (That is, NTSC, PAL, or HDTV.) is auto-
detected by the system. The sync signal can be video, black burst, 2 V com-
posite sync, 4 V composite, or tri-level (HD). Each sync input uses looping
75-ohm BNC connectors; if a loop through is not used, the loop BNC should
have a 75-ohm termination.
For an illustration of the rear panel connectors, see Figure 63 on page 136
(128 x 128); Figure 65 on page 138 (256 x 256); Figure 68 on page 141 (512 x
512); Figure 70 on page 143 (128 x 256); or Figure 72 on page 145 (256 x 512).
For the TRX-OPM Board DIP switch setting, see Configuring Each Output
Monitor on the TRX-OPM Boards on page 130.
The sync source must also be selected on each output board (as described
in the Output Board Configuration section on page 185.)
The Sync Redundant switch mentioned in the system drawings below is on
the rear panel of the frame.

Frames with Single Sync Reference

In the example shown in Figure 79 on page 158, the Single-Sync reference
is sent to Encore and Jupiter control system and to a single connection on
the Trinix router. For example, TRX-NXT-128x128, TRX-NXT-256x256, and
TRX-NXT-512x1024.
The sync redundant switch is located between the OP Expand and INT XPT
switches on the rear of the Router chassis.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 157

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 79. Single Sync Reference Options

SMS MCPU
or Sync
Encore SCB 1

Sync 1

OR

Jupiter
Sync 1

*Sync Redundant switch = Off

1 2 Primary NR-33000

All output
boards

Sync Line

Frames with Dual-Sync References

In the example shown in Figure 80 on page 159, the Dual-Sync reference is
sent to the Encore and Jupiter control system and to two connections on the
Trinix router. For example, TRX-NXT-128x128, TRX-NXT-256x256, TRX-
NXT-128x256, TRX-NXT-256x512, and TRX-NXT-512x1024.
The sync redundant switch is located between the OP Expand and INT XPT
switches on the rear of the Router chassis.

158 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Sync Reference Connections

Figure 80. Dual Sync Reference Options

SMS MCPU
or Sync
Encore SCB 1

Sync 1

OR

Jupiter
Sync 1
Sync Redundant switch = Off

Sync 2

T T

1 2 Primary NR-33000

Output
board(s)
on SL1

Output
board(s)
on SL2

Sync Lines

Two independent sync signals can be connected to the Trinix. They may be
different standards (for example, SD and HD) or different phases of the
same standard (for example, NTSC and delayed NTSC). For example, SD
sync could be used for one set of 32 outputs and HD sync for another set of
32 outputs.

Sync Connection to Control System

Outputs using the same reference as the control system (Sync 1 in this
example) will switch deterministically (i.e., perform frame-specific
switching). Outputs using the other reference will switch synchronously
and in the vertical interval but not deterministically. Which reference
should be connected to the control system depends on the reference types
involved:
• If SD and HD are used, SD is recommended for connection to the
control system.
• If different phases of the same reference are used, the phase that is most
delayed is recommended for connection to the control system.
• If NTSC and PAL are used, select the reference for those outputs where
determinism is most important.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 159

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Frames with Multi-Sync References

The Multi-sync reference arrangement is similar to what is described in
Frames with Dual-Sync References on page 158, except that all four possible
sync references are used. This is an option with the TRX-NXT-128x128,
TRX-NXT-256x256, TRX-NXT-128x256, TRX-NXT-256x512, and the TRX-
NXT-512x1024 Routing switchers.

Figure 81. Multi-sync References

SMS MCPU
or Sync
Encore SCB 1

Sync 1

OR

Jupiter
Sync 1
Sync Redundant switch = Off

Sync 2

Sync 3

T T

Sync 4 1 2 Primary NR-33000

3 4 Secondary NR-33000
T T

Output
board(s)
on SL1

Output
board(s)
on SL2

Output
board(s)
on SL3

Output
board(s)
on SL4

Sync Lines

160 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Sync Reference Connections

For a discussion concerning which sync reference should be connected to

the control system, see Sync Connection to Control System on page 159.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 161

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Frames with Sync Redundant NR Operation

This is an option with the TRX-NXT-128x128, TRX-NXT-256x256, TRX-
NXT-128x256, TRX-NXT-256x512, and the TRX-NXT-512x1024 Routing
switchers.

Figure 82.

SMS MCPU
or Sync
Encore SCB 1

Sync 1

OR

Jupiter
Sync 1
Sync Redundant switch = On

Sync 2

1 2 Primary NR-33000

3 4 Secondary NR-33000
T T
Output
board(s)
on SL1

Output
board(s)
on SL2

Sync Lines

For NR-33000 redundant operation, one (or two maximum) sync references
are looped from the Primary to the Secondary boards. If the Primary board
fails, the system will switch automatically to the Secondary board. Note
that in this arrangement, Sync Bus 1 is always combined with Sync Bus 3
and Bus 2 combined with Bus 4. When configuring the output boards, only
Bus 1 and Bus 2 are valid selections.

162 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Sync Reference Connections

For a discussion concerning which of the two sync references should be

connected to the control system, see Sync Connection to Control System on
page 159.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 163

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

TRX-NXT-512x512 with Multi Sync References

Figure 83.

SMS MCPU
or Sync
Encore SCB 1

Sync 1

OR

SR-33500 Sync Redundant switch = Off

Jupiter
1 “C” switch = Off
Sync 1

2
Sync 2

3
Sync 3

4
Sync 4

Output
board(s)
on SL1

Output
board(s)
on SL2

Output
board(s)
on SL3

Output
board(s)
on SL4

Sync Lines

In TRX-NXT-512x512 routing switchers, which are normally supplied with

an SR-33500 Sync/OPM board, up to four independent sync sources can be
connected and any of the four can be selected for each output board.
For a discussion concerning which of the four sync references should be
connected to the control system, see Sync Connection to Control System.
The “C” switch mentioned here and on the following drawings in on the
Trinix rear panel.

164 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Sync Reference Connections

TRX-NXT-512x512 with Single Sync Reference and Single/Dual NR-33000

The example shown in Figure 84, is a TRX-NXT-512x512 with Single Sync
Reference and Single/Dual NR-33000. See Sync Reference Connections on
page 157 for more information about Sync Reference.

Figure 84.

SMS MCPU
or Sync
Encore SCB 1

Sync 1

OR

SR-33500 Sync Redundant switch = Off

Jupiter
1 “C” switch = Off
Sync 1

2 1 Primary NR-33000
Some TRX-NXT-512x512 power
See Note Secondary NR-33000
supply units are not labeled correctly.
See Figure 68 on page 141 for correct
REF IN connector labelling.
All output
boards

Sync Line 1

The NR-33000 board can be installed in the associated power supply frame
to provide Broadlinx capability. The board in the Primary slot will feed
Sync Line 1. If the board is removed, Sync Line 1 will automatically switch
to the SR-33500.

Note A secondary NR-33000 can be installed to provide Broadlinx redundancy. In

this case, the NR REF IN 3 and 4 connectors would not be used.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 165

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

TRX-NXT-512x512 with Dual Sync References and Single/Dual NR-33000

Figure 85.

SMS MCPU
or Sync
Encore SCB 1

Sync 1

OR

SR-33500 Sync Redundant switch = Off

Jupiter
1 “C” switch = Off
Sync 1

2
Sync 2

T T

2 1 Primary NR-33000

See Note Secondary NR-33000

Some TRX-NXT-512x512 power
supply units are not labeled correctly.
See Figure 68 on page 141 for correct Output
REF IN connector labelling. board(s)
on SL1

Output
board(s)
on SL2
Sync Lines

This arrangement is similar to the one that is described on the previous

page, except that two sync references are used. The NR board in the
Primary slot will feed Sync Lines 1 and 2. If the NR is removed, Sync Lines
1 and 2 will automatically switch to the SR-33500.

Note A secondary NR-33000 can be installed to provide Broadlinx redundancy. In

this case, the NR REF IN 3 and 4 connectors would not be used.

For a discussion concerning which of the two sync references should be

connected to the control system, see Sync Connection to Control System.

166 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Sync Reference Connections

TRX-NXT-512x512 with Dual Sync References and Redundant NR

Operation

Figure 86.

SMS MCPU
or Sync
Encore SCB 1

Sync 1

OR

SR-33500 Sync Redundant switch = On

Jupiter
1 “C” switch = On
Sync 1

2
Sync 2

3
2 1 Primary NR-33000

4 4 3 Secondary NR-33000

T T

Output
board(s)
on SL1
Some TRX-NXT-512x512 power
supply units are not labeled correctly. Output
board(s)
See drawing on Figure 68 on page 141 on SL2
for correct REF IN connector labelling.

Sync Lines

In this application, two sync references are looped through the SR-33500,
the Primary NR board, and the Secondary NR board. The NR boards are
operated in redundant mode.
• If the Primary board fails, the system will switch automatically to the
Secondary board.
• If both NR boards are removed, Sync Lines 1 and 2 will automatically
switch to the SR board.
Notice that Sync Line 1 is always combined with Sync Line 3 and Line 2
combined with Line 4. When configuring the output boards, only Bus 1 and
Bus 2 are valid selections.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 167

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Broadlinx operation is also redundant.

See Sync Connection to Control System on page 159 for information con-
cerning which of the two sync references should be connected to the control
system.

TRX-NXT-512x512 with Multi Sync References and Dual NR-33000

Figure 87.

SMS MCPU
or Sync
Encore SCB 1

Sync 1

OR

SR-33500 Sync Redundant switch = Off

Jupiter
1 “C” switch = Off
Sync 1

2
Sync 2

3
Sync 3 T T

2 1 Primary NR-33000
4
Sync 4 4 3 Secondary NR-33000

T T

Output
board(s)
on SL1
Some TRX-NXT-512x512 power
supply units are not labeled correctly. Output
board(s)
See Figure 68 on page 141 for correct on SL2
REF IN connector labelling.
Output
board(s)
on SL3

Output
board(s)
on SL4

Sync Lines

In this arrangement, all four possible sync references are used. Two NR
boards are installed, but not operated in sync redundant mode. The NR

168 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Sync Reference Connections

board in the Primary slot will feed Sync Lines 1 and 2; the NR board in the
Secondary slot will feed Sync Lines 3 and 4.
• If the Primary NR is removed, Sync Lines 1 and 2 will automatically
switch to the SR-33500.
• If the Secondary NR is removed, the SR will feed Sync Lines 3 and 4.
See Sync Connection to Control System on page 159 for information con-
cerning which of the four sync references should be connected to the
control system.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 169

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

NR/SR-33000 / SR-33500/ TRX-SR V-Phasing

A V-phasing feature, available with the NR-33000, SR-33000 with Rev B
FPGA Software Update, and SR-33500 allows the user to adjust the switch
point from the -1 line to +2.5 lines relative to the nominal switch point for
the video standard being used. This is accomplished with the following
DIP switches:
• NR-33000 DIP switch S3 (shown on Figure 88 on page 174)
• SR-33000 DIP switch S2 (shown on Figure 89 on page 175)
• SR-33500 DIP switches S102/S103 (shown on Figure 90 on page 176)
• TRX-SR DIP switches S1-S4 (shown on Figure 91 on page 177).
Table 26 shows the switches providing adjustment relative to Reference A
(“Reference 1” on SR-33500). For SR-33000, “On” = switch closed.
Table 26. Switch Point Shift For Signals Referenced to Ref A / Ref 1

Switch point relative to NR: S3-1 NR: S3-2 NR: S3-3

Ref. A SR-33000: S2-1 SR-33000: S2-2 SR-33000: S2-3
(“Ref 1” on SR-33500) SR-33500: S101-1 SR-33500: S101-2 SR-33500: S101-3

-1.0 line On On On

-0.5 line Off On On

Coincident (default) On Off On

+0.5 line Off Off On

+1.0 line On On Off

+1.5 line Off On Off

+2.0 line On Off Off

+2.5 line Off Off Off

Table 27 shows the switches providing adjustment relative to Reference B

(“Reference 2” on SR-33500). For SR-33000, “On” = switch closed.
Table 27. Switch Point Shift For Signals Referenced to Ref B / Ref2

Switch point relative to NR: S3-4 NR: S3-5 NR: S3-6

Ref. B SR-33000: S2-4 SR-33000: S2-5 SR-33000: S2-6
(“Ref 2” on SR-33500) SR-33500: S101-4 SR-33500: S101-5 SR-33500: S101-6

-1.0 line On On On

-0.5 line Off On On

Coincident (default) On Off On

+0.5 line Off Off On

170 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 NR/SR-33000 / SR-33500/ TRX-SR V-Phasing

+1.0 line On On Off

+1.5 line Off On Off

+2.0 line On Off Off

+2.5 line Off Off Off

Table 28 shows the switches providing adjustment relative to SR-33500 Ref-

erence 3.
Table 28. Switch Point Shift For Signals Referenced to Ref 3.

Switch point relative to

SR-33500: S102-1 SR-33500: S102-2 SR-33500: S102-3
Ref. 3

-1.0 line On On On

-0.5 line Off On On

Coincident (default) On Off On

+0.5 line Off Off On

+1.0 line On On Off

+1.5 line Off On Off

+2.0 line On Off Off

+2.5 line Off Off Off

The switches that provide adjustment relative to SR-33500 Reference 4 are

shown in Table 29.
Table 29. Switch Point Shift For Signals Referenced to Ref 4.

Switch point relative to

SR-33500: S102-4 SR-33500: S102-5 SR-33500: S102-6
Ref. 4

-1.0 line On On On

-0.5 line Off On On

Coincident (default) On Off On

+0.5 line Off Off On

+1.0 line On On Off

+1.5 line Off On Off

+2.0 line On Off Off

+2.5 line Off Off Off

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 171

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

TRX-SR V Phase and Source Information

Table 30 shows the switches providing adjustment for TRX-SR, S2.
Table 30. Switch Point Shift for TRX-SR, S2

TRX-SR, S2:1-3 TRX-SR, S2:4-6

Reference 1 Reference 2

-1.0 line On, On, On, On, On, On,

-0.5 line Off, On, On Off, On, On

Coincident (default) On, Off, On On, Off, On

+0.5 line Off, Off, On Off, Off, On

+1.0 line On, On, Off On, On, Off

+1.5 line Off, On, Off Off, On, Off

+2.0 line On, Off, Off On, Off, Off

+2.5 line Off, Off, Off Off, Off, Off

Out Monitor Boost En S2:8 On = En S2:8 Off = Dis

Table 31 shows the switches providing adjustment for TRX-SR, S3.

Table 31. Switch Point Shift for TRX-SR, S3

TRX-SR, S3:1-3 TRX-SR, S3:4-6

Reference 1 Reference 2

-1.0 line On, On, On, On, On, On,

-0.5 line Off, On, On Off, On, On

Coincident (default) On, Off, On On, Off, On

+0.5 line Off, Off, On Off, Off, On

+1.0 line On, On, Off On, On, Off

+1.5 line Off, On, Off Off, On, Off

+2.0 line On, Off, Off On, Off, Off

+2.5 line Off, Off, Off Off, Off, Off

Table 32 shows the switches providing Status for the Source Select DIP
Switch S1.

172 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 NR/SR-33000 / SR-33500/ TRX-SR V-Phasing

Table 32. Output Monitor VIT Source Select DIP Switch S1

DIP Switch S1 Status

Output Monitor 1 VIT Source Select DipSwitch

S1:1-2 (A value of 0 selects VIT 1, Value 1 selects VIT 2, Value 2 selects VIT 3 and Value 3
selects VIT 4)

S1:3-4 Output Monitor 2 VIT Source Select DipSwitch

S1:5-6 Output Monitor 3 VIT Source Select DipSwitch

S1:7-8 Output Monitor 4 VIT Source Select DipSwitch

Table 33 shows the switches providing Status for the Source Select
DipSwitch S4.
Table 33. VIT Field Select DIP Switchs S4

DIP Switch S4 Status

S4:1-2 Field 1, Field 2

S4:3-4 Field 1, Field 2

S4:5-6 Field 1, Field 2

S4:7-8 Field 1, Field 2

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 173

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 88. NR-33000 NIC/Sync/OPM board

AC and dual
power systems
DC and single
power systems
Power Input Select Jumper JN2

The NR-33000
PS alarms are
ignored for all
Asymmet-
rical frames.

Secondary SMPTE Alarm Jumper JN1

alarms are no Report
SALARM
longer sup-
Supress
ported. SALARM
Always set
this jumper to
the "Suppress
SALARM"
position. Location of
Lithium-Ion battery

Switch S3.

S2 default settings

174 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 NR/SR-33000 / SR-33500/ TRX-SR V-Phasing

Figure 89. SR-33000 Sync/OPM reference card

Monitor expansion jumpers JN3

and JN4.

DC and single power supply

systems: set JN2 to “DC.” AC
and Dual power supply sys-
tems: set JN2 to “AC.”

Switch S2.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 175

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 90. SR-33500 Sync/OPM reference card

Switches S101 and S102.

DIP switches S103, S104, and S610 are

reserved for future use. The default setting
for these switches is “Open.”

176 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 NR/SR-33000 / SR-33500/ TRX-SR V-Phasing

Figure 91. TRX-SR DIP Switches

DIP
Switches
S1-S4

071827609_TRX-SR
The TRX-SR Board LEDs
The TRX-SR uses the following LED colors for status (see Table 34).
Table 34. TRX-SR Status LEDs

LED Color Definition

MSTR ALARM Red A standard Trinix Board Alarm indicating that something is wrong on this board.

IN USE Yellow An output is being monitored by this module.

P2V1 Green The +2.1V supply is OK.

P3V3 Green The +3.3V supply is OK.

P5V Green The +5V supply is OK.

LOGIC VCC Green The ComBus Logic VCC is getting power from the backplane.

XC DONE Green The FPGA is configured

Figure 92. TRX-SC

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 177

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 93. TRX-OPM Switch

DIP Switche
S1
Used for sync
selection con-
figuration
monitor on the
128x256 and
512x1024
frames only

071827612_TRX-OPM_r1
Table 35. TRX-OPM: S1 DIP- Switch Settings

DIP Switch Description

S1-1 Least Significant Bit (LSB) of reference source used for Moni-
tor Output 1

S1-2 Most Significant Bit (MSB) of reference source used for Moni-
tor Output 1

S1-3 LSB of reference source used for Monitor Output 2

S1-4 MSB of reference source used for Monitor Output 2

S1-5 LSB of reference source used for Monitor Output 3

S1-6 MSB of reference source used for Monitor Output 3

S1-7 LSB of reference source used for Monitor Output 4

S1-8 MSB of reference source used for Monitor Output 4

178 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 NR/SR-33000 / SR-33500/ TRX-SR V-Phasing

Figure 94. RP-33500 512 x 512 Rear Panel board

DC and single power supply

systems: set JN1 to “DC.” AC
and Dual power supply sys-
tems: set to “AC.”

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 179

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 95. 3G Input Base and Mezzanine Boards

TRX-HI-3G

Input
Mezzanine,
which is also
used in the HI-
1024

071827608-3g-mez-input

TRX-HI-3G

071827608-3G-baseboard.

180 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 NR/SR-33000 / SR-33500/ TRX-SR V-Phasing

Figure 96. HI-1024 LEDs

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 181

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 97. 3G Output Base and Mezzanine Boards

TRX-HO-3G

Output
Mezzanine

071827608-3gb-output-mezboard

TRX-HO-3G

071827608-3gb-output-baseboard

182 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 NR/SR-33000 / SR-33500/ TRX-SR V-Phasing

Figure 98. 3G Matrix 128 and 128R Boards

128R Board

128 Board

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 183

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 99. 3G Matrix 256 Base and Mezzanine Boards

256 Mezzanine

071827608_DM256-Matrix3G Base
071827608-DM256-Matrix-Base-3G

256 Base

184 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Output Board Configuration

Output Board Configuration

This adjustment applies to systems with more than one sync reference.
Each output board provides a block of 32 outputs and by factory default,
each block is assigned to sync reference 1. If additional references are used,
DIP switch S5 on each output board is used to assign the board to one of
four possible sync lines.

Figure 100. Sync Reference

CLOSED OPEN

SYNC SEL A
SYNC SEL B

AUTO RCLK

Table 36. Sync Reference

Sync line Sync Sel A switch Sync Sel B switch

1 Closed Closed

2 Open Closed

3 Closed Open

4 Open Open

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 185

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Duplication and Expansion

Trinix routing switchers are designed to duplicate/expand inputs and
outputs using passive splitter/combiner expansion panels. Whenever an
expansion panel is connected, signal gain must be increased to compensate
for the added circuitry.
In addition, unused connectors should be terminated for optimum perfor-
mance.

Note For Jupiter-controlled (0-based) systems, the input/output numbers should

be decreased by one (1). For example, block 1-256 should be understood as
block 0-255.

Frame numbers are determined by the input/output blocks served by the

particular frame. For example, a TRX-NXT-256x256 router’s input block 1-
256 and output block 1-256 must be connected to frame zero. For more
information about frame numbering, see Frame Number Settings on page 212.

Output Duplication
Output duplication (dual/quad outputs) requires output splitters and
output gain increase.

Full Frame Output Duplication

In this arrangement, all outputs from a given frame are duplicated and
must therefore be boosted. See Figure 101 for an example. The PE33016 Port
expander is used as an example in the following figures . Use the PE33016
Port expander for HD operations and the PE2x2-3G Port expander for 3G
operations.

Figure 101.

0 -255 16 0 -255
0 - 255 Trinix PE 33016
used as
256x256 splitters Dual outputs

186 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

The necessary gain increase is accomplished by

1. Closing the rear-panel Input Expand DIP switch.
For the location of this switch, see:
• Figure 63 on page 136 [128 x 128]
• Figure 4 on page 43 [256 x 256]
• Figure 8 on page 47 [512 x 512]
• Figure 12 on page 50 [128 x 256]
• Figure 14 on page 51 [256 x 512]
2. Setting the output board jumpers (or DIP switches) to the Expand Enable
position (as shown on Figure 105).

Partial Frame Output Duplication

As previously described in Duplication and Expansion on page 69, the PE-
33016 Port expander can be used to provide dual outputs in blocks of 16
outputs, while the PE-33008 Port expander can be used to provide quad
outputs in blocks of 16 outputs.

Note The PE-33008 Port expander can only be used with HD and SD operations.

For example, Figure 102 shows outputs 1-16 with dual outputs and the
remainder with single outputs.

Figure 102.

1
1 - 16 PE 33016 1 - 16
Frame 0 used as
splitter Dual outputs

1 - 256

Trinix
17 - 256
256 x 256
Single outputs

Note Use the PE33016 Port expander for HD operations and the PE2x2-3G Port
expander for 3G operations.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 187

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

In this example:
• For SO-33110/33011, HO-3G, and HO-33110/33011 output
boards, the gain for outputs 1-16 would be boosted by closing
the rear-panel Input Expand DIP switch and verifying that the
on-board jumper for that set of outputs is in the Expand Enable
position. The gain for outputs 17-256 must be held at unity by
setting the on-board jumpers for that set of outputs to the Force
Normal position; this overrides the rear-panel DIP switch setting
for those outputs.
• For HO-33120/33121 output boards, the gain for outputs 1-16
would be boosted by closing the rear-panel Input Expand DIP
switch and verifying that the on-board DIP switch for those
outputs is closed. The gain for outputs 17-256 must be held at
unity by opening the on-board DIP switches for that set of out-
puts; this will override the rear-panel DIP switch setting for
those outputs.

Input Expansion
Input expansion requires output combiners and output gain increase.

Full Frame Input Expansion

In this arrangement, all outputs are combined and must therefore be
boosted. For example, in the system shown in Figure 103, Output 1 of
Frame 0 would be combined with Output 1 of Frame 1; Output 2 of Frame
0 would be combined with Output 2 of Frame 1, etc.

Figure 103.

Frame 0
1 - 512

Trinix 1 - 512
512 x 512
Inputs expanded
to 1024 32 1 - 512
PE 33016
used as
combiners Dual outputs

Frame 1

513 - 1024 1 - 512

Trinix
512 x 512

188 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

Note Use the PE33016 Port expander for HD operations and the PE2x2-3G Port
expander for 3G operations.

The necessary gain increase is accomplished by one of the following:

1. Closing the rear-panel Input Expand DIP switch.
For the location of this switch, see:
• Figure 63 on page 136 [128 x 128]
• Figure 4 on page 43 [256 x 256]
• Figure 8 on page 47 [512 x 512]
• Figure 14 on page 51 [256x512]
2. Setting the output board jumpers (or DIP switches) to the Expand Enable
position (as shown on Figure 105).

Restricted Input Expansion

In the case of Restricted Input Expansion, one or more output blocks are not
combined and are therefore not boosted. For example, in the system shown
in Figure 104, Outputs 1-16 of Frame 0 are not combined (and therefore are
restricted to inputs 1-512).

Figure 104.

1 - 16
Frame 0
1 - 512

Trinix 17 - 512
512 x 512
Inputs expanded
to 1024 (restricted) 32 17 - 512
port expan-
ders Dual outputs
used as
combiners

Frame 1

513 - 1024 1 - 512

Trinix
512 x 512

Note Use the PE33016 Port expander for HD operations and the PE2x2-3G Port
expander for 3G operations.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 189

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

In this example:
• For SO-33110/33011, HO-3G, and HO-33110/33011 output
boards, the gain for outputs 17-512 would be boosted by closing
the rear-panel Input Expand DIP switches on both frames and
verifying that the on-board jumpers for that set of outputs are
in the Expand Enable position. The location of the boost jumper
on these output boards is shown on Figure 105. The gain for
outputs 1-16 must be held at unity by setting the on-board
jumper for that set of outputs to the Force Normal position; this
overrides the rear-panel DIP switch setting for those outputs.
• For HO-33120/33121 output boards, the gain for outputs 17-512
would be boosted by closing the rear-panel Input Expand DIP
switches on both frames and verifying that the on-board DIP
switches for those outputs are closed. The location of the DIP
switches for these boards is shown on Figure 106. The gain for
outputs 1-16 must be held at unity by opening the on-board DIP
switch for that set of outputs; this will override the rear-panel
DIP switch setting for those outputs.

190 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

Figure 105. Location of gain jumpers on SO-33110/33011, HO-3G, and HO-33110/33011 output
boards.

SO-33011 MEZZANINE (UPPER NUMBERS)

Note labelling error:

Pin 1 "BOOST*" = Expand Enable
"BOOST_REF" = Force Normal

SO-33110 BASE (LOWER NUMBERS)

HO-33011 MEZZANINE (UPPER NUMBERS)

HO-33110 BASE (LOWER NUMBERS)

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 191

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 106. Location of gain switches for HO-33120 Universal Output base board, TRX-HO-3G,
and HO-33121 Universal Output mezzanine board.

DIP switch S5

Table 37. HO-33120 and TRX-HO-3G DIP switch S5 settings. Refer to example on Figure 105.

S5-4
S5-3
HO-33121 Mezzanine
HO-33120 Base board
board
(lower numbered outputs)
(upper numbered outputs)

Expand Enable:
Use rear-panel
“Input Expand” Closed Closed
boost switch setting for these
16 outputs

Force Normal:
Hold gain at unity (do not
boost) these 16 outputs. This Open Open
setting overrides the rear panel
switch.

Output Expansion
Output expansion requires input splitters and input gain adjustment.

192 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

Full Frame Output Expansion

The Full Frame Output expansion configuration, all inputs are split and
must therefore be boosted. For example, in the system shown in Figure 107,
Input 1would be split (duplicated) and sent to both frames, etc.

Figure 107.

0 - 511 Trinix 0 - 511

512 x 512

Outputs
expanded
32
PE 33016
to 1024
0 - 511
used as
splitters

0 - 511 Trinix 512 - 1023

512 x 512

Note Use the PE33016 Port expander for HD operations and the PE2x2-3G Port
expander for 3G operations.

The necessary gain increase is accomplished by

1. Closing the rear-panel Input Expand DIP switch.
For the location of this switch, see:
• Figure 63 on page 136 [128 x 128]
• Figure 4 on page 43 [256 x 256]
• Figure 8 on page 47 [512 x 512]
• Figure 12 on page 50 [128 x 256]
• Figure 14 on page 51 [256 x 512]
2. Setting the output board jumpers (or DIP switches) to the Expand Enable
position (as shown on Figure 105 on page 191).

Restricted Output Expansion

Using Restricted Output expansion one or more input blocks are not passed
through a splitter and are therefore not boosted. For example, in the system

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 193

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

shown in Figure 108, inputs 1-16 are not split (and therefore are restricted
to outputs 1-512).

Figure 108.

1 - 16
Frame 0

1 - 512

17 - 512 Trinix
512 x 512

Outputs
expanded
32
PE 33016
to 1024
17 - 512
used as (restricted)
splitters
Frame 2

17 - 512 513 - 1024

Trinix
512 x 512

Note Use the PE33016 Port expander for HD operations and the PE2x2-3G Port
expander for 3G operations.

In this example:
• For SI-33110, HI-3G, and HI-33110 input boards, the gain for
inputs 17-512 would be boosted by closing the rear-panel Output
Expand DIP switches on both frames and verifying that the on-
board jumpers for that set of inputs are in the Expand Enable
position. The location of the boost jumpers on these input
boards is shown on Figure 105 on page 191. (“Base” refers to the
16 lower-numbered inputs to the main board; “Mez” refers to
the 16 higher-numbered inputs to the mezzanine board.) The
gain for inputs 1-16 must be held at unity by setting the on-
board jumper for that set of inputs to the Force Normal position;
this overrides the rear-panel DIP switch setting for those inputs.

194 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Duplication and Expansion

Figure 109. Location of gain jumpers on SI-33110, and HI-33110.

Note labelling error:

Some "Base" jumpers have
reversed silkscreening. In all
cases, "Expand Enable" requires
a jumper between pins 1 and 2.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 195

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 110. Front-edge switches on VI-33100 base board. HI-33200 has SW543 only (other front-
edge switches are not stuffed)
SW543

8
7
6
5
SLIDE DIP SWITCH SW543 4
3
2
1

PUSHBUTTON SW706

PADDLE SWITCH SW705

SW701

SW702
ROTARY HEX SWITCHES

SW703

DIP SWITCH POSITIONS SHOWN ARE FACTORY DEFAULTS SW704

PIANO DIP SWITCHES LEDs

8 DS731
7 DS730
DS729 Spares
6
5 DS728
SW708 4
DS727 8
3 DS726 4
2 DS725 2 Selected Channel
1 DS724 1

8 DS723 2nd
7 DS722 CS1
6 DS721 CS0 Status
5 DS720 CSM
SW709 4 DS719 0/1
3 DS718 SR
2 Sync Info
DS717 625
1 DS716 525

8 DS715 Input 16 present

7 DS714 Input 15 present
6 DS713 Input 14 present
5 DS712 Input 13 present
SW710 4 DS711 Input 12 present
3 DS710 Input 11 present
2 DS709 Input 10 present
1 DS708 Input 9 present
For Jupiter-controlled router,
subtract "1" from these input
8 DS707 Input 8 present numbers
7 DS706 Input 7 present
6 DS705 Input 6 present
5 DS704 Input 5 present
SW711 4 DS703 Input 4 present
3 DS702 Input 3 present
2 DS701 Input 2 present
1 DS700 Input 1 present

0 1
0 = open = off = up
(up = away from board)

J484 9-Pin D Serial Connector

Table 38. Output expansion gain switches for VI-33100 and HI-33200

SW543-3 SW543-4
Affects Base board (lower Affects Mezzanine board
numbered outputs) (upper numbered outputs)

Expand Enable:
Use rear-panel
“Output Expand” On (Closed) On (Closed)
boost switch setting for these
16 inputs

Force Normal:
Hold gain at unity (do not
boost) these 16 inputs. This Off (Open) Off (Open)
setting overrides the rear panel
switch.

196 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Output Reclocker Bypass Settings

Output Reclocker Bypass Settings

The following discussion applies to units equipped with the HO-33110 HD
or the HO-33120 SD/HD/3G Output Boards.
Front edge dual in-line package (DIP) switches S5-8 and S1 through S4 on
these output boards are used to control reclocking.

Figure 111.
Closed Open
SYNC SEL A
SYNC SEL B

S5

AUTO RCLK

BYPASS 0
BYPASS 1
BYPASS 2
BYPASS 3
BYPASS 4
S1
BYPASS 5
BYPASS 6
BYPASS 7

BYPASS 8
BYPASS 9
BYPASS 10
BYPASS 11
BYPASS 12 S2
BYPASS 13
These functions apply BYPASS 14
to HO-33110/33120 BYPASS 15
output boards only BYPASS 16
BYPASS 17
BYPASS 18
BYPASS 19
BYPASS 20
BYPASS 21
S3
BYPASS 22
BYPASS 23

BYPASS 24
BYPASS 25
BYPASS 26
BYPASS 27
BYPASS 28
S4
BYPASS 29
BYPASS 30
BYPASS 31

Switch settings are shown in Table 39.

Table 39. Reclock settings for HD output boards.

S5-8 Switch on S1
“AUTO RCLK” through S4

Reclock all outputs if possible. Bypass unlocked outputs.

(Default setting) Closed All closed

Bypass all outputs Open All open

Reclock selected outputs if possible, otherwise turn OFF. Closed for selected out-
Open
Bypass all other outputs puts. All others open

“Reclock if possible” means the signal will be checked to see if it is properly

formed and running at a standard data rate supported by this board model.
If so, the signal will be reclocked.
“Bypass” means the signal will not be reclocked.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 197

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

A list of supported data rates for the HO-33110 and HO-33120 Output
Boards is shown in the Data Reclocking specifications on page 115.

Sync Selection Switch S5

See the table on page 185.

198 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Input Equalization Settings

Input Equalization Settings

(TRX-NXT-512x512 and TRX-NXT-256x512 Models Only)
Recent versions of the DM-33512 Digital Matrix boards used in TRX-NXT-
512x512 routers have additional input equalization for improved HD per-
formance; these boards are identified with “Pre-emphasis Added” stickers
on the J421 headers used to connect the two halves of the board. If these
stickers are present, and you are operating with Broadlinx 2.4 software or
newer, DIP switches S401-7 and S401-8 (on both boards) should be set to
On; if the stickers are not present, these switches should be set to Off. The
remaining six switches on S401 are always set to Off.

Figure 112. DM-33501 Digital Matrix board. DM--33502 and DM256-3G is similar

S401

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 199

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Output Monitoring
Output monitoring allows verification of Routing switcher performance
without interrupting normal operations. A separate internal switching
system is used to switch the Monitor Output to any output of the Routing
switcher.
Using a control panel, the operator picks an output as usual—in this case,
the Monitor Output. The operator then selects an input, but this input is
actually one of the Routing switcher outputs.
With the TRX-NXT-128x128 and TRX-NXT-256x256 frames, two pairs of
output monitor ports are provided by the NR-33000 board (one side of each
pair is inverted). Two additional dual ports are optionally available when
a second NR-33000 is added; this provides four monitor ports.

Monitoring Ports
The TRX-NXT-128x128 frame, output monitoring come from NR cards (two
each).
The TRX-NXT-512x512 frame, the SR-33500 Sync/OPM board provides
four monitoring ports.
The TRX-NXT-512x1024 frame, the two TRX- OPM boards provides cas-
cading inputs and four monitoring ports.
The TRX-NXT-256x512 frame, the TRX-SR Sync/OPM boards provides
four monitoring ports.
The TRX-NXT-128x256 frame, the TRX- OPM boards provides four moni-
toring ports.

Symmetrical Frames
For Trinix Symmetrical frame configurations that require multiple frames,
the monitor signals are brought through a Port expander that is used as a
combiner (see page 208).

Asymmetrical Frames
For Asymmetrical configurations that require multiple frames, the monitor
signal is cascaded from the expansion frames to the main frame via the
TRX-SR or TRX-OPM output monitor inputs (see Figure 115 on page 202
for details). The Monitor Inputs are the bottom four connections.
The TRX-SR is used on the 256x512 frame and the TRX-OPM is used on the
128x256 and 512x1024 frames.
Examples of basic monitoring connections are shown below.

200 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Output Monitoring

Figure 113. Example of Output Monitor Connection for the 128 x 128 all-NTSC Routing switcher

SECONDARY PRIMARY

REF IN OUTPUT MONITOR REF IN OUTPUT MONITOR

4 3 4 3 2 1 2 1

COM BUS NICB COM BUS NICA

CONSOLE B CROSSPOINT BUS CONTROL CONSOLE A CROSSPOINT BUS

(Terminate)

QC STATION

JUPITER
CONTROL SYSTEM

SWITCHER CONTROL
PANEL

Figure 114. Example of the Output Monitor Connection for the 256 x 256 all-NTSC switcher.
QC STATION

SECONDARY PRIMARY

NIC B NIC A

3 1

OP OP
MON MON

4 2
COM BUS COM BUS
SWITCHER CONTROL
PANEL

3 1

CONSOLE CONSOLE
B A
REF REF
IN IN

4 2

CONTROL GPIO/TC CROSSPOINT BUS

JUPITER
CONTROL SYSTEM

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 201

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 115. Example of the Output Monitor Connection for the 256 x 512 all-NTSC switcher.

071827609_TRX-SR Output Monitoring Connection

Output Monitor
Connection

Figure 116. Example of the Output Monitor Connection for the 512 x 512 all-NTSC switcher.
QC STATION

PS IFC FAN IFC

A

1 XPT BUS

OP
MON

SWITCHER CONTROL
PANEL A

COM BUS COM BUS

ALARM

2
LEVEL
0 SUPER 0
961121632 1415 1 2
REF 80 48 13 3
64 64 12 4
IN 48 80 11 5
321611296 10 9 7 6
0
ULTRA 8

INPUT EXPAND
3 MONITOR FRAME OUTPUT EXPAND
1024 0 SYNC REDUNDANT
512 1536 1415 1 2 INT XPT CNTL
2048 13 3 60Hz ENABLE
12 4 A
11 5
10 9 7 6 B
8 C

JUPITER
CONTROL SYSTEM

202 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Output Monitoring

Setting the Output Monitor Address

The Monitor rotary switch on the back panel is used to set the control
address for the available monitor outputs. For example, with a 128 x 128
Routing switcher equipped with redundant NR-33000 boards, the quality
control monitor could be connected to output monitor connector 1 and the
monitor switch set to 128; the control system would then select Output 129*
for monitoring purposes. See Table 40.
The 512x1024 Routing switcher does not use the “512” Monitor position.

Figure 117. Output Monitor Address Switches

MONITOR MONITOR
128 256
384 768
256 512

512 1024

TRX-NXT-128x128 Frame TRX-NXT-256x256 and

128x256 Frame

MONITOR
512
1536
1024

2048

TRX-NXT-512x512, 512x 1024,

and 256x512 Frame

Note Some units in the field may have incorrect labels on these switches. The
labels shown in Figure 117 are correct. On all the rotary switches, use the tri-
angular arrowhead for pointing and selection (not the screwdriver slot).

If the router has been output-expanded, then each Monitor switch would
be set to the highest output number for the system. For example, if a TRX-
NXT-256x256 has been output-expanded to 128 x 256, the Monitor switch
would be set to 256 on both frames.
The second BNC connector of each pair provides an inverted output signal.

Note For Jupiter-controlled (0-based) systems, subtract one (1) from these
numbers in the following tables.

*For Jupiter-controlled (0-based) systems, subtract one (1) from these numbers.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 203

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Table 40. TRX-NXT-128x128 Monitor Switch Information

TRX-NXT-128x128

Monitor Output Number

Switch and Address

1 2 3 4

128 129* 130* 131* 132*

256 257* 258* 259* 260*

384 385* 386* 387* 388*

512 513* 514* 515* 516*

2048 2049* 2050* 2051* 2052*

Table 41. TRX-NXT-256x256 Monitor Switch Information

TRX-NXT-256x256

Monitor Output Number

Switch and Address

1 2 3 4

256 257* 258* 259* 260*

512 513* 514* 515* 516*

768 769* 770* 771* 772*

1024 1025* 1026* 1027* 1028*

Table 42. TRX-NXT-512x512Monitor Switch Information

TRX-NXT-512x512

Monitor Output Number

Switch and Address

1 2 3 4

512 513* 514* 515* 516*

1024 1025* 1026* 1027* 1028*

1536 1537* 1538* 1539* 1540*

2048 2049* 2050* 2051* 2052*

204 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Output Monitoring

Asymmetrical Frames Monitor Switch Information

Table 43. TRX-NXT-128x256 Monitor Switch Information

TRX-NXT-128x256

Monitor Output Number

Switch and Address

1 2 3 4

256 257* 258* 259* 260*

512 513* 514* 515* 516*

768 769* 770* 771* 772*

1024 1025* 1026* 1027* 1028*

Table 44. TRX-NXT-256x512 Monitor Switch Information

TRX-NXT256x512

Monitor Output Number

Switch and Address

1 2 3 4

512 513* 514* 515* 516*

1024 1025* 1026* 1027* 1028*

1536 1537* 1538* 1539* 1540*

2048 2049* 2050* 2051* 2052*

Table 45. TRX-NXT-512x1024 Monitor Switch Information

TRX-NXT-512x1024

Monitor Output Number

Switch and Address

1 2 3 4

1024 1025* 1026* 1027* 1028*

1536 1537* 1538* 1539* 1540*

2048 2049* 2050* 2051* 2052*

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 205

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Output Monitor Reclock / Force Bypass Settings

TRX-NXT-128x128 and TRX-NXT-256x256

For these models, “Auto detect on” means the signal will be checked to see
if it is HD or SD. If HD, the signal will be reclocked. If the signal is SD, it
will be bypassed.
NR-33000 Monitor Output switches “Bypass B” S3-7 and “Bypass A” S3-8
select the “auto detect on” or “force bypass” settings for the Monitor out-
puts. “Auto Detect” (“ON”) is the default setting. DIP switch S3.
– If the NR board is in the Primary slot, S3-8 (“A”) applies to Monitor
Output 1; S3-7 (“B”) applies to Monitor Output 2.
– If the NR board is in the Secondary slot, S3-8 (“A”) applies to Monitor
Output 3; S3-7 (“B”) applies to Monitor Output 4.
SR-33000 Monitor Output switches “Bypass B” S2-7 and “Bypass A” S2-8
select the “auto detect on” or “force bypass” settings for the Monitor out-
puts. “Auto Detect” (“CLOSED”) is the default setting. The location of DIP
switch S2 is shown on Figure 110.
– If the SR board is in the Primary slot, S2-8 (“A”) applies to Monitor Out-
put 1; S2-7 (“B”) applies to Monitor Output 2.
– If the SR board is in the Secondary slot, S2-8 (“A”) applies to Monitor
Output 3; S2-7 (“B”) applies to Monitor Output 4.

TRX-NXT-512x512
For this model, “Auto detect on” means the signal (both HD and SD types)
will be reclocked if possible. If the signal is not within reclocking limits, it
will be bypassed.
SR-33500 Monitor Output switches S101 and S102 select the “auto detect
on” or “force bypass” settings for the four Monitor outputs. “Auto detect
on” (switch ON) is the default setting. See Table 46.

Table 46. SR-33500 Reclock/Bypass Settings for Monitor Outputs.

Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Monitor 3 Monitor 4

S101-7 S101-8 S102-7 S102-8

Auto detect ON ON ON ON ON

Force bypass
OFF OFF OFF OFF
(do not reclock)

There is no Output Monitor "Reclock Bypass" option on frames that use the
TRX-OPM card. For example, the 512x1024 frame.

206 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Output Monitoring

Trinix Asymmetric Frames

TRX-SR board

The TRX-SR board does not have individual Reclocker/Bypass switches.

Switch S3- 7 will bypass reclocking signals globally for the four monitor
outputs.
Switch S2- 8 is the Mezz Boost Override switch, which is only used for
Grass Valley testing. This switch should be set to OFF at all times.
All other switches are defined in the tables under TRX-SR V Phase and
Source Information on page 172.

Monitoring with Expanded Systems

TRX-NXT 128x128, 256x256, and 512x512 Frames

In expanded systems, output monitor signals must be brought through a
combiner.
• An example of an output-expanded system is shown in Figure 118.
• An example of an input-expanded system is shown in Figure 119.
In the figures below, the PE33016 Port expander is used only as an example.
Use the PE33016 Port expander for HD operations. The unused connectors
should be terminated for optimum performance.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 207

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 118. Monitoring with Output-expanded System.

Frame 0

1 - 256 1 - 256

Trinix
256 x 256

PE-33016s
1 - 256 used as Output monitor video
splitters

Frame 2

1 - 256 257 - 512

Trinix
256 x 256

PE-33016
used as QC station
combiner
Output monitor video

Frame 0

1 - 256
1 - 256

Trinix
256 x 256

32
PE-33016s
used as 1 - 256
combiners Dual outputs

Frame 1

257-512
257 - 512

Trinix
256 x 256

PE-33016
Output monitor video used as QC station
combiner

208 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Output Monitoring

Figure 119. Monitoring with Input-expanded System

Frame 0

1 - 256 1 - 256

Trinix
256 x 256

PE-33016s
1 - 256 used as Output monitor video
splitters

Frame 2

1 - 256 257 - 512

Trinix
256 x 256

PE-33016
used as QC station
combiner
Output monitor video

Frame 0

1 - 256
1 - 256

Trinix
256 x 256

32
PE-33016s
used as 1 - 256
combiners Dual outputs

Frame 1

257-512
257 - 512

Trinix
256 x 256

PE-33016
Output monitor video used as QC station
combiner

For all expanded systems with Monitoring, the “B” switch on the rear of the
frame must be set to ON (closed). See Figure 63 (128 x 128); Figure 65 (256
x 256); or Figure 67 (512 x 512).
The “Monitor” switch must also be set to identify the total number of
outputs (see page 203).

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 209

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

In systems controlled by SR-33000 boards, Monitor Expansion jumpers JN3

and JN4 on the SR-33000 boards must be set to “Exp.”

Note Output monitoring is not available for input-expanded systems controlled by

an SR-33000 Sync/OPM board.

Trinix Asymmetrical Frames

In expanded systems, output monitors are cascaded from expanded frames
to the main frame via the TRX-SR for the 256x512 and the TRX-OPM for the
128x256, and 512x1024 output monitor inputs. See Figure 115 on page 202
for Monitoring connection locations.
Expansion of two 128x256 Asymmetrical frames to form a 256x256 with
output monitoring. There will be missing ports in the inputs that will need
to be adjusted in the Control system.

Figure 120. Expanded Trinix 128x256 Asymmetrical Frames with Output Monitoring
Legend: MON outs (4) MON outs (4)
(Outputs 257-260)
CAS = Cascade
Trinix
MON = NXT
128x256
Inputs 1-128 Outputs 1-256
Switcher
Monitor
Frame 0
Ins = Inputs
Outs = Outputs CAS ins (4)

4 75 ohm coaxial cables

16 ea.
16x2:2 Outputs 1-256 System Outs
Note: The order of the COMBINERS
frames for the monitor
cascade does not matter.

MON outs (4)

071827611_expansion_2_frame-256^2_woutput-mon
Trinix
NXT
128x256
Inputs 129-257 Outputs 1-256
Switcher

Frame 1

No Connect
CAS ins (4)
Or Test Signal

210 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Output Monitoring

Figure 121. Expanded Trinix 256x512 Asymmetrical Frames with Output Monitoring
Legend: MON outs (4) MON outs (4)
(Outputs 513-516)
CAS = Cascade
Trinix
MON = NXT
256x512
Inputs 1-256 Outputs 1-512
Switcher
Monitor
Frame 0
Ins = Inputs
Outs = Outputs CAS ins (4)

4 75 ohm coaxial cables

32 ea.
16x2:2 Outputs 1-512 System Outs
Note: The order of the COMBINERS
frames for the monitor
cascade does not matter.

MON outs (4)

071827609_expansion_2_frame-512^2_woutput-mon
Trinix
NXT
256x512
Inputs 513-768 Outputs 1-512
Switcher

Frame 1

No Connect
CAS ins (4)
Or Test Signal

Figure 122. Expansion of two 512x1024 Frames with Output Monitoring.

Legend: MON outs (4) MON outs (4)
(Outputs 513-516)
CAS = Cascade
Trinix
MON = NXT
512x1024
Monitor Inputs 1-512
Switcher
Outputs 1-1024

Ins = Inputs Frame 0

Outs = Outputs
CAS ins (4) X 2

4 75 ohm coaxial cables

16 ea.
16x2:2 Outputs 1-1024 System Outs
Note: The order of the COMBINERS
frames for the monitor
cascade does not matter.

MON outs (4)

071827609_expansion_2_frame-512x1024^2_woutput-mon

Trinix
NXT
512x1024
Inputs 513-1024 Outputs 1-1024
Switcher

Frame 1

No Connect
CAS ins (4) X 2
Or Test Signal

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 211

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Frame Number Settings

Setting the Frame for Input or Output Blocks

Figure 123.
FRAME
0
14 15 1 2
13 3
12 4
11 5
10 9 7 6
8

Up to 16 Trinix frames can be configured to operate as a single router. The

FRAME rotary switch on the rear panel is used to indicate the relative posi-
tion of each individual frame to the input-output matrix.
The FRAME bits (4) are decoded to determine which inputs and outputs
correspond to the frames. Refer to the following tables for input and output
relation to the FRAME bits.
Table 47. Frame Numbering

TRX-NXT-128x128 TRX-NXT-128x256* and TRX-NXT-256x256

FRAME NUMBER FRAME NUMBER

INPUTS INPUTS

385-512* 5 7 13 15 769-1024* 5 7 13 15

257-384* 4 6 12 14 513-768* 4 6 12 14

129-256* 1 3 9 11 257-512* 1 3 9 11

1-128* 0 2 8 10 1-256* 0 2 8 10

1- 129- 257- 385- 1- 257- 513-

OUTPUTS OUTPUTS 769-1024*
128* 2556* 384* 512* 256* 512* 768*

*The 128X256 router is a subset of the 256X256 router and it operates as a

partially stuffed 256X256 system.

*For Jupiter-controlled (0-based) systems, subtract one (1) from these input/output numbers.

212 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Frame Number Settings

Table 48. Frame Numbering (cont.)

TRX-NXT-512x512 and 256x512*

FRAME NUMBER

INPUTS

1537-2048* 5 7 13 15

1025-1536* 4 6 12 14

513-1024* 1 3 9 11

1-512* 0 2 8 10

OUTPUTS 1-512* 513-1024* 1025-1536* 1537-2048*

The 256X512 router is a subset of the 512X512router and it operates as a par-

tially stuffed 512X512 system.
Table 49. Frame Numbering (cont.)

TRX-NXT-512x1024

FRAME NUMBER

INPUTS

1537-2048* 5 13

1025-1536* 4 12

513-1024* 1 9

1-512* 0 8

OUTPUTS 1-1024 1025--2048

*For Jupiter-controlled (0-based) systems, subtract one (1) from these input/output numbers.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 213

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Jupiter Control
Figure 124. Control connections to Jupiter Facility Control System (example).

Trinix routing
switcher(s)

Jupiter file T
server

Crosspoint bus
Ethernet switch terminator

10/100BaseT
LAN

Crosspoint bus
Jupiter control panels

MPK bus
CM-4000
System
Controller

The Jupiter Facility Control system can be used to control the Trinix router
using a VM-3000 System Controller. The VM can receive switching com-
mands from a variety of serial sources, including Jupiter control panels or
an automation computer. The new CM-4000 System Controller is also avail-
able as a control interface.
In this application, the Trinix is operated in the external-Crosspoint bus
control mode, during which the Broadlinx board releases control of the
Crosspoint bus. Switch commands arriving at the Crosspoint bus connector
on the rear of the frame will be executed.
Follow these steps to use the Jupiter Facility Control System:
1. Install the CC-2010 Matrix (Crosspoint bus) cable.
Interconnection from a Jupiter VM-3000 or CM-4000 control board is
via Crosspoint bus cable, which can be supplied in 3, 10, 25, or 50-foot
lengths. The Crosspoint bus (“XPT BUS”) connector (15-pin D-con-

214 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Jupiter Control

nector) is looped out in order to connect the bus to the next item under
cross point control.
This bus may require intermediate buffering through a CB-3000 Control
Buffer depending on the size of the Routing switcher . A CB-3000 is
required in the following cases:
TRX-NXT-128x128 - eight or more frames
TRX-NXT-256x256 - four or more frames
TRX-NXT-512x512 - two or more frames
TRX-NXT-128 x 256 - four or more frames
TRX-NXT-256x512 - two or more frames
TRX-NXT-512x1024 - More than one frame.

The CB-3000 is described in detail in the Jupiter Installation and Oper-

ating manual.
In Trinix applications, the Crosspoint bus must be terminated at the
point farthest from the control processor using a Crosspoint Bus Termi-
nator.
The CC-2010 is a 10-conductor (plus ground) cable. Ready-made cables,
with installed 15-pin D male connectors, are available from Grass
Valley.
All rear-panel Crosspoint bus connectors are 15-pin D, female.
For specific wiring instructions concerning CC-2010 Crosspoint Bus
Cables, please refer to the installation diagrams supplied with your
Routing switcher.
For those who wish to prepare their own cables, pin-outs are shown
below in Figure 125. The cable itself should be Belden 9505 or equiva-
lent. Details concerning ferrite cores are given in Figure 126.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 215

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Figure 125. CC-2010 wiring. Reference: Assembly, CC-2010 Matrix Cable,” Grass Valley drawing
no. 01-032707-TAB
Twisted pairs
Shield

Red Red
1 1
Reset 9 9
Black Black
Yellow Yellow
Data 2 2
10 10
Black Black

3 Green Green 3
Clock 11 11
Black Black

4 Blue Blue 4
Take 12 12
Black Black
White White
Confirm 5 5
13 13
Black Black

Shield (drain)
Ground 8 8

Ferrite core Ferrite core

P1 P2
DB15P 50 ft ( 15.2 m) max DB15P
(male) (male)

VDE EMI/RFI modifications to matrix cables

User-supplied matrix cables for VDE installations require a ferrite core over
each end of the cable, adjacent to the connector.

Figure 126. Matrix cable VDE modifications.

Type 43 material sources
Type 43 material Fair-Rite, part no. 2643625102
0.375 inch (9.53 mm) or larger inside diameter Fair-Rite Products Corp., P.O.Box J, Commercial Row,
0.95 inch (24.13 mm) length (or longer) Wallkill, NY 12589, USA; Tel. (914) 895-2055.
Chomerics, part no. 83-10-A637-1000
Chomerics Inc., 77 Dragon Ct., Woburn, MA 01888
USA; Tel. (617) 935-4850.

2. Set the Trinix INT XPT CNTL rear-panel DIP switch to Off (switch
open). See Figure 127.

216 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Jupiter Control

Figure 127. INT XPT CNTL” Rear-Panel DIP Switch

OPEN CLOSED

INPUT EXPAND
OUTPUT EXPAND
SYNC REDUNDANT
INT XPT CNTL
60Hz ENABLE
A
B
C

This will cause the Broadlinx board to release control of the Trinix
internal Crosspoint bus. Switch commands arriving at the Crosspoint
bus connector on the rear of the frame will be executed.
3. Set Level switches:
Two back-panel rotary switches are used to set the level address of the
router.
For Jupiter control “Super” Crosspoint bus settings are used: the left-
hand switch is turned to the appropriate most significant bit on the
“Super” side of the switch. The least significant bit is set on the right
switch. For example, to set the Routing switcher level at “7” (the factory
default for serial digital video) the left switch would be set at “Super 0”
(straight up) and the right switch set to “7.” See Figure 128.

Figure 128.
LEVEL
SUPER
0 0
96 112 16 32 14 15 1 2
80 48 13 3
64 64 12 4
48 80 11 5
32 16 112 96 10 9 7 6
0 8
ULTRA

Note On all the rotary switches, use the triangular arrowhead for pointing (not the
screwdriver slot).

For synchronous switching on all outputs, the same sync signal must be
sent to the Jupiter and to the Trinix.
4. Connect the LAN and Com Bus as required.
In most cases, the Trinix should be connected to the facility LAN to
allow system monitoring via the Broadlinx application. Com Bus con-
nections will be needed for Broadlinx monitoring of TRX-NXT-512x512
and multi-frame units.
5. Refer to the Jupiter VM-3000 System Controller Installation and
Operation Manual or the Jupiter CM-4000 System Controller
Installation and Operation Manual for installation details about the
control system.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 217

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Note Newer-model Trinix units have “1-based” input/output connector numbering;

i.e., there is no connector “0.” However, Jupiter tables are always 0-based.
When controlling such units, references to Physical Input/Output connectors
in Jupiter tables refer to that connector number plus 1. For example, Physical
Input 10 in the Jupiter Switcher Input table would correspond to connector
number 11 on the Trinix rear panel.

218 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 SMS 7000 / Encore Control

SMS 7000 / Encore Control

These control systems use an Ethernet connection to the Broadlinx option
(NR-33000 Sync/NIC/OPM board).
1. Set the Trinix INT XPT CNTL rear-panel DIP switch to On (switch
closed). See Figure 129.

Figure 129.
OPEN CLOSED

INPUT EXPAND
OUTPUT EXPAND
SYNC REDUNDANT
INT XPT CNTL
60Hz ENABLE
A
B
C

In the internal-Crosspoint bus control mode, the Broadlinx board sends

commands to the Crosspoint bus.
2. Set Level switches:
Two back-panel rotary switches are used to set the level address of the
router. The rear-panel rotary Level switch must be set to Ultra-Cros-
spoint bus, Level 1; that is, the Super/Ultra rotary switch must be
pointed straight down to “0” and the adjacent rotary switch must point
at “1.”

Note On all the Trinix rotary switches, use the triangular arrowhead for pointing
(not the screwdriver slot).

Figure 130.
LEVEL
SUPER
0 0
96 112 16 32 14 15 1 2
80 48 13 3
64 64 12 4
48 80 11 5
32 16 112 96 10 9 7 6
0 8
ULTRA

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 219

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

3. On TRX-NXT-512x512 units only, a Crosspoint bus cable must be

installed between the power supply frame and the main frame.
If there is more than one TRX-NXT-512x512 in the system, the Cros-
spoint bus must be daisy-chained between units.
The Crosspoint bus must be terminated at the farthest point from the
controlling Broadlinx board.
This connection is shown on Figure 68.
The Crosspoint bus cable is described on Figure 124.
4. Install LAN components as described beginning on page 221.

5. Refer to the SMS 7000 or Encore documentation for control system

configuration details.

220 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 LAN and Com Bus Connections

LAN and Com Bus Connections

The LAN (NIC) connections use a standard 10/100BaseT twisted pair cable
with RJ-45 connectors (Cat 5E Enhanced is recommended). Shielded cable
is also recommended, maximum length 60 meters.1 Maximum length for a
non-shielded cable is 100 meters.

LAN Monitoring Only (External XPT Control)

In this arrangement, the router is under external Jupiter control and the
only purpose of the connection is LAN monitoring using Broadlinx web
pages or SNMP. See Figure 131.

Figure 131. Connections for LAN monitoring (Jupiter Control)

NIC A
Trinix
connector

NIC B
connector

Ethernet switch

Monitoring PC

Connect another Ethernet cable from the NIC B jack to the network
switch if you plan to use a secondary NR-33000 board.
The connection should be made through a firewall if the Trinix LAN is
connected to the Internet.

1. Compliance with EEC, EMC, EN series, UL- 1950, and CSA C22.2 No. 950-M89 standards requires use of a shielded cable.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 221

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

SMS Control
In this arrangement, the router is under SMS control via a LAN connection.
The PC is used to configure the SMS and is available for Broadlinx or SNMP
monitoring. See Figure 132.

Figure 132. SMS connections to Trinix.

NIC A
Trinix
7000 SMS connector
MCPU frame
Ethernet
connector

NIC B
connector

Ethernet switch

PC

If you plan to use a secondary NR-33000 board connect another

Ethernet cable from the NIC B jack to the network switch.
If the Trinix LAN is connected to the Internet, the connection should be
made through a firewall.

222 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 LAN and Com Bus Connections

Encore Control
In this arrangement, the router is under Encore control via a LAN connec-
tion. The PC is to configure the Encore and is available for Broadlinx or
SNMP monitoring. The recommended connections for the system when
equipped with redundant NR-33000 boards and redundant Encore control-
lers is shown in Figure 133. For more Information about Encore control of
Trinix, see Encore Control on page 371.

Figure 133. Encore connections to Trinix

PC

Ethernet switch

EN1 EN1

Primary Encore controller Secondary Encore controller

EN2 EN2

Ethernet switch Ethernet switch

NIC A NIC B
connector connector

Trinix

Encore control panels

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 223

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Com Bus
In multi-frame systems, a “Com Bus” is used to loop through each frame,
up to a maximum of four. The Com Bus is intended to provide Routing
switcher monitoring of multiple frames using Broadlinx web pages or
SNMP. The Com Bus uses a 10/100BaseT (Cat 5 twisted pair) cable with RJ-
45 connectors. Shielded cable is recommended, maximum length 60
meters.1 Maximum length for a non-shielded cable is 100 meters.

Figure 134. Example of a Com Bus

Trinix frames
with SR-33000
Sync/OPM
Trinix frame or SR-33500
with NR-33000 Sync/OPM
Sync/NIC/ boards
OPM board
(Broadlinx
board)

Com Bus cable

(see discussion
for specifications)

In TRX-NXT-512x512 systems, if the power supply frame is equipped with

an NR-33000 Broadlinx board, install a Cat 5 twisted pair cable between the
power supply frame Com Bus connector associated with the NR board and
one of the main frame Com Bus connectors.
If there are additional TRX-NXT-512x512 frames in the system, and they do
not have Broadlinx boards, the Com Bus should be daisy-chained to those
additional frames as well. For an illustration, see Figure 83

NR-33000 (Broadlinx) Board Configuration

Any use of the NIC (LAN) connector, whether for control or for monitoring,
will require configuration of the NR-33000 board:
• To configure the board using Broadlinx web pages, refer to the
Broadlinx Software section on page 285.
• To configure the board using the Grass Valley NetConfig applica-
tion, refer to the NetConfig Instruction Manual.

1. Compliance with EEC, EMC, EN series, UL- 1950, and CSA C22.2 No. 950-M89 standards requires use of a shielded cable.

224 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 LAN and Com Bus Connections

If SNMP/NetCentral monitoring is to be used, the Trinix SNMP agent

residing on the NR-33000 board must be enabled (that is, licensed). For
more information, see SNMP/NetCentral Monitoring on page 300.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 225

Section 10 — Hardware Installation

Replacing Trinix Boards

When replacing Trinix boards, you should keep in mind that there was a
change in the VIT timing. This change was made to accommodate the addi-
tional processing delay of 10.3us in the new 3G matrix cards.
The VIT signals generated from the NR and SR cards were advanced by
10.3us. All of the legacy matrix/output cards VIT timing will be delayed by
a similar amount.
Grass Valley recommends that you operate with matched versions of
boards to meet RP-168 switch points. However, the system will operate but
with a minor timing offset.
If you mix a Broadlinx 3.x version board in a system that is running Broad-
linx 2.x, when switched, signals will be outside of the SMPTE RP-168 spec-
ification. In other words, the switch will occur as much as 10.3us later (or
early for 3.x NR/SR) for a path that passes through the mismatched version
board.

226 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Section 11
Trinix Asymmetrical Power
Supply Configurations
Introduction
The Trinix Asymmetrical routers use external power supply modules,
which reside in a 1 RU power supply frame. Each of these frames can house
up to four power supply modules. The power supply modules are moni-
tored by means of I2C links.

The number of power supply frames, power supply modules, and I2C links
can vary depending on the model of the asymmetrical router that is used
and the redundancy configuration. This section provides the configuration
guidelines for the interface, connectivity, and monitoring of the power
supply modules.

The External Power Supply Frame

The Lineage Compact Power Line Shelf (see Figure 135) is the current
power supply frame that is used for the Trinix Asymmetrical routers.

Figure 135. Lineage Power Supply Frame

The Lineage power supply frame supports up to four power supply mod-
ules. The power supply frame sets the output voltage of each power supply
module to 48 VDC.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 227

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

Using the I2C Interface to Monitor the Power Supplies

The power supply frames provide a single I2C interface to status and
monitor the four power supply modules. The I2C link-up provides the
ability to monitor up to eight power supply modules. A single I2C link-up
can monitor two power supply frames (Figure 136). The power supply
frames that are connected to a single I2C link must be connected to the same
power distribution bus.

Figure 136. Lineage Power Supply Frame I2C Connectivity

There are specific GV cable assemblies that must be used for this configu-
ration, which is described below.

The Power Supply Module

Each power supply frame supports up to four power supply modules. The
Lineage Compact Power Line module current power supply module used
for the Trinix Asymmetrical routers.

Specifications
Each power supply module:
• Has a wide AC input: 100-240 VAC.
• Provides an output of 44-58 VDC.

The power supply modules are set to 48 VDC output for use in the Trinix
Asymmetrical frame.

The power supply module’s output power depends on the power up AC

voltage level.
• For AC low line, 100-120 VAC, the output power is limited to 1200
Watts.
• For AC high line, 200-240 VAC, the output power is limited to 1800
Watts.

Each power supply module provides an I2C interface for status and moni-
toring as mentioned earlier.

228 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The External Power Supply Frame

Displaying the Status of the Power Supply Module

There are four LEDs on the front panel of the power supply module that
display the status for the AC input, DC input, Temperature, and non-spe-
cific faults. For more information, see Asymmetrical Frames in the Trouble-
shooting section on page 390.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 229

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

Basic Configuration for the Lineage Power Supply Frame

The basic power supply frame’s configuration (Figure 137) consists of the
following:
• A Power Supply frame.
• A 10 ft. (3.05 meters) Trinix Power Supply cable.
• A 10 ft. (3.05 meters) Trinix Power Supply interface cable.

The GV part # for the basic configuration assembly is 751-0326-00.

Figure 137. Lineage Power Supply Frame Basic Configuration

The Power Supply
cable

071827609_Trinix-PS-Rack_rearview
The power
supply’s interface

The Power Supply

frame

Trinix Asymmetrical Frames

The Trinix Asymmetrical frames are designed to interact and communicate
with an external power supply frame. The Asymmetrical frames provide
isolated power input connectors and includes one or more TRX-SC boards
for power supply monitoring. The number of power connectors and TRX-
SC boards will vary depending on the Asymmetrical router size. Each
Asymmetrical router will support multiple redundant power supply con-
figurations.

Each Asymmetrical power supply frame and the possible redundant

power supply configurations are covered in the following sections.

Trinix Status Concentrator Board (TRX-SC)

The TRX-SC board is used for the Trinix Power-Supply Rack frame to com-
municate with the Trinix Asymmetrical routing switcher. Each TRX-SC
board provides two I2C interface connectors that will monitor and provide
the status of the external power supply modules. Each TRX-SC board must

230 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Asymmetrical Frames

be configured, by means of Dual In-line Package (DIP) switches, to match

the power supply configuration of each system.

Figure 138. TRX-SC Board

Configuration DIP Switches

The configuration DIP switches are located on the left side of the back of the
TRX-SC board (Figure 139).

Note The DIP switches will be highlighted in red in the following TRX-SC board
examples in this appendix.

Figure 139. TRX-SC Configuration DIP Switch Location

071827609_TRX-SC-3G-board_Configuration DIP Switch

The DIP switches will control the number of power busses and the number
of external power supply frames to monitor. Refer to Table 50 for the con-
figuration DIP details.

Table 50. TRX-SC Configuration Switch Details

Switches Details

SW 1 = BUS A ENABLE

SW 2 = BUS A EXPANSION ENABLE (Future use)

SW 3 = BUS B ENABLE

SW 4 = BUS B EXPANSION ENABLE (Future use)

SW 5 = N/A

SW 6 = N/A

SW 7 = N/A

SW 8 = N/A

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 231

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

The BUS x ENABLE switches control the number of power busses to mon-
itor. Both power busses will be disabled if the frame is powered directly
from a customer’s power distribution.

The BUS x EXPANSION ENABLE switches control the number of external

power supply frames that are connected to the respective power supply
bus.

The settings for the TRX-SC configuration DIP switches depend on two
things: the Asymmetrical router frame, and the power supply’s redun-
dancy configuration. These settings are documented in the following
pages.

Enabling a DIP Setting

A DIP switch is enabled by moving the switch to the ON position. See
Figure 140 below, in this example the BUS A is enabled.

Note The gray color indicates the position of the switch.

Figure 140. TRX-SC Configuration Example

232 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The 128X256 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

The 128X256 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

The 128X256 Asymmetrical frames are designed to support a maximum
load of 1400 Watts. Each frame provides two isolated power inputs and a
TRX-SC board. These connections are identified below in Figure 141 below.
This connectivity supports up to two external power supply frames and
eight power supply modules.

Figure 141. Trinix 128X256 Frame Rear View

The Isolated
Power inputs

The TRX-SC Board

connections

071827609_128X256 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame_Power-input and TRXSC-board.

128X256 Default Power Supply Configurations

The default power supply configuration includes one Trinix power supply
rack frame with two power supply modules.

The power cable is connected to the DC INPUT A connector of the router

frame. The power supply’s interface cable is connected to the PMBUS A
connector of the router frame.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 233

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

Figure 142. Trinix 128X256 Default PSU Configuration

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

'&,1387$
 9'&
'&,1387%
 9'&
 $036  $036
127)86(' 127)86('
& % $
)$1 ,3(;3$1'
)86(6 30%86$ 30%86% 23(;3$1'
9,75('81'$17
$/$50
,17;37&17/
1,& 67$786 +](1$%/(
&206/$9(
35206 021(;3$1'
&

2873876 ,13876 ,13876 2873876

                       

/(9(/
683(5 
      
   
   
   
       021,1
8/75$  

021,725

)5$0(

3:5
    

  
 

   
 
$/0
&21752/*3,27&
 ,186(

;37%86 

021287

35,0$5< 6(&21'$5<
0$&$''5(66

0$&$''5(66

1,&$ 1,&%

071827609_128X256-Default-PSU-Config
1,&$ 1,&%
 &  &
2 2
1 1
6 $ 6 %
5() 2 5() 2
,1 / ,1 /
( (
&20%86 &20%86
 

The default configuration uses two power supplies.

The corresponding TRX-SC DIP switch setting for the 128X256 default con-
figuration is shown in Figure 143.

Figure 143. TRX-SC DIP Switch Settings for 128X256 Default Configuration

234 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The 128X256 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

The 128X256 Redundant Power Supply Configurations - A and B Option

The A and B configuration options for the redundant power supply
includes the Trinix default power supply configuration and one or two
additional power supply modules (see Figure 144 on page 235 and
Figure 145 on page 236).

The power is connected to the DC INPUT A connector on the router frame.

The power supply’s interface cable is connected to the PMBUS A connector
on the router frame.

Figure 144. Trinix 128X256 Redundant PSU Configurations, Options A

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

'&,1387$
 9'&
'&,1387%
 9'&
 $036  $036
127)86(' 127)86('
& % $
)$1 ,3(;3$1'
)86(6 30%86$ 30%86% 23(;3$1'
9,75('81'$17
$/$50
,17;37&17/
1,& 67$786 +](1$%/(
&206/$9(
35206 021(;3$1'
&

2873876 ,13876 ,13876 2873876

                       
/(9(/
 683(5 
      
   
   
   
 
      021,1
8/75$  

021,725

)5$0(

3:5
    

  
 

   
 
$/0
&21752/*3,27&
 ,186(

;37%86 

021287

35,0$5< 6(&21'$5<
0$&$''5(66

0$&$''5(66

1,&$ 1,&%
071826709_128X256_PSU_config_OPT-A

1,&$ 1,&%
 &  &
2 2
1 1
6 $ 6 %
5() 2 5() 2
,1 / ,1 /
( (
&20%86 &20%86
 

The option A configuration uses one power supply and three power supply
modules.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 235

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

Figure 145. Trinix 128X256 Redundant PSU Configurations, Option B

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

'&,1387$
 9'&
'&,1387%
 9'&
 $036  $036
127)86(' 127)86('
& % $
)$1 ,3(;3$1'
)86(6 30%86$ 30%86% 23(;3$1'
9,75('81'$17
$/$50
,17;37&17/
1,& 67$786 +](1$%/(
&206/$9(
35206 021(;3$1'
&

2873876 ,13876 ,13876 2873876

                       
 683(5
/(9(/ 
      
   
   
   
       021,1
8/75$  

021,725

)5$0(

3:5
    

  
 

   
 
$/0
&21752/*3,27&
 ,186(

;37%86 

021287

35,0$5< 6(&21'$5<
0$&$''5(66

0$&$''5(66

1,&$ 1,&%

071826709_128X256_PSU_config_OPT-B
1,&$ 1,&%
 &  &
2 2
1 1
6 $ 6 %
5() 2 5() 2
,1 / ,1 /
( (
&20%86 &20%86
 

The option B configuration uses four power supply modules.

The corresponding TRX-SC DIP switch setting for the 128X256 redundant
power supply configurations, options A and B, is shown in Figure 146.

Note The configuration switch settings are the same as the default configuration.

Figure 146. TRX-SC DIP Switch settings for 128X256 Options A and B

236 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The 128X256 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

The 128X256 Redundant Power Supply Configuration-Option C

The C configuration option for the redundant power supply includes two
Trinix power supply frames with four power supply modules (see
Figure 147 on page 238).

The first Trinix power supply rack is connected to the DC INPUT A con-
nector on the router frame. The power supply’s interface cable from this
power supply rack is connected to the PMBUS A connector on the router
frame.

The other Trinix power supply rack is connected to the DC INPUT B con-
nector on the router frame. The power supply’s interface cable is connected
to the PMBUS B connector on the router frame.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 237

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

Figure 147. Trinix 128X256 Redundant PSU Configurations, Option C

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

'&,1387$
 9'&
'&,1387%
 9'&
 $036  $036
127)86(' 127)86('
& % $
)$1 ,3(;3$1'
)86(6 30%86$ 30%86% 23(;3$1'
9,75('81'$17
$/$50
,17;37&17/
1,& 67$786 +](1$%/(
&206/$9(
35206 021(;3$1'
&

2873876 ,13876 ,13876 2873876

                       
/(9(/
 683(5 
      
   
   
   
       021,1
8/75$  

021,725

)5$0(

3:5
    

  
 

   
 
$/0
&21752/*3,27&
 ,186(

;37%86 

021287

35,0$5< 6(&21'$5<
0$&$''5(66

0$&$''5(66

1,&$ 1,&%

071826709_128X256_PSU_config_OPT-C
1,&$ 1,&%
 
& &
2 2
1 1
6 $ 6 %
5() 2 5() 2
,1 / ,1 /
( (
&20%86 &20%86
 

The corresponding TRX-SC DIP switch setting for the 128X256 redundant
power supply configuration, option C, is shown in Figure 148.

Figure 148. TRX-SC DIP Switch settings for 128X256 Option C

71827609_TRX-SC DIP Switch settings for 128X256

O N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

238 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The 128X256 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

The 128X256 Redundant Power Supply Configurations - Options D and E

The D and E configuration options for the redundant power supply
includes two Trinix power supply frames and either six or eight power
supply modules (see Figure 149 on page 240 and Figure 150 on page 241).

The first Trinix power supply rack is connected to the DC INPUT A con-
nector of the router frame. The power supply’s interface cable is connected
to the PMBUS A connector of the router frame.

The second Trinix power supply rack is connected to the DC INPUT B con-
nector of the router frame. The power supply’s interface cable from this
Trinix power supply rack is connected to the PMBUS B connector of the
router frame.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 239

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

Figure 149. Trinix 128X256 Redundant PSU Configurations, Option D

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

'&,1387$
 9'&
'&,1387%
 9'&
 $036  $036
127)86(' 127)86('
& % $
)$1 ,3(;3$1'
)86(6 30%86$ 30%86% 23(;3$1'
9,75('81'$17
$/$50
,17;37&17/
1,& 67$786 +](1$%/(
&206/$9(
35206 021(;3$1'
&

2873876 ,13876 ,13876 2873876

                       

/(9(/
683(5 
      
   
   
   
       021,1
8/75$  

021,725

)5$0(

3:5
    

  
 

   
 
$/0

&21752/*3,27&
 ,186(

;37%86 

021287

35,0$5< 6(&21'$5<
0$&$''5(66

0$&$''5(66

1,&$ 1,&%

071826709_128X256_PSU_config_OPT-D
1,&$ 1,&%
  &
&
2 2
1 1
6 $ 6 %
5() 2 5() 2
,1 / ,1 /
( (
&20%86 &20%86
 

Option D provides two power supplies, each with three power supply
modules.

240 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The 128X256 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

Figure 150. Trinix 128X256 Redundant PSU Configurations, Option E

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

'&,1387$
 9'&
'&,1387%
 9'&
 $036  $036
127)86(' 127)86('
& % $
)$1 ,3(;3$1'
)86(6 30%86$ 30%86% 23(;3$1'
9,75('81'$17
$/$50
,17;37&17/
1,& 67$786 +](1$%/(
&206/$9(
35206 021(;3$1'
&

2873876 ,13876 ,13876 2873876

                       

/(9(/
683(5 
      
   
   
   
       021,1
8/75$  

021,725

)5$0(

3:5
    

  
 

   
 
$/0
&21752/*3,27&
 ,186(

;37%86 

021287

35,0$5< 6(&21'$5<
0$&$''5(66

0$&$''5(66

1,&$ 1,&%

071826709_128X256_PSU_config_OPT-E
1,&$ 1,&%
 &  &
2 2
1 1
6 $ 6 %
5() 2 5() 2
,1 / ,1 /
( (
&20%86 &20%86
 

Option E provides two power supplies, four modules per supply.

The corresponding TRX-SC DIP switch setting for the 128X256 redundant
power supply configurations, options D and E, is shown in Figure 151 on
page 242.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 241

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

Figure 151. TRX-SC DIP Switch settings for 128X256 Option D and E

1827609_TRX-SC DIP Switch settings for 128X256 O

O N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

242 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The 256X512 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

The 256X512 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

The 256X512 Asymmetrical frames are designed to support a maximum
load of 2100 Watts. Each frame provides two isolated power inputs and a
TRX-SC board. These connections are identified below in Figure 152 on
page 243 below. This connectivity supports up to two external power
supply frames and eight power supply modules.

Figure 152. Trinix 256X512 Frame Rear View

The TRX-SC Board

connections

The Isolated
Power inputs
071827609_Trinix-256X512_rear-connections

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 243

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

256X512 Default Power Supply Configurations

The default configuration for the 256x512’s power supply includes one
Trinix power supply frame and two power supply modules.

The power is connected to the DC INPUT A connector of the router frame.

The power supply’s interface cable is connected to the PMBUS A connector
on the router frame.

Figure 153. 256X512 Default Power Supply Configuration

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

)$1*

)$1'

)$1&
)$1(

)$1%

)$1$
)$1)

30%86$ 30%86%
67$786

                       
2873876 ,13876 ,13876 2873876

'&,1387$
 9'&
'&,1387%
 9'&
 $036  $036
127)86(' 127)86('

2873876 2873876
               
)$1)86(6
* ) ( ' & % $

1,&35206

/(9(/
 683(5 
&526632,17%86
      







 &21752/ *3,27&
   
,3(;3$1'
23(;3$1'       
9,75('81'$17 8/75$  
,17;37&17/
+](1$%/(
&206/$9( 021,725

)5$0(

021(;3$1'      
&   
 
 
   


35,0$5< 6(&21'$5<
0$&$''5(66 0$&$''5(66

021287

071826709_256X512_PSU_config_Default

 


5() 1,&$ 5() 1,&%

 ,1 ,1

  

 1,&$ 1,&%


&2162/( &2162/(
$ %

&20%86 &20%86


021,1

244 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The 256X512 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

The corresponding TRX-SC DIP switch setting is shown in Figure 154 on

page 245.

Figure 154. TRX-SC DIP Switch Settings for 256X512 Default Configuration

256X512 Redundant Power Supply Configurations Options A and B

The A and B configuration options for the redundant power supply
includes the Trinix default power supply configuration and one or two
additional power supply modules (see Figure 155 on page 246 and
Figure 156 on page 247).

The power is connected to the DC INPUT A connector of the router frame.

The power supply’s interface cable is connected to the PMBUS A connector
of the router frame.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 245

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

Figure 155. Trinix 256X512 Redundant PSU Configurations, Options A

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

)$1*

)$1'

)$1&
)$1(

)$1%

)$1$
)$1)
30%86$ 30%86%
67$786

                       
2873876 ,13876 ,13876 2873876

'&,1387$
 9'&
'&,1387%
 9'&
 $036  $036
127)86(' 127)86('

2873876 2873876
               
)$1)86(6
* ) ( ' & % $

1,&35206

/(9(/ &526632,17%86
 683(5 
      







 &21752/ *3,27&
   
,3(;3$1'
23(;3$1'       
9,75('81'$17 8/75$  
,17;37&17/
+](1$%/(
&206/$9( 021,725

)5$0(

021(;3$1'      
&   
 
 
   


35,0$5< 6(&21'$5<
0$&$''5(66 0$&$''5(66

021287

071827609_256X512-PSU-Config-OptA

 


 5() 1,&$ 5() 1,&%

,1 ,1

  

 1,&$ 1,&%


&2162/( &2162/(
$ %

&20%86 &20%86


021,1

Option A uses three power supply modules.

246 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The 256X512 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

Figure 156. Trinix 256X512 Redundant PSU Configurations, Options B

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

)$1*

)$1'

)$1&
)$1(

)$1%

)$1$
)$1)
30%86$ 30%86%
67$786

                       
2873876 ,13876 ,13876 2873876

'&,1387$
 9'&
'&,1387%
 9'&
 $036  $036
127)86(' 127)86('

2873876 2873876
               
)$1)86(6
* ) ( ' & % $

1,&35206

/(9(/ &526632,17%86
 683(5 
      







 &21752/ *3,27&
   
,3(;3$1'
23(;3$1'       
9,75('81'$17 8/75$  
,17;37&17/
+](1$%/(
&206/$9( 021,725

)5$0(

021(;3$1'      
&   
 
 
   


35,0$5< 6(&21'$5<
0$&$''5(66 0$&$''5(66

021287


  071827609_256X512-PSU-Config-OptB


 5() 1,&$ 5() 1,&%

,1 ,1

  

 1,&$ 1,&%


&2162/( &2162/(
$ %

&20%86 &20%86


021,1

Option B uses eight power supply modules.

The TRX-SC DIP switch setting for both option A and B, for the 256X512
power supply configurations, is shown in Figure 157.

Note The configuration switch settings for the 256X512 Options A and B are the
same as the default 256X512 configuration.

Figure 157. TRX-SC DIP Switch Settings for 256X512 Options A and B

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 247

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

The 256X512 Redundant Power Supply Configuration - Option C

The C configuration option for the redundant power supply includes two
Trinix power supply frames and four power supply modules.

One of the Trinix power supply racks is connected to the DC INPUT A con-
nector of the router frame. The power supply’s interface cable from this
Trinix power supply rack is connected to the PMBUS A connector of the
router frame.

The other Trinix power supply rack is connected to the DC INPUT B con-
nector of the router frame. The power supply’s interface cable from this
Trinix power supply rack is connected to the PMBUS B connector of the
router frame.

Figure 158. Trinix 256X512 Redundant PSU Configurations, Options C

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

)$1*

)$1'

)$1&
)$1(

)$1%

)$1$
)$1)

30%86$ 30%86%
67$786

                       
2873876 ,13876 ,13876 2873876

'&,1387$
 9'&
'&,1387%
 9'&
 $036  $036
127)86(' 127)86('

2873876 2873876
               
)$1)86(6
* ) ( ' & % $

1,&35206

/(9(/
 683(5
&526632,17%86

      







 &21752/ *3,27&
,3(;3$1'    
23(;3$1'       
9,75('81'$17 8/75$  
,17;37&17/
+](1$%/(
&206/$9( 021,725

)5$0(

021(;3$1'      
&   
 
 
   


35,0$5< 6(&21'$5<
0$&$''5(66 0$&$''5(66
071827609_256X512-PSU-Config-OptC

021287


 


 5() 1,&$ 5() 1,&%

,1 ,1

  

 1,&$ 1,&%


&2162/( &2162/(
$ %

&20%86 &20%86


021,1

248 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The 256X512 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

The corresponding TRX-SC DIP switch setting for the 256X512 redundant
power supply configurations, option C, is shown in Figure 159 on page 249.

Figure 159. TRX-SC DIP Switch Settings for 256X512 Option C

071827609_TRX-SC DIP Switch settings for 128X256 Op

O N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The 256X512 Redundant Power Supply Configurations - Options D and E

The D and E configuration options for the redundant power supply
includes two Trinix power supply frames and six or eight power supply
modules.

One of the Trinix power supply racks is connected to the DC INPUT A con-
nector of the router frame. The power supply’s interface cable from this
Trinix power supply rack is connected to the PMBUS A connector of the
router frame.

The other Trinix power supply rack is connected to the DC INPUT B con-
nector of the router frame. The power supply’s interface cable from this
Trinix power supply rack is connected to the PMBUS B connector of the
router frame.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 249

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

Figure 160. Trinix 256X512 Redundant PSU Configurations, Option D

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

)$1*

)$1'

)$1&
)$1(

)$1%

)$1$
)$1)
30%86$ 30%86%
67$786

                       
2873876 ,13876 ,13876 2873876

'&,1387$
 9'&
'&,1387%
 9'&
 $036  $036
127)86(' 127)86('

2873876 2873876
               
)$1)86(6
* ) ( ' & % $

1,&35206

/(9(/ &526632,17%86
 683(5 
      







 &21752/ *3,27&
,3(;3$1'    
23(;3$1'       
9,75('81'$17 8/75$  
,17;37&17/
+](1$%/( 021,725)5$0(
&206/$9( 
021(;3$1' 
     
&   
 
 
   


35,0$5< 6(&21'$5<
0$&$''5(66 0$&$''5(66

021287
071827609_256X512-PSU-Config-OptD

 


 5() 1,&$ 5() 1,&%

,1 ,1

  

 1,&$ 1,&%


&2162/( &2162/(
$ %

&20%86 &20%86


021,1

Option D uses two power supplies with three power supply modules each.

250 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The 256X512 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

Figure 161. Trinix 256X512 Redundant PSU Configurations, Option E

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

POS 4 POS 3 POS 2 POS 1

)$1*

)$1'

)$1&
)$1(

)$1%

)$1$
)$1)
30%86$ 30%86%
67$786

                       
2873876 ,13876 ,13876 2873876

'&,1387$
 9'&
'&,1387%
 9'&
 $036  $036
127)86(' 127)86('

2873876 2873876
               
)$1)86(6
* ) ( ' & % $

1,&35206

/(9(/
 683(5 
&526632,17%86
      







 &21752/ *3,27&
,3(;3$1'    
23(;3$1'       
9,75('81'$17 8/75$  
,17;37&17/
+](1$%/( 021,725)5$0(
&206/$9( 
021(;3$1' 
     
&   
 
 
   


35,0$5< 6(&21'$5<
071827609_256X512_PSU_config_opt_E

0$&$''5(66 0$&$''5(66

021287


 


 5() 1,&$ 5() 1,&%

,1 ,1

  

 1,&$ 1,&%


&2162/( &2162/(
$ %

&20%86 &20%86


021,1

Option E uses two power supplies with four power supply modules each.

The corresponding TRX-SC DIP switch setting for both options D and E, for
the 256X512 redundant power supply configurations, is shown in
Figure 162.

Figure 162. TRX-SC DIP Switch Settings for 256X512 Option D and E
071827609_TRX-SC DIP Switch settings for 128X256 Op

O N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 251

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

The 512X1024 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

The 512X1024 Asymmetrical frame is designed to support a maximum load
of 5400 Watts. The frame provides four isolated power inputs and two TRX-
SC boards. This connectivity supports up to four external power supply
frames and sixteen power supply modules (Figure 163).
Grass Valley recommends that the power supplies are installed to the side
of the 512X1024 Asymmetrical frame.There must be a 2RU space above and
below the fans for the routing switcher. If your needs require installing the
power supply above and /or below the frame, make sure there is a 2RU
space between the frame and the Power supply.

Note Do NOT place anything on top or on the bottom of the 512x1024 routing
switcher; doing so will block the airflow and may cause the routing switcher
to overheat.

252 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The 512X1024 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

Figure 163. Trinix 512X1024 Frame Rear View

The Isolated
Power inputs

The TRX-SC Board

connections

The TRX-SC Board

connections

The Isolated
Power inputs
071827612_512x1024_default

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 253

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

512X1024 Default Power Supply Configuration

The default power supply configuration includes two Trinix power supply
frames and eight power supply modules. One of the Trinix power supply
racks is connected to the DC INPUT A connector of the router frame. The
power supply’s interface cable from this Trinix power supply rack is con-
nected to the PMBUS A connector of the router frame. The other Trinix
power supply rack is connected to the DC INPUT B connector of the router
frame. The power supply’s interface cable from this Trinix power supply
rack is connected to the PMBUS B connector of the router frame
(Figure 164).
The following images are used as examples of how to connect the cables.
Do NOT place anything on top or on the bottom of the 512x1024 routing
switcher; doing so will block the airflow and may cause the routing
switcher to overheat.

254 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The 512X1024 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

Figure 164. Trinix 512X1024 Default PSU Configuration

3 RU space:

2RU RU Empty Space

1 RU Fan

071827612_Trinix 512X1024 Default PSU Configuration

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 255

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

Note Do NOT place anything on top or on the bottom of the 512x1024 routing
switcher; doing so will block the airflow and may cause the routing switcher
to overheat.

For the 512X1024 default power supply configuration the two TRX-SC
boards in the frame are configured with the corresponding DIP switch
setting as shown in Figure 165.

Figure 165. TRX-SC DIP Switch Settings for 512X1024 Default Configuration

256 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 The 512X1024 Trinix Asymmetrical Frame

512X1024 Redundant Power Supply Configurations, Option A

The redundant power supply configuration, option A, include the default
power supply configuration and two additional Trinix power supply
frames with eight additional power supply modules. The additional power
supply racks are connected to the DC INPUT B connectors of the router
frame. The additional power supply’s interface cables are connected to the
PMBUS B connectors of the router frame (Figure 166).

Figure 166. Trinix 512X1024 Redundant PSU Configuration, Options A

3 RU space

2RU RU Empty Space

1 RU Fan

071827612_Trinix 512X1024 Redundant PSU configuration, Options A

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 257

Section 11 — Trinix Asymmetrical Power Supply Configurations

Note Do NOT place anything on top or on the bottom of the 512x1024 routing
switcher; doing so will block the airflow and may cause the routing switcher
to overheat.

For the 512X1024 redundant power supply configuration, option A, the

two TRX-SC boards in the frame are configured with the corresponding
DIP switch setting as shown in Figure 167.

Figure 167. TRX-SC DIP Switch Settings for 512X1024 Option A

258 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Section 12
Broadlinx Installation
This document provides the software installation instructions for the
Broadlinx software.

Interoperability Requirements
• Any Encore system that is newer than the 1.7.3 version.
• Any Jupiter system.
• The 2.0.13 version of NetConfig or newer.

Note Do not use Broadlinx with either the Dynex DX-ESW8, 10/100M Fast Ethernet
Switch or the Zonet Model ZFS3124.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 259

Section 12 — Broadlinx Installation

Software Installation
CAUTION Installation of this upgrade will interrupt video signals passing through the
system. The length of this interruption will vary depending on system size
and specific procedures used. Users of this equipment should consult with
Grass Valley Technical Support personnel before proceeding.

Introduction
The Broadlinx firmware is installed and updated using Compact Flash
cards. If the programmed Compact Flash card is not available, you must
obtain the necessary files and then copy them to a blank Compact Flash
card. Ensure that the Compact Flash card is formatted to FAT16 rather than
FAT32 (this format will decrease the time it takes for Broadlinx to “boot” or
start up). The CF card must have a minimum of 128 MB of available
memory.

Overview
This section describes the Installation process. These steps are:
• Updating Compact Flash cards
• Updating systems with a single Broadlinx board
• Updating systems with two Broadlinx boards

The difference between the update process for frames with one or two
Broadlinx boards is that you must update the Active Broadlinx board and
then telnet into the Inactive bard to start the update process. With the single
board, you will only need to telnet into one board.

260 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Software Installation

Caveats
Before starting the Installation process, please read the following:
• All frames with TRX-DM256-3G matrix cards MUST be updated to the
3.3.0 (or later) release of Broadlinx. For example, the 256x512, 512x512,
and the 512x1024.
• Web tools such as NetConfig cannot be used to install versions prior to
the 3.2.0 version of Broadlinx.
• Protected paths are not monitored during firmware updates. If the
primary path fails during a firmware update, no fail-over switch will
occur.
• Certain TRX-NXT-512x512 systems will require Dual In-line Package
(DIP) switch changes to operate properly with the 2.4 release (or newer)
software. The S401-7 and S401-8 DIP switches on the DM-33501 and
DM-33502 1.5G matrix boards should be set to ON. If the stickers are not
present, these switches should be set to Off. The remaining six switches
on S401 are always set to Off.
• For multiple Trinix 128 or 256 frame systems only, the DIP switch “A”
setting on the frame with the Broadlinx board that is driving the Com
Bus should be set to Open. This setting should be set to Closed on all
other frames in the system. This step is required when using Protected
Paths. For single frame operation the “A” switch must be set to the
Open position.
• Certain steps of the following procedure will momentarily interrupt
switcher operations. These steps are preceded by a Caution statement.
For more information, contact Grass Valley’s Technical support; see page 4.

Updating Compact Flash Cards

Compact Flash (CF) Memory cards are used to update Broadlinx. These
cards are read from the NR-33000 (Broadlinx) board. You must use at least
a 128MB CF memory card.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 261

Section 12 — Broadlinx Installation

Copying the Broadlinx Software to the CF Using a CF Reader

This process assumes that a Compact Flash (CF) card reader has been con-
nected to the workstation. If not, see the Installation instructions that came
with the CF card reader.

Note Grass Valley recommends that you format your CF card to the FAT16 format.
For more information, see Formatting the Compact Flash Card with the FAT16
Format on page 279.

Follow these steps to update a CF with the latest version of Broadlinx:

1. Place the Broadlinx CD in the computer’s CD drive.

2. Open Windows Explorer using one of the following suggested options:

• Press the Windows logo and E key combination.
• Right click the Start button and then select the “Explore all users”
option.
• Click the Start button, then All Programs, point to Accessories, and
then select Windows Explorer.

3. Navigate to the CD, select and then copy all of the Broadlinx files.

4. Navigate to the Compact Flash memory and then paste the files.

Note If you use a CF card on which a previous version of Broadlinx has been saved,
you will need to overwrite the existing files. It is important that you do NOT
overwrite the ipconfig.txt file on the Compact flash.

The compact flash is now ready to update your system.

Updating New Broadlinx Boards

All Broadlinx boards (NR33000) have the Broadlinx 3.3.0 firmware pre-
loaded. If your Trinix router is currently running a previous version of
Broadlinx, please contact Grass Valley's Technical Support department (+1
800 547 8949 or +1 530 478 4148).

The Broadlinx software that is currently running on your Trinix Routing

switcher must be updated to Broadlinx 3.0.1 (or newer) if you add ANY of
the following Trinix 3G boards:
• TRX-HI-3G
• TRX-HO-3G
• TRX-DM128-3G
• TRX-DM128R-3G
• TRX-DM256-3G

262 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Software Installation

You MUST do the following options when you are adding a new HD board
to a Trinix router that is running Broadlinx 2.4.2 or older:

Note This option will insure that switches occur at the correct timing position.

• Update the Trinix router to Broadlinx 3.0.1 or newer.

CAUTION Grass Valley strongly recommends that customers keep all software updated
to the latest released version. New boards are NOT guaranteed to be compat-
ible with older versions of software. A system failure may occur if a new
board is received as a replacement part and then loaded with an older version
of software.

Before Proceeding with the Installation process, see Broadlinx Version and
Supported Trinix Boards on page 337 in this manual. The information in this
section is intended to help you understand what would be required to
update from your current version to the latest version of software.

CAUTION Installation of this upgrade will interrupt video signals passing through the
system. The length of this interruption will vary depending on system size
and specific procedures used. Users of this equipment should consult with
Grass Valley Technical Support personnel before proceeding.

Updating Systems with a Single Broadlinx Board

This section describes the steps for updating existing Broadlinx boards. The
update process can be accomplished using the Broadlinx Web page to nav-
igate to the Firmware Management screen to activate the FPGAs for the
boards. These steps are described below.

Note Using Telnet or a Console session during an firmware update can cause the
update to fail.

Follow these steps to update all the boards within the frame except the NR-
33000 board:

1. Remove the Broadlinx board from the chassis and remove the existing
compact Flash card by pressing the Eject button (Figure 169 on
page 264).

Note For the Asymmetric frames, the NR-33000 (Broadlinx) board is turned side-
ways, so the Eject button is at the bottom.

For Encore controlled systems, the memory must be cleared by discon-

necting the battery terminal, leave it un-connected for couple of min-
utes, and then reconnect the battery (Figure 168 on page 264).

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 263

Section 12 — Broadlinx Installation

Figure 168. Battery location on the NR-33000.

Battery terminal location

071828316-BATTERY CONNECTION
2. Insert the Compact Flash card into the slot on the Broadlinx board and
then insert the Broadlinx board into the frame. Broadlinx will then
inventory the boards that are in the frame.

Figure 169. NR-33000 (Broadlinx board) Controls.

NR board
left ejector lever
Flash module

Reset button

Activate button
Flash module and "Active" LED
ejector button

Using the Web Page

Navigate to the Broadlinx Firmware Management Web page to update the
firmware.

Note Do not press the Browser's Refresh button (or press F5 on your keyboard)
during the installation. A redrawing issue may occur with the 512x1024
routing switcher's Web page. If you do press the Refresh button, you must
reset the bottom half of the 512x1024 frame.

264 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Software Installation

The Broadlinx Firmware Management page displays the following:

• The possible types of PC boards
• The version of the Broadlinx software that is presently associated
with each type of board that is installed
• The versions of top-level software packages that are present in the
Broadlinx board
• The compatibility Status of these software elements.
An example of this table is shown in the figure below (Figure 170).
When accessing this web page there may be a slight delay as the page is
gathering the latest information.

Figure 170. The Firmware Management Screen

Older firmware

The installed version of

Broadlinx

Some of the Status lights, in the Status column, will be red following an
installation using a Compact Flash card (Figure 170). This indicates that the
software that is currently running in the module is different (or older) than
the software that was just installed. The new software should be activated
by following the instructions provided below.

Activating Software
1. Click the Activate button at the bottom of the page (Figure 170). The
Message from webpage dialog will then appear:

Figure 171. The Estimated Time Dialog

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 265

Section 12 — Broadlinx Installation

Write down the time displayed for reference.

2. Click the OK button. The Broadlinx: Updating firmware status window
will then appear:

Figure 172. The Broadlinx: Updating Firmware Status Window

The new software will then be copied from the NR-33000 (Broadlinx
board) to each board that requires an update. This process can take
several hours.
• When updating systems with two NR boards, the NR performing
the update will not install the software onto itself.
The progress of the installation will be shown by the progress bars on
the Broadlinx: Updating Firmware Status Window and by the alarm
LEDs on the boards that are being updated.

Note When performing a firmware update, the Overall update progress bar indi-
cator will reach and stay at 99% until the update is finished. The update pro-
cedure has not locked up. The Web page will correctly show that the update
is finished when all boards are updated. If the proces is taking 20% longer
than the intitial time shown in Figure 171 on page 265, see The installation
process seems to have stopped on page 283.

If the window is accidentally closed, you can return to it by navigating

to the home page of the Broadlinx card. The rest of the Broadlinx pages
are not available while the update is in progress.
When the progress bars reach 100%, a “finished firmware update”
message will appear.
3. Click the Click here to close this window button (Figure 173 on page 267).

266 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Software Installation

Figure 173. The Broadlinx: Updating Firmware Status Window - Update Completed

Click this button

The Broadlinx web page will then indicate “Post Completed.”

4. Navigate to the Firmware Management page. The Restart button will
now appear near the bottom of the page. (The display may vary from
the example that is shown in Figure 174.)

Figure 174. The Restart Button on the Firmware Management Screen

The cards must be restarted to use the new firmware.

5. Click the Restart button, which is shown above in Figure 174.
The following Caution pop-up window will then appear:

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 267

Section 12 — Broadlinx Installation

Figure 175. The Restart Caution Popup

CAUTION Clicking the OK button will cause a momentary interruption to video passing
through the Routing switcher. Clicking the Cancel button, while not advised,
will stop the restart process allowing you to restart the board during a sched-
uled service time. However, the new software will not be applied until the
boards are restarted.

6. Click the OK button.

The Post Complete window will then reappear.

7. Navigate to the Firmware Management page. All Status indicators

should be green but the NR -33000 board.

Figure 176. The Firmware Management Screen All boards are up to date

268 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Software Installation

Updating Systems with Two Broadlinx Boards

This section describes the steps for updating existing Broadlinx boards. The
Installation process uses the Broadlinx Firmware Management Web page.
These steps are described below.
Follow these steps to update all the boards within the frame (except an
active NR-33000 board):

1. Remove the Broadlinx boards from the chassis and remove the existing
compact Flash card by pressing the Eject button (Figure 178 on
page 270).

Note For the Asymmetric frames, the NR-33000 (Broadlinx) board is turned side-
ways, so the Eject button is at the bottom.

For Encore controlled systems, the memory must be cleared by discon-

necting the battery terminal, leave it un-connected for couple of min-
utes, and then reconnect the battery (Figure 177).

Figure 177. Battery location on the NR-33000.

Battery terminal location

071828316-BATTERY CONNECTION
2. Insert the Compact Flash card into the slot on the Broadlinx board and
then insert the Broadlinx boards into the frame. Broadlinx will then
inventory the boards that are in the frame.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 269

Section 12 — Broadlinx Installation

Figure 178. NR-33000 (Broadlinx board) Controls.

NR board
left ejector lever
Flash module

Reset button

Activate button
Flash module and "Active" LED
ejector button

Using the Web Page

Navigate to the Broadlinx Web page to complete updating the firmware.

Note Using Telnet or a Console session during an firmware update can cause the
update to fail.

The Broadlinx Firmware Management page displays the following:

• The possible types of PC boards
• The version of the Broadlinx software that is presently associated
with each type of board that is installed
• The versions of top-level software packages that are present in the
Broadlinx board
• The compatibility Status of these software elements.
An example of this table is shown in the figure below (Figure 179 on
page 271).
When accessing this web page there may be a slight delay as the page is
gathering the latest information.

270 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Software Installation

Figure 179. The Firmware Management Screen

Older firmware

The installed version of

Broadlinx

Some of the Status lights, in the Status column, will be red following an
installation using a Compact Flash card (Figure 179). This indicates that the
software that is currently running in the module is different (or older) than
the software that was just installed. The new software should be activated
by following the instructions provided below.

Activating Software
1. Click the Activate button at the bottom of the page (Figure 179). The
Message from webpage dialog will then appear:

Figure 180. The Estimated Time Dialog

2. Click the OK button. The Broadlinx: Updating firmware status window

will then appear:

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 271

Section 12 — Broadlinx Installation

Figure 181. The Broadlinx: Updating Firmware Status Window

The new software will then be copied from the NR-33000 (Broadlinx
board) to each board that requires an update. This process can take up
to several hours.
• When updating systems with two NR boards, the NR performing
the update will not install the software onto itself.
The progress of the installation will be shown by the progress bars on
the Broadlinx: Updating Firmware Status Window and by the alarm
LEDs on the boards that are being updated.

Note When performing a firmware update, the Overall update progress bar indi-
cator will reach and stay at 99% until the update is finished. The update pro-
cedure has not locked up. The Web page will correctly show that the update
is finished when all boards are updated. If the proces is taking 20% longer
than the intitial time shown in Figure 180 on page 271, see The installation
process seems to have stopped on page 283.

If the window is accidentally closed, you can return to it by navigating

to the home page of the Broadlinx card. The rest of the Broadlinx pages
are not available while the update is in progress.
When the progress bars reach 100%, a “finished firmware update”
message will appear.
3. Click the Click here to close this window button (Figure 173 on page 267).

272 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Software Installation

Figure 182. The Broadlinx: Updating Firmware Status Window - Update Completed

Click this button

The Broadlinx web page will then indicate “Post Completed.”

4. Navigate to the Firmware Management page. The Restart button will
now appear near the bottom of the page.

Figure 183. The Restart Button on the Firmware Management Screen

The cards must be restarted to use the new firmware.

5. Click the Restart button, which is shown above in Figure 183.
The following Caution pop-up window will then appear:

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 273

Section 12 — Broadlinx Installation

Figure 184. The Restart Caution Popup

CAUTION Clicking the OK button will cause a momentary interruption to video passing
through the Routing switcher. Clicking the Cancel button, while not advised,
will stop the restart process allowing you to restart the board during a sched-
uled service time. However, the new software will not be applied until the
boards are restarted.

6. Click the OK button.

The Post Complete window will then reappear.

Updating the Second Broadlinx Board

You will now need to update the second Broadlinx (NR-33000) board. You
are going to make the secondary Broadlinx board active and then update
the Primary board.

Follow theses steps to Update the second Broadlinx board:

1. Make the Secondary board active. There are many ways to do this step,
the following ways are suggested:
• Enter “redundancyBoardActivate” at the Telnet prompt in a Telnet
session for the inactive board.
• Press the Activation button on the Inactive board.The Activate button
is the button closest to the CF card

2. Navigate to the Firmware management page. All Status indicators

should be green but the now inactive broadlinx board.

274 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Software Installation

Figure 185. The Firmware Management Screen Broadlinx Status is Red

3. Click the Activate button in the lower right side. The board will be
updated similar to the process described when updating the first board.
4. Navigate to the Firmware Management page. The Restart button will
now appear near the bottom of the page. (The display may vary from
the example that is shown in Figure 186.)

Figure 186. The Restart Button on the Firmware Management Screen

The cards must be restarted to use the new firmware.

5. Click the Restart button, which is shown above in Figure 186.
The following Caution pop-up window will then appear:

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 275

Section 12 — Broadlinx Installation

Figure 187. The Restart Caution Popup

CAUTION Clicking the OK button will cause a momentary interruption to video passing
through the Routing switcher. Clicking the Cancel button, while not advised,
will stop the restart process allowing you to restart the board during a sched-
uled service time. However, the new software will not be applied until the
boards are restarted.

6. Click the OK button.

The Post Complete window will then reappear.

7. Navigate to the Firmware Management page. All Status indicators

should be green.

Figure 188. The Firmware Management Screen All boards are up to date

276 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Software Installation

Licensing SNMP on Both Broadlinx Boards

SNMP is licensed for a frame type using the hardware Ethernet address
(MAC Address) of the Broadlinx or NR33000 processor. To license SNMP
use the Enter License Key option from the Configuration web page on both
boards with the specific key for each board.

An alternative to licensing both boards is to enable inter-board communi-

cations to save the license key from the active board that has been licensed
to the standby board. To license a newly added standby board either in the
primary or secondary slot type setSnmpCommunicationsEnable and
wait for the SNMP license set message then reboot the board.

When using SNMP on multiple frame systems, the SNMP monitored

Outputs must be on the 1st frame.

The setSnmpCommunicationsEnable command will allow the SNMP

key to be saved from the active board to the inactive board. Inter-board
communications of the license key is verified with the
redundantConfigShow command.

Follow these steps to save the license key from the primary board:

1. Start a console or telnet connection to the standby Broadlinx board

2. Enter setSnmpCommunicationsEnable at the command prompt.

The SNMP license should now be saved to the secondary board.

3. Enter the redundantConfigShow command at the command prompt

to verify that the communications is active and that the SNMP license
key had been transferred.

4. Once the key is transferred the board should be rebooted.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 277

Section 12 — Broadlinx Installation

Figure 189. Example

The SNMP Keys status

Ensure that the SNMP key

and the master SNMP key
values are the same.

The value for the SNMP

keys shown in this
example are for the frame
type rather than the
encrypted key number
that was entered on the
Web page.

If zero is shown, no SNMP

key has been set.

278 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Software Installation

Formatting the Compact Flash Card with the FAT16 Format

These steps describe the steps needed to reformat your Compact Flash (CF)
card to the FAT16 format, which will decrease the time it takes to ”boot” or
start up. The FAT16 format will check all the file entries in less time than the
FAT32 format.
When you format the CF, a warning will appear that indicates that the
format may not be compatible with older versions of Windows because of
the large allocation size. The data that will be stored on the CF is a small
enough amount that you do not need to be concerned about the file storage
inefficiency.
Follow these steps to format the CF card with the FAT16 format:
1. Select the Start menu.

2. Right click the My Computer icon and then select the Manage option
(Figure 190). The Computer Management dialog will then appear.

Figure 190. The Manage Option of the My Computer Menu

3. Select the Disk Management option under the Storage menu.

4. Right click the CF, when it appears, and then select the Format option
(Figure 191 on page 280).

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 279

Section 12 — Broadlinx Installation

Figure 191. The Format Option

The Format dialog will then appear (Figure 192).

Figure 192. The Format Dialog

5. Enter a preferred name in the Volume label field.

6. Select FAT from the File system drop-down list.

7. Select Default from the Allocation unit size drop-down list.

8. Click the OK button. A popup will appear (Figure 193).

Figure 193. Format Warning

Click the OK button.

280 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Software Installation

Alternate methods for Updating a Compact Flash Cards

Uploading the Broadlinx Software Using NetConfig

Note For more information about the NetConfig application see the NetConfig
Instruction Manual.

The 3.3.0 version of Broadlinx may be copied to the Compact Flash cards
using the 2.0.13 version of NetConfig. Once the flash is updated, the Trinix
matrix web page activate and reboot procedure, as described in Software
Installation on page 260, will need to be performed to complete the update
process.

Requirements
• The 2.0.13 version of NetConfig must be used for Broadlinx Software
Update.
• This procedure can be used with the Broadlinx 3.2.0 release and subse-
quent releases. In other words, you will need to manually copy the
entire Broadlinx 3.2.0 file to the Compact Flash disc (CF) if you have the
Broadlinx 3.1.0, and older, release installed.
• This feature cannot be used to downgrade from 3.2.0x to 3.1.0x (or older
releases).
• The Compact Flash should be at least 128MB in size. An error will
appear if a smaller sized flash is used

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 281

Section 12 — Broadlinx Installation

Updating Broadlinx Using NetConfig

Pre-Installation Steps

Note Please read the Requirements on page 281 before proceeding.

Before Starting the update using NetConfig:

• Place the latest broadlinx.tar file in the Trinix directory of the Matrices
folder (….\Encore\Matrices\Trinix).
• Place the trinix.xml file in the Netconfig directory.

Note If Encore was installed in directories other than the default, you will need to
edit the <file-name> element in the trinix.xml file to match the location of
broadlinx.tar.

Installation Steps
Follow these steps to update Broadlinx using NetConfig:

1. Start NetConfig and Verify that you are using the 2.0.13 version.
a. Click the About button on the NetConfig tool bar. The About
Network Configuration Tool dialog box will then appear.
b. The version is displayed above the copyright notice. If the installed
version is older than 2.0.13, you will not be able to perform this
update.
c. Click the OK button to close the dialog box.

2. Click the Load Software button on the NetConfig tool bar, or select
Configure > Load Software. A window showing a hierarchy of the
software available will then appear.

3. Click Routers > Encore> Matrices> Trinix (Broadlinx version #) in the

left side window, then select Broadlinx. This will display the software
versions available for loading in the right panel (Figure 194).

Figure 194. NetConfig’s Load Software Window

The available
versions of The destina-
software tions for the
software

282 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Software Installation

Installation FAQ

The installation process seems to have stopped

If no activity is being shown on the Progress bar, and the time has exceeded
the estimated time by 20%, check the LED on the door of the frame on
which the installation is being preformed.
• If the LED is green, Restart Web browser.
• If the LED is red, Open the door and see which board has a red LED.
Then start a Telnet session to check the alarm conditions on the board.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 283

Section 12 — Broadlinx Installation

284 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Section 13
Broadlinx Software
The Broadlinx option, which consists of Broadlinx software running on the
NR-33000 Sync/NIC/OPM board, allows SMS 7000 or Encore control
using Grass Valley CPL (Control Point Language) through an Ethernet con-
nection.
Broadlinx also provides Web pages for the following operations:
• Network configuration of the NR-33000 boards
• Downloading of software upgrades to the various boards in the system
• System monitoring using Internet Explorer
Broadlinx will also support SNMP/NetCentral monitoring with the correct
license. Broadlinx boards and software are available for all of the Trinix
Routing switchers.

CAUTION Before updating Broadlinx, compare your current system with the version
that you are updating to by checking the section called, Broadlinx Version and
Supported Trinix Boards on page 335. If you current system is older than the
2.4.2 version of Broadlinx, contact Technical support see Contacting Grass
Valley on page 4.

Configuring the Network Settings

All LAN devices that are used with Trinix (for example, a monitor PC or the
SMS system) must be on the same network as the Broadlinx board, or con-
nected to the board through a network router.
The following instructions apply to NR-33000 configuration using Broad-
linx HTTP web pages. NetConfig includes a “discovery” feature which
eliminates the need to change the PC IP setting during configuration. (For
information about configuration using the NetConfig application, please
refer to the NetConfig Instruction Manual.)

Note Do not use Broadlinx with the Dynex DX-ESW8, 10/100M Fast Ethernet
Switch.

If your network uses a single Broadlinx board see the Simple Network Set-
tings on page 286. If your system uses more than one Broadlinx board, see
Complex Network on page 288

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 285

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Simple Network Settings

A Simple network is when there is only a monitor PC and a Broadlinx
board in an isolated network environment. You will need to change the
monitor PC network address to be compatible with the Broadlinx board’s
default setting. You must then browse to and configure the board to work
in your facility.

Configuring the PC’s Network Settings

The PC’s Network Settings must be compatible with the Broadlinx
board’s default values.
Follow these steps to configure the PC’s Network Settings:
1. Open the Network Connections window. (Start> Control Panel>
Settings> Network Connections)
2. Right-click the PC’s Local Area Connection and then select the
“Properties” option from the drop-down list. The Local Connection
Properties dialog will then appear.

Figure 195. The Local Connection Properties Dialog

3. Scroll down and then select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) setting.

4. Click the Properties button. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties

dialog will then appear (Figure 196).

286 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Figure 196. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Dialog

5. Click the Use the following IP address radio button. You must have
administrator privileges to change Internet settings.
a. Enter “192.168.253.XXX”in the IP address field (where “XXX” is a
three number combination that identifies the Monitor PC on the
network) and then “255.255.255.0” into the subnet mask field. All
other TCP/IP network settings are irrelevant at this point.
b. Reboot the PC to apply the changes.
You can use the MS-DOS ipconfig command to verify the set-
tings. These settings can be restored to their previous values once
the Broadlinx board has been configured.
6. The Broadlinx board should be booted (or rebooted) at this time. The
board can be rebooted by unseating and then re-seating the board:
a. The board can be unseated without turning off power.
b. To re-insert the board, keep the ejector levers spread apart and slide
the board in until the levers make contact. Then fold the levers
toward each other to seat the board.
c. Wait for the board to boot up fully (as indicated by the “spinning”
pattern of the LEDs on the front edge of the board).

Note The Broadlinx board should be powered up (or rebooted) only after all
network connections have been made. Otherwise the board may fail to boot
properly.

Starting BroadLinx
1. Start Microsoft Internet Explorer on the PC.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 287

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Note If you connect to the Internet via a Proxy, you must turn off the Explorer Proxy
settings. To check the Proxy setting, open Microsoft Internet Explorer’s LAN
Settings (Menu bar> Tool > Internet Options> Connections> LAN Settings).

2. Enter the factory default URL in the address field (This URL is the IP
address for the Broadlinx board):
http://192.168.253.200
The Broadlinx web page will then appear.

Figure 197. Broadlinx Web Page

3. Proceed to the Broadlinx Installation on page 259.

Note There is a known issue where the Broadlinx Web page is not accessible if the
Broadlinx board is started without an Ethernet cable or if the Ethernet cable
is removed and then inserted after HTTP Daemon is started. However, the
Trinix Matrix will be listed in the NetConfig application. To correct this issue,
insert the Ethernet cable and then reboot the Broadlinx board.

Complex Network
If the network includes additional PCs, connections to additional net-
works, and so forth or if there is more than one Broadlinx board, then the
factory default network settings of the boards will need to be adjusted to
avoid conflicts.
See the Configuring the PC’s Network Settings section, for the initial network
configuration steps.
When the Broadlinx web page appears:
1. Click the Configure button, at the bottom of the page, to navigate to the
Configuration page (Figure 198). You should see the current Network
Interface parameters. Your parameters will differ from those in the
example shown in Figure 198.

288 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Figure 198. Configuration Web Page

The Configure Network

Interface button

2. Click the Configure Network Interface button (the blue box with a white
arrow in it, at the bottom of the section, see Figure 198) to navigate to
the Network Configuration page. The Configure Network Interface
page (Figure 199) will then be displayed.

Figure 199. The Configure Network Interface Screen

3. Enter the information that is needed to connect to your network in the

respective fields.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 289

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Note If you don't know what values to enter, consult your network administrator.
Your parameters will differ from those in the example shown in Figure 199.

The SNMP Device ID is the MAC address of the NR-33000. This infor-
mation is used when obtaining license for SNMP/NetCentral moni-
toring. For more information, see SNMP/NetCentral Monitoring on
page 37.
• You will lose the connection if you change the Broadlinx board to
another network.
• If more than one Broadlinx board has been supplied for this frame, re-
seat the secondary board at this time and wait for the board to boot up.
Repeat the above procedure starting with step #1. The secondary IP
address will be assigned an IP address one number higher than the
primary IP address.
• The Broadlinx Web page is not accessible if Broadlinx is started without
an Ethernet cable connected or if the Ethernet cable is removed and
then inserted after HTTP Daemon is started. Reboot the Broadlinx
board to correct this issue.

Adding a Broadlinx Board to an Encore Controlled Trinix Router

When adding a secondary or redundant Broadlinx board (NR 33000) to a
Trinix frame, there is a possibility that the Crosspoint status between the
Broadlinx boards can be become mismatched. This mismatch could cause
the status on the VSD and Control panels to be incorrect.
Follow these steps to ensure that a mismatch does not occur:
1. Remove the battery connection of the Secondary Broadlinx board and
then wait a minimum of 60 seconds. Removing the battery ensures that
any residual information is erased from its DRAM.
2. Replace the battery connection to the board.
3. Insert the Secondary Broadlinx Controller into the Trinix frame with the
LAN connection restored.
4. Reboot the Broadlinx boards. After a reboot, the Secondary Broadlinx
Controller should receive the correct Crosspoint status from the
Primary Broadlinx Controller.

Protected Paths
When Protected Paths are started in the system, run the board insertion
procedure for Protected Paths. That is, setting up the network parameters
and synchronizing the paths.dat file and so forth.

290 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Encore Controlled Routers
Once the newly inserted board has booted, run the Re-Sync Comms and
Re-Sync Router from the Encore System Configure window (Encore
User Interface> System Configure window).

CAUTION Ensure that the steps outlined above in Adding a Broadlinx Board to an
Encore Controlled Trinix Router are taken before the newly inserted board
ever becomes active or is activated! In the event the board does become
active, before these steps have been executed, immediately reset the newly
inserted Broadlinx board (NR 33000).

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 291

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Configuration
This Configuration section describes the steps that are needed to deploy
Broadlinx to meet your business needs. Each section title of the Configura-
tion page is described.

Opening the Configuration Page

1. Connect to the Routing switcher following the procedure described in
the Simple Network Settings section on 286.
2. Click the Configure button at the bottom of the Main Broadlinx page. The
Configuration page will then open; this page should be similar to what
is shown in Figure 200.

Figure 200. Configuration Page

Current Time
The Time settings are used only to timestamp the “Events” log entries.
Clicking the Time Management arrow button at the bottom of the Current
Time section (Figure 201 on page 293) will open the Time management
screen, which is shown in Figure 202.

292 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

Figure 201. The Current Time section of the Configuration Page

Click the Time Man-

agement arrow

Figure 202. The Time Management

The clock displayed on the page will synchronize automatically to a VITC

signal on line 141 of the sync reference input.
Follow these steps to set the time setting:
1. Click the Use Daylight Savings Time check box. The Daylight Savings Time
box MUST be checked or unchecked manually at the appropriate time
of year.
2. Select the UTC offset from the UTC offset drop-down list. The UTC
Offset is the number of hours that the standard time at the customer
location is ahead or behind Universal Time Coordinated (Greenwich
Mean Time). For example, for the U.S. Mountain time zone the entry
would always be “-7:00”, which is shown in the figure above.
3. Click the SNTP radio button and enter the IP address of the server if a
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) server will be used as a time
source.
The SNTP address can also be changed on the Configure Net Interface
menu. If the SNTP server is on another network you may need to enter
the IP address of the gateway to that network.

Setting the Time Manually

The clock will run in stand-alone mode if no external reference is available.

1. per SMPTE RP 164-1996.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 293

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Figure 203. Manually Setting the Time

Follow these steps to manually set the time:

1. Click the Set Time Manually radio button. The dialog will then expand to
display the Time drop-down lists.
2. Enter the appropriate values.

System Description
This is the source of the system name that appears on the left side of the top-
level Broadlinx page.
Follow these steps to change the description:

Figure 204. The Edit System Description “Arrow”

Click the Edit System
Description arrow

1. Click the Edit System Description arrow button. The System Description
page will then appear.

Figure 205. System Description

2. Enter a new description in the text field.

3. Click the Save button. Clicking the Cancel button will close the page
without saving the changes.

294 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

4. The System description that you entered will now appear below the
Reload button.

Figure 206. System Description

Network Interface
The Configure Network Interface page is where you enter the information
that is needed to access the Router network.
Follow these steps to configure the network settings:

Figure 207. The Configure Network Interface “Arrow”

Click the Configure

Network Interface
arrow

1. Click the Configure Network Interface arrow button. The Configure

Network Interface page will then appear (Figure 208).
2. Enter the information about your network in the respective fields.

Figure 208. Configure Network Interface

IP Address: This field assigns an IP address to the primary NR-33000.

This address must end with an even number. If an odd number is
entered, it will automatically be changed to the next higher number.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 295

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

The secondary board will automatically be given the same IP address

as the primary board, plus 1.
Subnet Mask: This field assigns the Subnet mask that is usually
255.255.255.0 (Class C net with no sub-netting).
Target Name (SMS control only): This field assigns the name used by
SMS 7000 control system for router. This name can be up to eight char-
acters, but the last character must be a “1.” (The Secondary NR will
automatically be given the same name with “2” as the last character.)
Primary Controller IP (Encore control only): This field assigns the
address of the Master System Controller Board.
Secondary Controller IP (Encore redundant control only): This field
assigns the address of the Mirror System Controller Board.
Gateway IP: This field assigns the Gateway IP address. This field is
only used if the Trinix Routing switcher is connected to the Broadlinx
PC through a gateway.
Time Server IP This is an optional network time server address.

SNMP
When the SNMP feature is licensed you will be able to enter SNMP IP mon-
itoring addresses by clicking the Configure SNMP Manager IP Addresses
hyperlink. You may enter up to five monitoring addresses and names.
Follow these steps to enter the SNMP license:
1. Open the Configuration screen.

Figure 209. The Enter License Key “Arrow”

Click the Enter License

Key arrow

2. Click the Enter License Key arrow button. The Enter SNMP License
window will then appear.

Figure 210. The Enter License Key

3. Enter the SNMP license key that was issued to you by sales and
support.

296 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

4. Click the Submit button. The pop-up window will then change to
display the text shown in Figure 211.

Figure 211. The License Key is Valid

Note If the number is not valid, check the number entered. If the number is still not
valid contact Tech support (see Contacting Grass Valley on page 4).

5. Click the OK button. The SNMP License window will then close and
return you to the Configuration page. The word “enabled” will appear
for SNMP Services.

Figure 212. The word “enabled” will appear

See Configuring an SNMP Manager’s IP Address on page 303 for configuration

steps.

Firmware Management
The “Firmware” field on the Configuration page shows the version number
of the last-activated top-level software package. In most cases, this will be
the version that is currently running in the system. However, if a board
(such as an input board or output board) has been replaced, and the new
board contains different firmware, then the version indicated here will no
longer be accurate. For more information, see Software Installation on
page 260.

NEW SCREEN CAPTURE

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 297

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Figure 213. The Firmware Management Page

The firmware used in the Trinix system consists of a collection of programs

operating within the various PC boards. These programs are identified
either by a sub-level revision number from 1 to 255 or by a date. Since these
programs must be compatible with each other, they are managed as a
package with a top-level revision number.
The Firmware Management table displays the types of possible PC boards,
the version of sub-level software that is presently associated with each type
that is installed, the versions of top-level software packages present in the
Broadlinx board, and the compatibility Status of these software elements.
Not all board types will always be present in a given system. The possible
boards are shown in Table 51.
Table 51. Board Description for “squared” or Symmetric Frames

Board
Description
Abbreviation

HI High Definition Input board

SI Standard Definition Input board

HO High Definition Output board

SO Standard Definition Output board

3G Three Gb/s boards

DM Data Matrix board

298 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

NR Broadlinx board (Sync/NIC/OPM board)

SR Sync/OPM board

RP interface board (used only on TRX-NXT-

512x512 chassis)

VxWorks operating system (used only on NR board)

Web Interface software used to communicate with the PC

(used only on NR board)

Table 52. Board Description for Asymmetric Frames

Board
Description
Abbreviation

HI High Definition Input board

SI Standard Definition Input board

HO High Definition Output board

SO Standard Definition Output board

3G Three Gb/s boards

DM Data Matrix board

NR Broadlinx board (Sync/NIC/OPM board)

SR Sync Reference/OPM board

SC Status Collector board

TRX-OPM Output Asymmetric Output monitor board

Monitor

VxWorks operating system (used only on NR board)

Web Interface software used to communicate with the PC

(used only on NR board)

Each Trinix circuit board typically has a program active in one or more
FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) ICs and another program active in
a microcontroller IC. The FPGA controls the board’s switcher functions,
while the microcontroller allows Broadlinx communication to and from the
FPGA and other board components.
In most cases, there will be more than one board of a given type in the
system (multiple output boards, for example). If there is a difference in
FPGA or microcontroller firmware version from one board to the next, the
version running on the first board will be shown and the fact that a differ-
ence exists will be indicated by three dots. For example, if there are four SO-
33110 output boards, three with firmware version “2” and one with firm-
ware version “1,” the table will show “1...”

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 299

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

For the microcontroller, 2 digits will be shown. For example, 6:4. The first
digit represents the firmware version. The second digit represents the
loader version. This means mismatched versions between the firmware
and the loader can be shown as 6... : 4, 6 : 4..., or 6... : 4....
The sub-level programs in the selected package are identified in the “FPGA
Pending” column and the “uControl Pending” column. The system com-
pares the version numbers of each sub-level software pair; if there is a mis-
match, the Status light will be red.

General Guidelines for Firmware Management

• There should be no red lights in the Status column. If there are red
lights, it may be that a board has been replaced by another with a
different version of software. The solution is to select the radio
button on the bottom of the menu that is next to the latest top-level
software package and then update the software to the newest ver-
sion. For more information, refer to the Field Engineering Bulletin
supplied with the software or contact Grass Valley technical sup-
port.
• In most cases the latest software should be used. The two top-level
software packages shown along the bottom of the menu should
have the newest package listed first, indicating that the newest
package was the last one activated.

CAUTION Grass Valley strongly recommends that users keep all software updated to
the latest released version. New boards are NOT guaranteed to be compatible
with older versions of software. A system failure may occur if a new board is
received as a replacement part and then loaded with an older version of soft-
ware.

SNMP/NetCentral Monitoring
The Trinix SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Agent allows
the Grass Valley NetCentral application to monitor the following informa-
tion:
Table 53. General Information

Item Description

Matrix Name The name of the Trinix matrix.

Description The description of the matrix. For example, “Trinix matrix”

Frame Type The frame Type of the matrix such as Trinix_128 matrix, Trinix-256
matrix, Trinix_512 matrix etc.,

300 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

Table 54. Network Information

Item Description

IP Address The IP address of the Trinix matrix.

Subnet Mask The Subnet address of the Trinix matrix.

Gateway Address The Gateway address of the Trinix matrix.

Table 55. Power Supply Information

Item Description

PS Name The name of the Power supply such as Power Supply A, Power
Supply B etc

PS Status The status of Power Supply such as active/faulty etc.

PS AC Status The status of AC input to the power Supply such as active/faulty

etc

PS DC Status The status of DC output from the power Supply such as active/
faulty etc.

Table 56. Frame Fan Information

Item Description

Fan Name The name of the fan such as Fan Module A, Fan Module B etc.

Fan Status The current status of the fan. For example, running or missing.

Table 57. Reference Signal Information

Item Description

Reference Name The name of the reference currently connected to Trinix matrix,
such as Video Reference #1 etc.

Reference Status The current status of the reference signal. For example, Present,
Faulty, or Missing.

Table 58. Input/Output Signal Information

Item Description

Signal Alias The Alias name of the signal.

Signal Type The type of signal. For example, HD or SD Video.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 301

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Item Description

Signal State The state of the signal. For example, Detected or Not Detected and
so forth.

Signal Last Changed The time at which signal state was changed.

Signal Specific This is an OID and can be used to extend the signal information to
another table.

Signal Notify This information indicates the current status of Signal Alarm
Config and allows a manager to control whether or not the agent
will generate the signal state notification

Matrix Index Number This information indicates the matrix index number of current
signal.

Connector Number The current connector number of signal.

Signal Description The Signal Description, such as SD/HD Video etc.

Output Connected to The Matrix Input connector number currently connected to out-
put. If the signal is an input signal, this value will be -1.

Trinix Matrix Notifications

The Trinix-SNMP Agent software monitors the following events and noti-
fication messages are sent to all of the configured SNMP managers.
Table 59. Trinix Matrix Notifications

Notification Description

Reference Signal A trap message is sent to the manager if the Trinix matrix loses
the Reference signal.
This error trap is cleared once Reference signal is restored.

Power Supply Error A trap message is sent to the manager if any error occurs in the
power supply.
This error trap is cleared once the power supply is restored to
the correct state.

Power Supply AC Error A trap message is sent to the manager if any error occurs in AC
input to the power supply.
This error trap is cleared once the power supply AC is restored
back.

Power Supply DC Error A trap message is sent to the manager if any error occurs in DC
output from the power supply.
This error trap is cleared once the power supply DC is restored
back.

Power Supply Fan Error A trap message is sent to the manager if any error occurs in the
power supply fan.
This error trap is cleared once the power supply fan is restored
to the correct state.

Fan Error A trap message is sent to the manager if any error occurs in the
fan.
This error trap is cleared once the fan is restored to the correct
state.

302 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

Notification Description

Board Error A board error message is sent to the manager if any error occurs
in board (Input / output / fabric) status.
This error trap is cleared once the board is restored to the cor-
rect state

Over temperature Error An over temp error trap message is sent to the manager if any of
the boards present in matrix frame crosses its normal operating
temperature range.
This error trap is cleared once the board is restored to the nor-
mal operating temperature range.

Input Signal Loss A trap message is sent to the manager if the Trinix matrix detects
loss of an input signal.
This error trap is cleared once Input signal is restored back.

Note The SNMP Agent software does not send

traps on changes in the Input signal status
unless it is configured to do so. This trap
needs to be enabled using Trinix Matrix Web
page.

Output Signal Loss A trap message is sent to the manager if Trinix matrix detects
loss of an output signal.
This error trap is cleared once Output signal is restored.

Note The SNMP Agent software does not send

traps on changes in the Output signal status
unless it is configured to do so. This trap
needs to be enabled using Trinix Matrix Web
page.

Controller Switchover Broadlinx card generates this notification to inform it has

changed its state from the primary to secondary or vice versa.

Configuring an SNMP Manager’s IP Address

Using the Broadlinx Web page, you can configure the SNMP Manager IP
Address setting to send notice to those who should receive SNMP notifica-
tion from the Broadlinx software.
The SNMP Manager IP Address setting is only available if SNMP is
licensed on that matrix.

Note The following settings are required only when you are not using NetCentral
as the SNMP Manager. If NetCentral is used as the SNMP Manager, the
Manager IP Address is set automatically by the NetCentral application.

Follow these steps to configure an SNMP manager’s IP Address:

1. Click the Configure SNMP Manager IP Address hyperlink on the
Configuration Web page (Figure 214).

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 303

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Figure 214. The SNMP Section of the Configuration Web Page

The Configure SNMP Manager IP Address page will then appear.

2. Enter the Appropriate IP Addresses and Community names in the
respective fields. The IP Addresses shown in Figure 215 are for
demonstration purposes only.
3. Click the Submit button to save and apply the changes (Figure 215). The
IP address shown is for example only.

Figure 215. The Configure SNMP Manager IP Address Page

The Post Complete page will then appear.

Figure 216. The Configure SNMP Manager IP Address Page

Clicking the Back button will return to the Configure SNMP Manager IP
Address page. The submitted changes will not be affected.

Configuring Input Signal Loss Notifications

Input Signal-Loss SNMP notifications are configured using the Broadlinx
Web pages. The Signal-Loss settings are ONLY available if you have a valid

304 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

SNMP license installed on the matrix. The Signal-Loss settings can be

accessed from two places:
• From the Individual Input Board Web Page.
• From the Frame Level Signal Web Page.
Both of these pages are explained in detail below.

From the Individual Input Board Web Page

You can use Grass Valley’s NetConfig application to access each Input
board.
Follow these steps to configure the Input Signal Loss notification feature
using the Individual Input board’s Web Page:
1. Click the Signal button to open the Signal Alarm Configuration page
(Figure 217).
2. Select the Signal alarms for each connector.

Figure 217. The Signal Alarm Configuration Page in NetConfig

3. Save the configuration by clicking the Save Signal Alarm Config button
(Figure 218).

Figure 218. The Signal Alarm Configuration Page NetConfig

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 305

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

From the Frame Level Signal Web Page

The Signal Alarm information can be accessed from the Frame Level Signal
Web page.
Follow these steps to configure the Input Signal Loss notification feature
using the Frame level signal’s Web Page:
1. Click the Signal button to open the Frame Info tab (Figure 219).

2. Select the Signal alarms for each connector.

Figure 219. The Signal Alarm Configuration Page

3. Save the configuration by clicking the Save Signal Alarm Config button
(Figure 218).

Figure 220. The Signal Alarm Configuration Page

Configuring Output Signal Loss Notifications

Output Signal-Loss SNMP notifications are configured using the Broadlinx
Web pages.
The Signal-Loss settings are only available if SNMP is licensed on that
matrix.
The Signal-Loss settings can be accessed from two places.
• From the individual Output Board Web page.
• From the Frame Level Signal Web page.

306 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

Both of these processes are explained in detail below.

From the Individual Output Board Web Page

Follow these steps to configure Output Signal Loss notifications using the
Individual Output board’s Web Page:
1. Click the Signal button to open the Signal Alarm Configuration page
(Figure 221).
2. Select the Signal alarms for each connector.

Figure 221. The Output Signal Alarm Configuration Page

3. Save the configuration by clicking the Save Signal Alarm Config button
(Figure 222).

Figure 222. The Signal Alarm Configuration Page

From the Frame Level Signal Web Page

Follow these steps to configure Output Signal Loss notifications using the
Frame level signal’s Web Page:
1. Click the Signal button to open the Frame Info tab (Figure 223).

2. Select the Signal alarms for each connector.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 307

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Figure 223. The Signal Alarm Configuration Page

3. Save the configuration by clicking the Save Signal Alarm Config button
(Figure 224).

Figure 224. The Signal Alarm Configuration Page

308 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

Licensing SNMP on Both Broadlinx Boards

SNMP is licensed for a frame type using the hardware Ethernet address of
the Broadlinx or NR33300 processor. (MAC Address)To license a newly
added standby board either in the primary or secondary slot type setSn-
mpCommunicationsEnable and wait for the SNMP license set message
then reboot the board.

An alternative to licensing both boards is to enable inter-board communi-

cations to save the license key from the active board that has been licensed
to the standby board.

The setSnmpCommunicationsEnable command will allow the SNMP

key to be saved from the active board to the inactive board. Inter-board
communications of the license key is verified with the
redundantConfigShow command.

Follow these steps to save the license key from the primary board:

1. Start a console or telnet connection to the standby Broadlinx board

2. Enter setSnmpCommunicationsEnable at the command prompt.

The SNMP license should now be saved to the secondary board.

3. Enter the redundantConfigShow command at the command prompt

to verify that the communications is active and that the SNMP license
key had been transferred.

4. Once the key is transferred the board should be rebooted.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 309

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Figure 225. Example

The SNMP Keys status

Ensure that the SNMP key

and the master SNMP key
values are the same.

The value for the SNMP

keys shown in this
example are for the frame
type rather than the
encrypted key number
that was entered on the
Web page.

If zero is shown, no SNMP

key has been set.

310 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

Broadlinx / Internet Explorer Monitoring

Normal Connection Procedure Following Network Address Configuration

1. Launch Internet Explorer.
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or newer is required; version 6 or newer
is recommended for best performance.
2. Enter the URL for the Broadlinx board installed in the system to be
monitored.
When a connection is established, you will see the Broadlinx main web
page (similar to the example that is shown in Figure 226).

Figure 226. The Broadlinx Main Web Page

System
Description

In the above example, the System Description is “256X512 Asymmetric

Frame.” This name can be modified if desired (See the System Descrip-
tion section for more information.).
The list below the System Description can be expanded to show all the
system PC boards and modules that are available for Broadlinx com-
munication.

Routing Switcher Graphic

The graphic of the Routing switcher’s front panel will show the status
of the master alarms (A green or red dot).
For a discussion of Frame Numbers, see Frame Number Settings on
page 212.

Note The Broadlinx displays do not update themselves automatically. Use the
Refresh button in the Broadlinx window to update the active screen. You may
be asked, “Repost Form data?” Click the Yes button.

Press the Internet Explorer’s Refresh button (or press the F5 key on your
keyboard) to return to this page at any time.
Pressing the Reload button (Located above the left hand Web page.) will
cause both pages to refresh.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 311

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Checking Hardware Status

Follow these steps to check the hardware’s status:
1. Connect to the Routing switcher following the procedure described in
the Normal Connection Procedure Following Network Address Configuration
section.
2. Click on the graphic of the Routing switcher front panel. A line drawing
of the Trinix frame will then appear (similar to the example shown in
Figure 228).

Figure 227. The Trinix 256x512 Asymmetric Frame

312 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

Figure 228. The Trinix 512x512 or “512 Squared” Frame

In this example, all installed and active modules and boards show a
green dot meaning that operation is normal. Modules that are not active
or installed are grayed out.
3. Select a module or board to check its condition by ether clicking the
name of the board or module in the list or the graphic in the drawing
(Figure 229 on page 314). The selected board and its information will
then appear (Figure 230 on page 315).

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 313

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Figure 229. Frame and Device Tree

Click one of or click one of

these these

• In this example, the HI-33300-3G board has been selected.

314 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

Figure 230. Example of Web Page for Specific Board

For TRX-NXT-512x512 Routing switchers, the SR-33500 Sync Reference

board and the RP-33500 Rear Panel must be selected from the list
(because these boards on located on the rear panel).

Note To find the name of a board or module, you can mouse over the graphic and
a tool-tip text alert with the name and status will appear (Figure 231).

Figure 231. Tool-tip

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 315

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

TRX-NXT-512x512 Routing switchers

1. Connect to the Routing switcher following the procedure described on
page 311.
2. Click on the graphic of the Routing switcher front panel.

3. Click “Signals”
A menu similar to Figure 232 will then appear.

Figure 232. Monitor Window (TRX-NXT-512x512).

The Monitor tab displays the following:

Chassis: This column lists the monitor output ports labeled “1” through
“4” on the back of the frame.
Output: This column lists the numbers that are entered in the control
system (for example, Jupiter) to identify the Trinix monitor outputs.
These numbers correspond to monitor output ports labeled 1 through 4 on
the rear of the frame (as shown in Table 40 and Table 41).
Monitored: This column lists the number of the output that is being moni-
tored by the control system.
Switched: This column lists the number of the input that is being switched
to this monitor output.
Reclocker: (TRX-NXT-256x256 and TRX-NXT-256x256), this column lists
the following:
• “H” = The monitor output board is locked to (and is reclocking) an
HD signal.
• “S” = The monitor output board is not reclocking this signal
(because the signal is either SD or Force Bypass mode is selected).
For more information about output monitor reclocking see Output
Monitor Reclock / Force Bypass Settings on page 206.

316 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

Reclocker: (TRX-NXT-512x512): This column lists the following:

• “L” = The monitor output board is locked to (and is reclocking) the
signal.
• “B” = The monitor output board is bypassing (and not reclocking)
this signal. For more information about output monitor reclocking,
see Output Monitor Reclock / Force Bypass Settings on page 206.
For more information about output monitoring, refer to the manual sup-
plied with the control system.
Selecting the Input tab will display a menu similar to the one shown in
Figure 233. This table shows the following information, for each input:
• Input signal presence (yes or no).
• Whether or not the input is in use (that is, whether or not it is cur-
rently switched to an output).
• If a proper input signal was present but has since been lost.

Figure 233. Inputs Tab

Selecting the Outputs tab will display a menu similar to the one shown in
Figure 234. This table shows the status of each physical output (that is, the
number of the physical input switched to the output) and whether or not
the reclocking circuit is enabled for the output. For more information about
reclocking see Output Monitor Reclock / Force Bypass Settings on page 206.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 317

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Figure 234. Outputs Tab

Firmware Update
For firmware update instructions, refer to the Release Notes document that
is supplied with the firmware; also see Updating Systems with a Single Broad-
linx Board on page 263.

318 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

Trinix Matrix Identification from the NetConfig Software

Trinix matrices now support identification from the NetConfig tool. The ID
function is used to identify the physical location of the Trinix Matrix. This
feature is helpful in a facility with many matrices scattered across the
facility.
Follow these steps to identify a matrix:
1. Open the NetConfig application.

2. Right-click the preferred Trinix matrix listed on the tree view in the left
pane.
3. Select the Identify Device option in the pop-up context menu
(Figure 235).

Figure 235. The Identify Device Option

4. The LED labeled on the Broadlinx card shall blink for the default setting
of 20 seconds and then returns to its previous state (Figure 236).

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 319

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Figure 236. The Broadlinx card’s LED

0718277609__Broadlinx-ID-LEDs
The time that the LEDs will “blink” can be configured using the Net-
Config option in the Configure menu of NetConfig. For more informa-
tion about the Broadlinx LEDs, see NR-33000 NIC/Sync/OPM board on
page 402.
Follow these steps to configure various options in Broadlinx:
1. Select the NetConfig option in the Configure menu (Configure>
NetConfig option).

Figure 237. The NetConfig Options Menu

The NetConfig option dialog will then appear.

320 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

Figure 238. The NetConfig Options Menu

2. Make the appropriate changes.

a. The Blink interval can be changed by entering the time in
milliseconds in the Interval box.
b. The Blink duration can be changed by entering the time in seconds
in the Duration box.
3. Click the OK button to apply and save the changes.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 321

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Updating the FPGAs Firmware on Multiple Boards at the Same Time

The steps needed to update the FPGAs Firmware are:
1. Installing the latest version of the Broadlinx software.

2. Updating the FPGAs firmware for a group of boards.

3. Restarting the updated boards

Each of these steps is described in detail below.

Installing the Latest Version of the Broadlinx Software

Note No installation is required to update new Broadlinx boards; Broadlinx boards
are shipped with the current version of software installed.

The Steps needed to install the latest version of Broadlinx on existing

boards are covered in the Software Installation section on page 260.

Updating the FPGAs Firmware for a Group of Boards

The FPGAs firmware can be updated using the updateFpgaGroup com-
mand.
This section will describe how to find the board type, update the FPGA
firmware on a group, and how to force an update.
Follow these steps to update the FPGAs firmware for a group of boards:
1. Connect to the Trinix NR-33000 (Broadlinx) board via a console session
on a PC using either a serial connection or an Ethernet/ Telnet
connection.
2. Open a console window.

322 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

Selecting the Board Type

You need to know the board type ID to update that board.

1. Enter
deviceListShow
At the command prompt. The device list will then appear. The available
boards and information about the frame will be displayed.

2. Select the board type that you want to update. The 3G Input board (HI-
33300-3G HD/SD Input - 3G) is type 26. This is the board type that will
be used in the rest of the examples.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 323

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Updating the FPGA Firmware for a Group

1. Type
updateFpgaGroup 26
At the Command prompt.
The following will then occur:
• The lights on the selected boards will then go red.
• The update process will then look for and then report the selected
board types in the different slots.
For example:
value = 0 = 0x0
Trinix1 > 20000528.000111: FPGA update
requested for frame 0 slot 32 (class 2, type
26). (deviceMaster.cc:977)

The search progress is displayed by a percent, when it is finished 100%

done will be displayed. See the text below:
value = 0 = 0x0
Trinix1 > 20000528.000111: FPGA update
requested for frame 0 slot 32 (class 2, type
26). (deviceMaster.cc:977)
20000528.000111: FPGA update requested for
frame 0 slot 33 (class 2, type 26).
(deviceMaster.cc:977)
20000528.000111: FPGA update requested for
frame 0 slot 34 (class 2, type 26).
(deviceMaster.cc:977)
20000528.000111: FPGA update requested for
frame 0 slot 35 (class 2, type 26).
(deviceMaster.cc:977)
20000528.000111: Updating: 4 FPGA(s) for group
8582 (class 2, type 26). (deviceMaster.cc:1015)
100% done

The update process will then begin. When a card is updated a report
will tell you if the update was a success or not and that the card must
be restarted. See the text below.
20000528.001749: FPGA update succeeded for
frame 0 slot 32, new version is 2. Card must be
re-powered to use new version. (deviceMa)

324 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

20000528.001749: FPGA update succeeded for

frame 0 slot 33, new version is 2. Card must be
re-powered to use new version. (deviceMa)
20000528.001749: FPGA update succeeded for
frame 0 slot 34, new version is 2. Card must be
re-powered to use new version. (deviceMa)
20000528.001749: FPGA update succeeded for
frame 0 slot 35, new version is 2. Card must be
re-powered to use new version. (deviceMa)
20000528.001749: Updated: 4 FPGA(s) for group
8582 (passed 4, failed 0).
(deviceMaster.cc:1079)
100% done
The lights on the selected boards will remain red.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 325

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

Verifying that the Update was Successful

You can verify that an update was successful by using the deviceListShow-
command.
1. Type
deviceListShow
At the command prompt. The device list will then appear. All updated
boards will have an asterisk by the version number.
See the example below:

2. Restart the boards.

Restarting the Updated Boards

The updated boards must be restarted for the firmware to be activated.
Follow these steps to restart the recently updated boards:
1. Type
restartFpga -1
At the command prompt.

326 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Configuration

The system will then respond with the following console message:
value = 0 = 0x0
Trinix1 > 20000528.001933: Restart FPGA in frame 0
slot 32 (class 2, type 26). (slaveDevice.cc:640)
20000528.001934: Restart FPGA in frame 0 slot 33
(class 2, type 26). (slaveDevice.cc:640)
20000528.001935: Restart FPGA in frame 0 slot 34
(class 2, type 26). (slaveDevice.cc:640)
20000528.001935: Restart FPGA in frame 0 slot 35
(class 2, type 26). (slaveDevice.cc:640)
The FPGAs have been updated. The lights on the selected boards will then
turn green.

Using Command Options

This section describes what will happen if a board type is not identified
when the updateFpgaGroup is entered and how to force an update.

Board Type Was Not Specified

When a board type is not specified and only the updateFpgaGroup
command is entered at the command prompt, a list of options will appear
as well as the available board types.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 327

Section 13 — Broadlinx Software

For example: Type

Trinix1 > updateFpgaGroup
at the command prompt. The following text will be displayed.

Forcing an Update
Entering a coma and then the number “1” after the updateFpgaGroup
command will force all boards for the selected type to update regardless of
the FPGA version.
For example:
updateFpgaGroup 26 ,1
The process will be similar to what is described in Updating the FPGAs Firm-
ware for a Group of Boards on page 322.

328 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Section 14
Broadlinx Console Commands
The following commands can be used when you are connected to the Trinix
NR-33000 (Broadlinx) board through a console session on a PC using either
a serial connection to the Console A port or an Ethernet/ Telnet connection.

Each of these commands is explained in the tables below. You can quickly
access the commands by clicking the first letter of the command below.

[A] [C] [D] [E] [F] [H] [I] [L] [M] [N] [O] [P] [R] [S] [T] [U] [V]

Table 60. A
Command Arguments Detailed Description
addBoards (void) Adds new boards in frames to the system immediately
without rebooting or waiting for the deviceMaster inac-
tive frame time.

Table 61. C
Command Arguments Detailed Description
cmActivateShow (int archiveNo, int verbose) No Help Text (rl_codeManager.cc)
cmUpdate (int who) Determine which components to update when activat-
ing.
Normally this would be left 0xf to update everything. It
can be changed for testing.
codeManagerDump (int verbose) Debug function used to dump the contents of the struc-
tures in CodeManager (since the debugger doesn't
seem to handle them very well).
Setting verbose to 0 dumps a safe version (that is, no
assumptions about pointer validity).
If verbose is true, then it assumes the pointers are valid
and tries to dump additional information about the
classes pointed to by the pointers.
codeManagerDumpArchive (int archiveNo) Debug function used to dump the contents of the Code-
Manager's archives.
codeManagerLoadFile (char *fileName, int Loads a code file.
archiveNo, bool active)
codeManagerShow (int verbose) Show the function for CodeManager class.
codeManagerShowProgress (int verbose) Show the progress of activate archive.
comBusShow () Samples the com bus and reports what devices have to
say.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 329

Section 14 — Broadlinx Console Commands

Table 61. C
Command Arguments Detailed Description
comBusStart () Starts com bus polling (or any other com bus activity)
by releasing the bus.
Do not do this unless you acquired the com bus.
comBusStop () Stops com bus polling (and any other com bus activity)
by acquiring the bus.
No EsTributary activity can proceed till the com bus is
released.
consoleHelp (char *string) String (optional): If the string matches a help entry
uniquely that help entry will be printed.
If it matches more than one entry then all matching
entries will be printed with their signature (but not help
text).

Table 62. D
Command Arguments Detailed Description
debugFilterOff (unsigned int f) Turn off bits in the debug filter. f should be hex.
debugFilterOn (unsigned int f) Turn on bits in the debug filter. f should be hex.
deviceDrop (int frame, int slot) Drop a slave
deviceListShow (int verbose, int slave) Show information for all devices
verbose shows more detailed information for the
devices
verbose = 1 shows all extended version information
verbose = 2 shows inactive devices also slaveBoard is
a boolean that allows showing the device list on a slave
board.
deviceMasterShow (void) Show device master (polling task) statistics.
When this is called the time statistics are reset.
deviceShow (int frame, int slot, int slave) Show device information for the device in the frame and
slot.
slaveBoard is a boolean to allow showing the device
data even though all the fields are not valid on the slave
board.
deviceTimeShow (void) No Help Text (deviceMaster.cc)

Table 63. E
Command Arguments Detailed Description
esShow () No Help Text (esTributary.cc)
esTribShowProgress (int show) Show progress of firmware uploads on the console.
If show is 0 turn it on, otherwise turn it off.

330 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Table 64. F
Command Arguments Detailed Description
far (char *fileName) Archives firmware. fileName is the name of a firmware
archive.
This will display the contents of the archive file with
some file information.
finger () Find out who is on the bus (shows frame, slot, type,
and version)
frameTempShow () No Help Text (frameTemp.cc)
fwDownload (int frame, int slot, char Download a file to a microcontroller. The file is checked
*fileName) to see if it is an S19 or XSVF file and downloaded
appropriately.
The device manager is suspended during the file down-
load so as not to interfere.
fwRestart (int type) Restart the board's FPGAs.
fwUpdate (int category, int type) Force loads all micro Controller and FPGA code to all
devices.
You must have the desired code loaded in the code
manager. Enter the command with no arguments for
help.

Table 65. H
Command Arguments Detailed Description
hardwareShow (int verbose) No Help Text (deviceHardware.cc)

Table 66. I
Command Arguments Detailed Description
inputStatusShow (int verbose) No Help Text (inputStatus.cc).
iod (int lvl) turns on or off IO debugging. Enter command with no
arguments for usage.
ipAddressShow () No Help Text (ipAddress.cc)

Table 67. L
Command Arguments Detailed Description
lbShow (int verbose) No Help Text (logBuffer.cc)
logFilterOff (unsigned int f) Turn off bits in the logging filter. f should be hex.
logFilterOn (unsigned int f) Turn on bits in the logging filter. f should be hex.
logManagerShow (int verbose) No Help Text (logManager.cc)

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 331

Section 14 — Broadlinx Console Commands

Table 68. M
Command Arguments Detailed Description
moduleIdShow (int verbose) Prints information about all known devices.

Table 69. N
Command Arguments Detailed Description
netConfigShow () No Help Text (netConfig.cc)
nrUpTime (void) Displays the total time the system has been alive.

Table 70. O
Command Arguments Detailed Description
outputMonitorShow (int verbose) Show output monitor status.
verbose can be 1 or 2 for more or still more verbosity.
outputStatusShow (int startingOutput, int end- Show output status.
ingOutput)

Table 71. P
Command Arguments Detailed Description
pollMetricsReset (int val) Reset debug polling metrics.
pollShow (void) Display debug polling metrics
pollStep (int n, int to, int frame, int Debug polling metrics pollStep(N, to)
slot) Step N polls or step to a polling state: 1=active, 2=inac-
tive, 3=frame, 4=dev
dev to step to is frame and slot
If N is zero toggle polling
postHandlerShow () No Help Text (prj_post.c)
printLog () Prints the log messages from the log buffer.
protectedPathSet (int startingOutput, ULONG Diagnostic use only.
lockStat, ULONG overStat) Calls the device update function like the device master
does to update the output status. The starting output is
a multiple of 32 and would be the first output on an
output card. The lockStat and overStat are bits that
indicate whether the output is present and enabled
starting with the least significant bit. If the output is
overridden then the output is disabled (off).
protectedPathsFileInit (void) Diagnostic use only.
Calls PathInit() directly.
PathInit restores the protected path data from the
paths.dat file. See the
protectedPathsReset function.
protectedPathShow (int startingOutput, int end- Show protected path output status.
ingOutput)

332 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Table 71. P
Command Arguments Detailed Description
protectedPathsReset (void) Diagnostic use only.
Sets the ForceFileReadFlag. The flag causes the next
output card update from the device master to check the
status of the network redundancy device. If the device is
not active i.e. no network connection to another board
or the other board device master is not polling, PathInit
is called.
Otherwise it just clears the output initialized flags for
every output which requires both outputs in a path to
polled again to set them ready.
PathInit restores the protected path data from the
paths.dat file and initializes the output boost values for
restored paths. If the restore fails it initializes the data to
no paths. So if the paths.dat file is corrupted all paths
will be lost until enter on the paths web page is clicked.
returns OK
protectedPathsRestore (void) Reads the paths.dat file directly into the ProtectedOut-
putPath data structure.
Returns an error if the CRC check fails but will still
overwrite path data unless the file does not exist then
nothing will be read.
protectedPathsSave (void) Diagnostic use only.
Saves the current protected path data into the paths.dat
file.
Gets the current alarm level setting and puts it into the
flags at the maximum output number to save it with the
path data. Then calls PPShare to save the Protected-
OutputPath data structure array.
protectedPathsShare (void) Diagnostic use only.
Shares the protected paths.dat file with the other board.
The other board is either one IP address number higher
or lower than the board depending on whether the
board is in the primary or secondary slot.
Creates an FTP device to copy paths.dat to. A logMsg
will show if the copy fails but there are no other mes-
sages. Need to add system log events.

Table 72. R
Command Arguments Detailed Description
realtimeTaskShow (void) No Help Text (realtimeTask.cc)
redundancyDeviceShow (int what) Show redundant board communications
redundantConfigShow () No Help Text (redundantConfig.cc)
restartFpga (int nFrame, int nSlot) Restart FPGA code for the given frame and slot
If nFrame is -1 then restart all the FPGAs that need
restarted.
Example: restartFpga -1
If nFrame is -2 then force restart all the FPGAs.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 333

Section 14 — Broadlinx Console Commands

Table 73. S
Command Arguments Detailed Description
sendLoader (int type, int frame, int slot) Updates the loader.
Example: sendLoader -1
Enter the command with no arguments to print a usage
statement.
setDaylightSavings (int on) Set daylight savings on or off.
Typically daylight savings kicks in on a certain day and
off
again on another day. The intent of this function is sim-
ply
a boolean decision about whether daylight savings is in
effect now, so the time display will account for it. We do
this by setting the start date to the first of the year and
the end date to the last of the year if it is in effect. If
it is not in effect we set both dates to the same time.
setUtcOffset (int offset) Set the local offset from UTC (Universal Time Coordi-
nated).
Offset is in minutes and must be in the range of -720
to +720 (+/- 12 hours).
snmpDevShow () No Help Text (snmpDevice.cc)

Table 74. T
Command Arguments Detailed Description
testTimeShow (void) No Help Text (deviceMaster.cc)
timeShow (unsigned long calendar- Without an argument, it displays the current system
Seconds) time.

An optional calendarSeconds argument may be speci-

fied. The argument is
converted to a readable date and time format. This is
helpful for deciphering
the timestamp printed with logEvents.

Table 75. U
Command Arguments Detailed Description
updateFirmware (int nFrame, int nSlot) Update micro Controller code for the given frame and
slot.
If nFrame is -1 then update all the firmware.
Example: updateFirmware -1
updateFpga (int nFrame, int nSlot) Update FPGA code for the given frame and slot
If nFrame is -1 then update all the firmware.
Example: updateFirmware 0.6
updateTime (void) Forces the system to find and lock to the highest prior-
ity time server.

334 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Table 76. V
Command Arguments Detailed Description
versionShow (void) No Help Text (ver.c)

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 335

Section 14 — Broadlinx Console Commands

336 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Section 15
Broadlinx Version and
Supported Trinix Boards
The following tables show the version of firmware and Broadlinx for each
type of board. The Table name will be the name of the board. For example,
Under the board type Matrix Controller, Table 78 is the NR33000 board.

This information is intended to help you understand what is required to

update from your current version to the latest version of software.

The legend below shows the meaning of the different colors that are used
in each table.

Legend

Table 77. Update Legend

Requires Send Loader
Requires CPLD
Update
CPLD

All other update requirements will be listed in the Release Notes for each
release.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 337

Section 15 — Broadlinx Version and Supported Trinix Boards

Matrix Controller
Table 78. NR33000
Date 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/04 2/11/05 9/19/05 2/17/06 8/15/06 1/18/07 10/23/ 8/19/09 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar11
Released 03 04 07 09 0

Broadlinx 2.0.0 2.1. 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
Version 1
908 Load- 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4
ers Firm-
ware
version
908 App 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 9
Firmware
version
FPGA 8 11 11 12 12 13 15 16 18 21 21 28 32
Firmware
version

Matrix
Table 79. DM33100
Date Released 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/ 2/11/ 9/19/ 2/17/ 8/15/ 1/18/07 10/23/ 8/19/ 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar1
03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 09 09 0 1

Broadlinx Ver- 2.0.0 2.1.1 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
sion
908 Loaders 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
Firmware version
908 App Firm- 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9
ware version
FPGA Firmware 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 9 9 9 9
version

Table 80. DM3350x

Date Released 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/ 2/11/ 9/19/ 2/17/ 8/15/ 1/18/07 10/23/ 8/19/ 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar1
03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 09 09 0 1

Broadlinx Ver- 2.0.0 2.1.1 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
sion
908 Loaders 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
Firmware version
908 App Firm- 3 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7
ware version
FPGA Firmware 4 7 8 9 9 9 12 15 16 20 21 21 23
version
CPLD 4 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

338 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Table 81. DM128[R]-3G
Date Released 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/ 2/11/ 9/19/ 2/17/ 8/15/ 1/18/07 10/23/ 8/19/ 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar1
03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 09 09 0 1

Broadlinx Ver- 2.0.0 2.1.1 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
sion
908 Loaders N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 4 4 4
Firmware version
908 App Firm- N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 7 8 8 8
ware version
FPGA Firmware N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 6 6 7 7
version
CPLD N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0 0 7 7

Table 82. DM256x-3G

Date Released 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/ 2/11/ 9/19/ 2/17/ 8/15/ 1/18/07 10/23/ 8/19/ 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar1
03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 09 09 0 1

Broadlinx Ver- 2.0.0 2.1.1 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
sion
908 Loaders N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 4 4 4
Firmware version
908 App Firm- N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 7 8 8 8
ware version
FPGA Firmware N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 8 14 18 22
version
CPLD N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0 0 7 7

Reference

Table 83. SR33500

Date Released 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/ 2/11/ 9/19/ 2/17/ 8/15/ 1/18/07 10/23/ 8/19/ 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar1
03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 09 09 0 1
Broadlinx Ver- 2.0.0 2.1.1 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
sion
908 Loaders 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Firmware version
908 App Firm- 3 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
ware version
FPGA Firmware 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 10 10 12 12
version
CPLD 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 339

Section 15 — Broadlinx Version and Supported Trinix Boards

Table 84. TrxSR

Date Released 30Jul10 15Mar11
Broadlinx Version 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
908 Loaders Firm- 4 4
ware version
908 App Firmware 7 8
version
FPGA Firmware ver- 6 6
sion
CPLD 4 4

Table 85. TrxOPM

Date Released 15Mar11
Broadlinx Version 3.2.0 3.3.0
908 Loaders Firm- 4
ware version
908 App Firmware 2
version
FPGA Firmware ver- 3
sion
CPLD 1

340 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Rear Panel
Table 86. RP33500
Date Released 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/ 2/11/ 9/19/ 2/17/ 8/15/ 1/18/07 10/23/ 8/19/ 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar1
03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 09 09 0 1

Broadlinx Version 2.0.0 2.1. 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
1
908 Loaders 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Firmware version
908 App Firm- 2 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
ware version

Input
Table 87. SI/HI-33110
Date Released 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/ 2/11/ 9/19/ 2/17/ 8/15/ 1/18/07 10/23/ 8/19/ 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar1
03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 09 09 0 1

Broadlinx Version 2.0.0 2.1. 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
1
908 Loaders 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Firmware version
908 App Firm- 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
ware version

Table 88. HI33200

Date Released 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/ 2/11/ 9/19/ 2/17/ 8/15/ 1/18/ 10/23/ 8/19/ 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar1
03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 09 09 0 1

Broadlinx Version 2.0.0 2.1.1 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
908 Loaders N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
Firmware version
908 App Firm- N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
ware version
FPGA Firmware N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 4 5 6 6 6 6 6
version
CPLD N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Table 89. VI33100

Date Released 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/ 2/11/ 9/19/ 2/17/ 8/15/ 1/18/ 10/23/ 8/19/ 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar1
03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 09 09 0 1

Broadlinx Version 2.0.0 2.1.1 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 341

Section 15 — Broadlinx Version and Supported Trinix Boards

Table 89. VI33100

908 Loaders N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
Firmware version
908 App Firm- N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
ware version
FPGA Firmware N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 4 5 6 6 6 6 6
version
CPLD N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Table 90. HI33300-3G

Date Released 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/ 2/11/ 9/19/ 2/17/ 8/15/ 1/18/ 10/23/ 8/19/ 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar1
03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 09 09 0 1

Broadlinx Version 2.0.0 2.1.1 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
908 Loaders N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 4 4 4
Firmware version
908 App Firm- N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 6 7 7 7
ware version
FPGA Firmware N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 2 3 4
version
CPLD N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 1 1 1

Output
Table 91. SO33110
Date Released 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/ 2/11/ 9/19/ 2/17/ 8/15/ 1/18/ 10/23/ 8/19/ 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar1
03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 09 09 0 1

Broadlinx Version 2.0.0 2.1.1 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
908 Loaders 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
Firmware version
908 App Firm- 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9
ware version
FPGA Firmware 11 12 13 13 13 14 14 16 16 19 19 19 19
version

Table 92. HO33110

Date Released 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/ 2/11/ 9/19/ 2/17/ 8/15/ 1/18/ 10/23/ 8/19/ 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar1
03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 09 09 0 1

Broadlinx Version 2.0.0 2.1.1 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
908 Loaders 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
Firmware version

342 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Table 92. HO33110
908 App Firm- 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9
ware version
FPGA Firmware 11 12 13 13 13 14 14 16 16 19 19 19 19
version

Table 93. HO33120

Date Released 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/ 2/11/ 9/19/ 2/17/ 8/15/ 1/18/ 10/23/ 8/19/ 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar1
03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 09 09 0 1

Broadlinx Version 2.0.0 2.1.1 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
908 Loaders N/A 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
Firmware version
908 App Firmware N/A 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 5 6 9 11
version
FPGA Firmware N/A 2 3 4 4 4 6 8 8 14 14 14 14
version
CPLD N/A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Table 94. HO33300-3G

Date Released 8/25/ 3/4/ 7/30/ 2/11/ 9/19/ 2/17/ 8/15/ 1/18/ 10/23/ 8/19/ 10/23/ 30Jul1 15Mar1
03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 09 09 0 1

Broadlinx Version 2.0.0 2.1.1 2.2.0 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.3.0 2.4.0 2.4.1 2.4.2 3.0.1 3.0.2 3.1.0 3.2.0 3.3.0
908 Loaders N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 4 4 4
Firmware version
908 App Firmware N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 8 9 12 14
version
FPGA Firmware N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 9 9 11 13
version
CPLD N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 2 2 2

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 343

Section 15 — Broadlinx Version and Supported Trinix Boards

344 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Section 16
Protected Paths
Protected Paths Overview
The Protected Path function is designed to monitor router outputs that
are feeding critical downstream equipment. In the event of signal loss,
the Protected Path function will automatically select the output that is
carrying the same signal and trigger the system alarm. The first indica-
tion of signal loss is that the LED on the front door should switch to red.
When using Protected Paths with an Asymmetrical frame, you can
protect up to half of the outputs. For Example, when protecting the
128x256 you would only be able to protect 128 outputs instead of 256.

Figure 239. Broadlinx Web Page for Protected Path Configuration (Example)

This section provides information about how to:

• Verifying the parameters on the Broadlinx boards
• Installing the application
• Accessing the Web page
• Using the different sections of the Web page
• Configuring the application to be used with Encore and Jupiter
control systems

Installation and Service Manual345

Section 16 — Protected Paths

Caveats
When using the Protected Paths option, you should be aware of the fol-
lowing conditions.

The time that it takes to make the switch from a primary path to a sec-
ondary path will depend on the size and configuration of the Routing
switcher, as well as the control system. For example, two 128 Routing
switchers are different than two 512 switchers. The 512 has a different
power supply and has more cards. However, Grass valley has determined
that it will take approximately three minutes to start Broadlinx and locate
86 devices.

When a Trinix frame is started, there are no connections on any of the out-
puts. Connections are made by a control system either running internally
on the Broadlinx processor or an external control module. The connections
are only linked when a control system is active. However, once an output
is enabled it will remain connected even without Broadlinx; as long as there
is power to the Trinix system. When a power loss occurs, the Trinix routing
switcher will return to the same condition that it was in when the power
loss occurred; this is due to the memory on the boards. However, this
memory is immediately deleted when a board is removed from the Trinix
router.

It will take up to four minutes for the Output Signal web page to update
and validate paths. During this time the routing switcher is fully functional.
The Broadlinx web pages display static information from the installed
hardware and are valid within four minutes of any changes. Due to the
length of the update time, Grass Valley recommends that you use your
control system for monitoring.

Adding Stand-By Boards in a Jupiter Controlled Trinix Router

Replacing an output board in a Protected Path system can result in a four
second loss of the signal on a connected output when the Trinix router is
externally controlled by a cross point control system such as Jupiter
Express or Accuswitch.
A output board that is replaced, after being removed from the Broadlinx
system, will be added back into the system within four seconds. However,
that board may be switched to an input by the control system before that
time can caus an anomaly in the output signal.

346 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Protected Paths Overview

When adding an HO33120 or HO33300 output board to the Trinix router

used in a Protected Path, the following should be observed:
• Add the board during a non-critical time as it may take up to four
seconds to recognize the board. A two-minute delay can cause signal
disruption on the active board’s outputs.
• Telnet into the control system and turn off the refresh feature; wait 30
seconds before turning on the refresh feature once the output board is
powered up.
How the refresh feature is turned off depends on the installed control
system.

Control System Refresh Command

To turn refresh off on the AccuSwitch control system:
CM1_M(A)-> refreshStop
value = 1 = 0x1
To restart refresh on the AccuSwitch control system:
CM1_M(A)-> refreshStart
value = 0 = 0x0
CM1_M(A)->
To turn refresh off on a Jupiter Express system suspend the refresh task:
SB > ts rfxp
value = 0 = 0x0
To restart refresh on a Jupiter Express system suspend the refresh task:
SB > tr rfxp
value = 0 = 0x0
SB >
For more information, contact Grass Valley’s Technical support (See Con-
tacting Grass Valley on page 4).

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 347

Section 16 — Protected Paths

Verifying the Parameters on the Broadlinx Boards

There is a known issue when a non-initialized Broadlinx board is made
Active in a Trinix router that is using Protected Paths. The Broadlinx board
will turn on all router outputs when it is installed. This action is not a defect
as it is what the board should do when it is installed in a router that does
not use Protected Paths. To prevent this condition, the Broadlinx board set-
tings must be verified before either pressing the Activate button or running
the redundancyBoardActivate console command.

Note You must follow these steps whenever a Broadlinx card is inserted (or the
network parameters are changed via the “bootChange” command) with
network parameters that are different from what is saved on the active Broad-
linx card.

You will need the following pre-requisites to complete this task:

• 2 serial cables.
• 2 serial ports on a PC or two PCs
• The Time settings have been set in the Broadlinx Current Time section
(see Current Time on page 292).
Follow these steps to before initializing a Broadlinx board:
1. Connect a serial terminal to the primary and secondary console ports
on the Trinix frame. Start a terminal session.
2. Insert the Broadlinx board into the correct slot in the Trinix frame.

3. Interrupt the boot sequence by pressing any key on the keyboard.

Pressing the space bar continuously until boot sequence stops is
recommended.

Note This step might require two people, one to pull and insert the board and one
to press a key.

4. Verify that the boot parameters are correct by pressing the P key on your
keyboard. If you need to make changes:
• Press the C key to make any needed corrections.
• Press the S key to save any changes.
5. Reboot the Broadlinx board by pressing the @ key on your keyboard
and then wait for the Broadlinx board to start.
6. Open the Broadlinx Web page of the active board and navigate to the
Protected Paths web page.
7. Click the Enter button at the bottom of the page to save the displayed
path data to the Broadlinx board (Figure 240).

348 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Verifying the Parameters on the Broadlinx Boards

Figure 240. Command Buttons on Bottom of Protected Paths Menu

Wait a minute for the information to be saved and then return to the ter-
minal session.

Return to the Terminal Session

1. Enter the ll “/ata0”command on both the primary and secondary
console connections. The Listing Directory Information will then be
shown.
2. Verify that the dates and sizes of the paths.dat file are similar
(Figure 241 on page 349).

Figure 241. Listing Directory Information

Return to the Broadlinx Web page.

3. Click the Events link at the top of the Broadlinx Web page to verify that
there are no errors logged on either the primary active web page or the
secondary or inactive web page.

Figure 242. Events Link at the Top of the Broadlinx Web Page

Return to the terminal session.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 349

Section 16 — Protected Paths

4. Enter deviceMasterShow at the command prompt for both the

primary and secondary console connections. The Device Master
information will then be shown.
5. Verify that the following values are the same on both boards:
• Frames Added
• Slaves Added

Figure 243. The Device Master Information List

If the values are the same, the Broadlinx board is ready to be initialized and
activated. If the values are not the same, contact Grass Valley’s Technical
support (Contacting Grass Valley on page 4).

350 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Broadlinx Software with Protected Paths Installation

Broadlinx Software with Protected Paths Installation

These installation steps are for existing boards that do not have the latest
software. This installation process requires multiple steps, such as:
• Copying the application files to the Compact Flash cards.
• Removing and then reinserting the Broadlinx boards back into the
Trinix frame.

Note It is recommended that you remove and update one board at a time. This
method prevents previous configuration settings from being overwritten.

• Verifying the installation.

Installing Broadlinx with Protected Paths Software

Follow these steps to install the Broadlinx with Protected Paths software,
you will need to remove and update one board at a time, the Secondary
Broadlinx board first, and then the Primary Broadlinx board.

Secondary Broadlinx Board

Follow these steps to update the Secondary Broadlinx board:
1. Remove the Secondary Broadlinx board and then install the compact
flash card in the card slot on the board.
2. Insert the Secondary Broadlinx board into the frame and wait for the
Secondary Broadlinx board to start.
3. Connect to the Primary Broadlinx controller from the Broadlinx Web
page
• Navigate to the “Frame Signals: Protected Paths” page and then
click the Enter button to save the Protected Path data file to the new
card.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 351

Section 16 — Protected Paths

Figure 244. The Enter Button on the Signals: Protected Paths Web Page

4. Wait for a minute for the file to be copied. You can verify that the file
has been started using a Telnet session to the Secondary processor
address and then entering the following at the command prompt:
ll "/ata0"
5. Activate the secondary processor. (Enter the
redundancyBoardActivate command from a console session or
press the button near the compact flash on the side with two buttons.
Figure 169 on page 264)

Primary Broadlinx Board

Follow these steps to update the Primary Broadlinx board:
1. Remove the Primary processor board and install the new compact flash
card on the primary board.
2. Insert the Primary Broadlinx board back into the system and wait for
the Primary Broadlinx board to start.
3. Connect to the Secondary Broadlinx controller from the Broadlinx Web
page
• Navigate to the Frame Signals Paths page and then click the Enter
button to save the Protected Path data file to the new card in the
Primary slot.
4. Wait for the file to be copied.

5. Activate the Primary processor (Press the button near the compact flash
on the side with two buttons or evoke the
redundancyBoardActivate
command from a console shell.) and connect the Web browser to the
Primary processor to update the system firmware.

352 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Broadlinx Software with Protected Paths Installation

Note The above steps describe how to update both processors independently. Of
course you can simply remove both processors and update them at the same
time and re-enter the protected path configuration. You can also keep the
paths web page up while the boards run and save the path data with the Enter
button once the HTTP server has started on the board the page is connected
to.

Verifying the Firmware

As with every new software installation the firmware in the system needs
to be verified.
1. Navigate to the Main Web page and then click the Configure button.

Figure 245. The Configuration Button on the Main Web Page

The Configuration page will then appear.

2. Scroll down to the bottom of the Configuration page and then click the
Firmware Management button (Figure 246).

Figure 246. The Firmware Management Button on the Configuration Web Page

The Firmware Management page will then appear.

3. Click the Activate button at the bottom of the page to update the system
firmware (Figure 247).

Installation and Service Manual353

Section 16 — Protected Paths

Figure 247. The Activate button on the Firmware Management Page

The Update Progress window will then appear.

4. Close the update progress window when the update is completed.
Restart any necessary systems from the firmware management page.

Accessing the Protected Path Page

The Protected path page can be accessed by two means: from the Naviga-
tion panel and from the Path tab on the top of the Signals page (Figure 252
on page 356).

From the Navigation Panel

Follow these steps to access the Protected Paths page:
1. Scroll down to the last item on the desired Frame.

2. Click the Path item as shown in Figure 248 below. The Paths page will
then appear.

Figure 248. The Paths Item in the Navigation Panel

3. Click the Signals button.

Figure 249. The Paths Item in the Navigation Panel

4. The Signals: Protected Paths page will then appear.

354 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Broadlinx Software with Protected Paths Installation

From the Paths Tab

Follow these steps to access the Protected Paths page:
1. Scroll down to the bottom of the Frame page.

2. Click the Signals button as shown in the figure below. The Signals:
Monitor page will then appear.

Figure 250. The Signal Button on the Paths Page

3. Click the Paths tab (Figure 251).

Figure 251. The Paths Item in the Navigation Panel

4. The Signals: Protected Paths page will then appear.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 355

Section 16 — Protected Paths

Broadlinx Protective Paths Web Page

The Protective Paths web page is part of the Signals: Monitor page. All Pro-
tected paths can be changed together by checking either the Primary or Sec-
ondary check box and selecting the Enter button.

Figure 252. Broadlinx Web Page for Protected Path Configuration (Example)

The Paths Tab

The Status Color Map

Command Section
The Command section on the Protected Paths page is where the commands
for switching paths, setting the alarm level, locking or unlocking the paths,
toggling all paths, setting the type of “fail back,” the Enter button, and the
Refresh button.

Figure 253. The Command Section

Each of these commands is explained in detail below. The commands are

from left to right and from top to bottom.

Switch All Paths

Primary radio button: Selecting the Primary radio button and then clicking
the Enter button will switch to the Primary path.
Secondary radio button: Selecting the Secondary radio button and then
clicking the Enter button will switch to the Secondary path.

356 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Broadlinx Protective Paths Web Page

Alarm type drop-down list

Selecting the type of alarm from the drop-down list will only display the
alarms for the selected type. The selections are as follows:
• No Alarms: Selecting the “No Alarms” option means any protected
path failure/changeover events will not trigger the system alarm. (A
Failure/changeover will still be indicated on the web page).
• Primary: Selecting the “Primary” option means a failure/changeover
on any Primary path will trigger the system alarm.
• Secondary: Selecting the “Secondary” option means a failure/change-
over on any Secondary and Primary path, will trigger the system alarm.
• Any Alarm: Selecting the “Any Alarm” option means a failure on any
Protected path will trigger the system alarm, even if it is not the active
path.

Enter Button
The Enter button is how changes or commands are applied. The Enter button
must be clicked after a change or a command has been made or the change
will not be applied.

Refresh Button
The Refresh button will update the Paths Web page without applying any
changes.

Lock All Paths

Lock radio button: Selecting the Lock radio button and then clicking the
Enter button will “lock” all of the paths, which will prevent the paths from
being modified or from switching. When a path has been locked, the flag
color in the Status column will change to orange if the Primary path is
locked or beige if the Secondary path is locked.
Unlock radio button: Selecting the unlock radio button and then clicking the
Enter button will “unlock” all of the paths, which will allow the paths to be
modified.
Toggle radio button: Selecting the Toggle radio button and then clicking the
Enter button will toggle the path lock. For example, if a path is locked, it will
be un-locked; the opposite is true as well.

Fail Back Drop-down List

Selecting the Fail Back option from the drop-down list will set how the
router will respond when a path fails. If a primary output for a protected
path is no longer valid, then the secondary valid path will be enabled.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 357

Section 16 — Protected Paths

The Fail Back option refers to the ability to return to the primary output of
a valid path, if the output on the secondary path becomes invalid.

Note A manual Fail Back will not return to the primary path. The primary path must
be activated manually.

The fail back options are:

• Auto: Selecting the “Auto” option will allow an automatic fail back to
the Primary path from an active secondary path. The Primary path
output must be valid when the active Secondary path’s output becomes
invalid.
• Manual: Selecting the “Manual” option will prevent the router from
automatically switching to the Primary output path from an active Sec-
ondary. You will need to manually select the primary output path from
the interface if an active secondary path fails.

Primary Column
The Primary column is generated by the system and will automatically
show the maximum number of outputs that can be protected. Signal pres-
ence is indicated by a green output number; loss of signal is indicated by a
red output number, as shown in Figure 254 below. In this example, there is
no signal on the Primary and Secondary path. This loss of both signals is
shown as a visual alarm in the Status column because neither output in the
path is active.

Figure 254. The Primary and Secondary Paths Have Failed

Signal has been lost

358 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Broadlinx Protective Paths Web Page

Secondary Column
The Secondary column is used to enter the corresponding secondary
output number for each protected pair.

Note If the Trinix router is set to be used with an Encore control system (rear panel
switch set to “INT XPT CNTL” = closed), these columns will automatically be
shown as 1-based. If the Trinix router is set to be used with a Jupiter control
system (“INT XPT CNTL” = open), these columns will automatically be shown
as zero-based.

The “-1” indicator in the secondary column means that the output is avail-
able for Protected Path operation but has not been assigned a Secondary
path. Signal presence is indicated by a black output number; loss of signal
is indicated by a red output number (Figure 254 on page 358). When an
error is detected in the Primary path the secondary path is then selected.
The status column flag will then change to yellow (Figure 255).

Figure 255. The Secondary Path Examples

The Yellow flag means an error has been detected

in the Primary path and the Secondary output
path has been selected

Status Column
The Status column uses colors to indicate the condition or status of the
path. Table 95, below, explains the colors used and their meaning.
Table 95. Status Column Flag Colors

Flag Color Definition

Green A green status flag indicates the Primary path is enabled.

A yellow status flag indicates that the Secondary output path has
Yellow
been selected.

A red status flag indicates that an error has been detected in both
Red
the Primary output signal and the Secondary output signal.

Orange An orange status flag indicates that the Primary path is locked.

A beige status flag indicates that the Secondary path has been
Beige
locked.

A gray status flag indicates that the output has already been
Gray
assigned as part of a protected path.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 359

Section 16 — Protected Paths

Table 95. Status Column Flag Colors

Flag Color Definition

A black status flag means that the output is not available because
Black
a supported board is not present in that slot.

Toggle Column
The Toggle column can be used to change from primary to secondary or
secondary to primary. In this case the Toggle box is checked and the Enter
button has been selected.

Lock/Unlock Column
The Lock/Unlock column can be used to prevent the paths from being
modified or from switching. Lock/Unlock a path by clicking the paths
associated check box in the Lock/Unlock column. Clicking the associated
paths check box in the Lock/Unlock column again and clicking the Enter
button will unlock the path.

Command Buttons
These buttons are located on the bottom of the Protected paths menu.

Figure 256. Command Buttons on Bottom of Protected Paths Menu

Remove All Paths

The Remove All Paths button will clear or un-assign, all primary and sec-
ondary path links.

CAUTION Pressing the Remove All Paths button clears the table immediately. There is
no “Undo” for this command.

Back
The Back button will return you to the Frame page.

Enter
The Enter button will apply the entered information. Whenever a config-
uration change is made, click this button to push the change to both
Broadlinx cards.

360 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Broadlinx Protective Paths Web Page

Refresh
The Refresh button will update and display the information on the active
page.
Pressing the Reload button (Located below the Grass Valley logo on the
Web page Figure 257.) will cause both pages to refresh.

Figure 257. The Reload Button

Assigning a Secondary Path

Secondary Paths output numbers can be entered manually by entering a
number in the Secondary column
Entering Multiple Output Numbers
When entering output numbers, a range of outputs can be assigned with a
single command. The range can be indicated with a “Start, Stop” entry or a
“Start+n” entry.
For example, at the Primary “12” row, in the “Secondary” field, entering
“258,260” would result in the following assignments:

Table 96. Secondary Paths Example

Primary Secondary
12 258
13 259
14 260

Entering “258+2” would have produced the same result. This entry method
will not overwrite existing assignments.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 361

Section 16 — Protected Paths

System Alarm Overview

The Trinix system alarm is designed to monitor various router functions,
including operation of cooling fans, frame power supplies, on-board power
supplies, and primary vs. secondary Broadlinx board operation. Any alarm
for these critical items will be treated as a Primary alarm. The alarm system
has two modes:
• No alarms, which will illuminate the green LED on the front door of the
router and on the Status LED on the back of the router.
• A primary alarm mode, which will illuminate the red LED on the door.

Note A primary alarm and on the Asymmetrical router will illuminate the red LED
on the door.

The system alarm is connected to the LED on the front door of the router
and the rear panel Alarm BNC connector.
A jumper on the Broadlinx board is normally set so that the alarm mode
will also enable the rear-panel Alarm BNC connector.

Note Additional information concerning the Trinix systems alarm can be found in
Troubleshooting on page 389.

Protected Path Alarms

As described above, the protected path web page will indicate failure/
change-over conditions using various colors and flags. For example, in
Figure 254, the red flag and numbers indicate failures in primary paths and
secondary paths. System alarms can also be triggered according to the
selection made using the alarm drop-down box.
In the example shown in Figure 255 on page 359, the yellow flags in the
Status column indicate failures in two primary paths. The Primary path
output 0 and 1 has failed and the system is now using secondary path
output 512 and 513 instead. If one or more secondary paths were to fail:
• For the Symmetric frame, a red LED would be seen on the front door; if
the jumper described above is in the default position, an alarm condi-
tion would also be present on the rear panel Alarm BNC connector.
• For the Asymmetric frame, a red LED would be seen on the front door
and on the rear panel Alarm BNC connector.

362 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Encore Configuration

Encore Configuration
When the router is controlled by Encore, protected path operation requires
configuration as follows:
1. Open the Global Level Configuration page if it is not already open.

2. Create two levels (one for each of the primary and secondary paths):

Figure 258. The Global Level Configuration Screen

3. Create a Physical matrix for Trinix with a single, blocked segment:

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 363

Section 16 — Protected Paths

Figure 259. The Physical Matrix Configuration Screen

4. Enable the Share option in the Segment configuration (this allows the
segment to be shared across multiple logical matrices).
5. Create two logical matrices (one for each of the primary and secondary
paths):

364 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Encore Configuration

Figure 260. The Logical Matrix Configuration Screen

6. Assign one logical matrix to the primary level, assign primary logical
matrix “Element 1” to be the Segment created in Step 3 above.
7. Assign the other logical matrix to the secondary level, assign secondary
logical matrix “Element 1” to be the Segment created in Step 3.
8. Using the Source Configure screen, select the desired source and enter
the logical matrix names connector numbers for the primary and
secondary levels on the selected source:

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 365

Section 16 — Protected Paths

Figure 261. The Source Configuration Screen

9. Using the Destination Configure screen, select the desired destination

and enter the logical matrix names and connector numbers for the
primary and secondary levels on the selected destination:

Figure 262. The Destination Configure Screen

366 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Jupiter Configuration

Note With Encore systems, there is no “follow” level locking function; in other
words, it remains possible to inadvertently perform a breakaway switch.

Jupiter Configuration
As described earlier, the control system (for example, Encore or Jupiter)
must be operated so that the secondary path is always ready to provide a
copy of the protected signal.
To simplify operation, a Jupiter control system should be configured so that
the secondary path will be switched automatically; that is, “follow” the
primary path switch. This can be arranged using “logical level mapping,”
where the primary paths are assigned to one logical level and the secondary
paths to another logical level, but both logical levels are assigned to the
same physical level. Special Switcher Input and Switcher Output tables are
then created for each of these levels.
For example, the station engineer may want to set aside a 32 x 32 block in a
TRX-NXT-512x512 router for secondary path operation. This block would
consist of a dedicated input board with inputs 257-288, and a dedicated
HO-33120 output board with outputs 257-288.

Routing Switcher Description Table

In the Jupiter Switcher Description table, a 480 x 480 block would be
assigned to the “Primary” logical level, and assigned to physical level “1.”
See Figure 263.

Figure 263. The Jupiter Switcher Description Table

Switcher Description
DM 400
Switcher Level VI RV MC Board #IN #OUT PLvl Follow Level Driver 3LI 3LO Option Audio Off Time

1 MAINROUT PRIMARY CM1 512 512 1 Binary None

2 MAINROUT SECONDAR CM1 512 512 1 PRIMARY Binary

The remaining 32 x 32 block would be defined as the “Secondary” logical

level and also assigned to physical level “1.”
The “Follow” field for the Secondary level would list the name of the
primary logical level. This will prohibit breakaway switching.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 367

Section 16 — Protected Paths

Note The “#IN / #OUT” shown in the Switcher Description table is the overall
system size. For this example the entry would be 512 x 512 for both logical
levels.

Switcher Input Tables

With two logical levels defined on the Switcher Description table, the
Switcher Input and Switcher Output tables will automatically show a
column for each level.
In order to perform two-level switching, Switcher Input tables and
Switcher Output tables are used to describe the primary and secondary
paths.

Figure 264. The Switcher Input Tables and Switcher Output Tables

Switcher Input - MAINROUT Switcher Output - MAINROUT

Logical Input Logical Ouput Pass
PRIMARY SECONDAR Security S-T PRIMARY SECONDAR
Name Name word

1 MCONTROL 001 257 1 XMIT - 001 257

2 VT01 002 258 2 VT01 - 002 258

3 VT02 003 259 3 VT02 - 003 259

4 VT03 004 260 4 VT03 - 004 260

32 AUX4 032 288 -

32 AUX4 032 288
33 AUX5 033 -
33 AUX5 033
34 AUX5 034 -
34 AUX5 034

256 CH25 256 256 SAT13 - 256

257 CH26 289 257 SAT14 - 289
258 CH27 290 258 SAT15 - 290

480 BARS 512 480 MAT MON - 512

In this example, the Switcher Input table for the Primary level would list
480 inputs: 001 through 256 and 289 through 512. The Secondary level
would list 32 inputs: 257 through 288.
The same logic would apply to Switcher Output tables.
In this configuration, selecting “XMIT” as an output and “MCONTROL” as
an input will cause two switches to be made.
Finally, CP Input and CP Output Set tables would be used to tie Category/
Number selections to the logical names of the desired inputs and outputs
on both levels.
For more information about logical level mapping, refer to the Jupiter
Installation and Operating manual.

368 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Operation Notes

Operation Notes
Jupiter Systems

CAUTION For Jupiter-controlled routers, replacing an HO-33120 output board that is

part of a protected path scheme will cause a momentary loss of video on the
active output. In other words, video will be lost on the board not being
replaced. This interruption will continue for several seconds. Maintenance
personnel should therefore plan on such replacement only when the pro-
tected output is not being used on air.

This interruption time is equivalent to the protected path fail-over time. It

is also a function of the control system refresh. When a board is replaced in
the system, the outputs do not become active until switched by the control
system refresh. Once a board is replaced in the system it must be polled by
the Com Bus and be found to be part of a protected path before the output
will be disabled or enabled appropriately.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 369

Section 16 — Protected Paths

370 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Section 17
Encore Control
The Trinix router was designed so it can be controlled by a variety of control
systems. Trinix can be controlled using a direct Ethernet (“CPL”) integra-
tion with the Grass Valley Encore or SMS 7000 control system.
The system is operated in the Internal Crosspoint Bus Control mode,
during which the Broadlinx board sends commands to the Crosspoint bus.
The Broadlinx option, which consists of Broadlinx software running on the
NR-33000 Sync/NIC/OPM board, allows Trinix to be controlled by SMS
7000 or Encore. This control uses Grass Valley CPL (Control Point Lan-
guage) through an Ethernet connection.
Refer to the SMS 7000 or Encore documentation for specific information
about either control system. LAN components are described in Figure 265
on page 372.

Encore Control of Trinix

When the Trinix routing switcher is under Encore control, a LAN connec-
tion will be used. The Figure 265 on page 372 shows the recommended con-
nections when the system is equipped with redundant NR-33000 boards
and redundant Encore controllers. The PC is being used to configure the
Encore Control panel and is also available for Broadlinx or SNMP moni-
toring.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 371

Section 17 — Encore Control

Figure 265. Encore Connections to Trinix

PC

Ethernet switch

EN1 EN1

Primary Encore controller Secondary Encore controller

EN2 EN2

Ethernet switch Ethernet switch

NIC A NIC B
connector connector

Trinix

Encore control panels

Encore and Broadlinx

The Broadlinx board is equipped with a plug-in, rechargeable lithium-
ion battery that is used to back up the Routing switcher status for
Encore-controlled systems. This battery is rated for approximately 500
power cycles. If there is a power failure and the battery fails to provide
power, the Broadlinx board will need to obtain the router status from
the Encore System Control Module (this data will be sent automati-
cally). For the location of this battery, see Figure 168 on page 264.

Internal XPT (Crosspoint) Control

The XPT (Crosspoint) must be set to “closed” to be controlled by Encore.
The Closed setting is used when the Trinix Crosspoint bus is controlled by
an internal Crosspoint controller (for example, an NR-33000 Sync/NIC/
OPM board). This setting is used when the Broadlinx board (NR-33000) is
in turn being controlled through a LAN connection to a control system such
as a Grass Valley Series 7000 Signal Management System or Encore.
For more information, see SMS 7000 / Encore Control on page 108.

372 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Sync Reference
For information about Sync Reference, see Sync Reference Connections on
page 157.

Encore Configuration of Protected Paths

Encore may be configured to use the Protected Paths option. See Encore
Configuration on page 363 in the Protected Paths section.
If the Trinix router is set to be used with an Encore control system, the INT
XPT CNTL switch must be set to closed. The Secondary columns will auto-
matically be shown as 1-based, as opposed to zero-based if he Trinix router
is used with a Jupiter control system.
There is no “follow” level locking function when the routing switcher is
controlled by Encore; in other words, it remains possible to inadvertently
perform a breakaway switch.

Single Matrix Router Controlled by Encore

On a system cold start, the status is pulled into the RCE from the matrix
(because it is the most likely to reflect the actual status of the crosspoints).
In other scenarios, where the RCE is known to have good status (That is,
when a backup matrix controller is inserted into a matrix with an already
active primary controller, or when a single matrix controller is removed
and replaced), the MAP can be pushed down into the matrix.
The scenarios below should be considered when using a single matrix con-
troller:
1. Replacing a single NR board, with a cleared map, into a running
system:
• The RCE MAP is pushed down to the new NR board because the
system detected the board going off-line and then back on-line (the
system knows that the RCE MAP is current and can be pushed
down to the matrix controller.
This should work the same with a dirty map.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 373

Section 17 — Encore Control

2. Rebooting Encore with no matrix present:

• The Trinix routing switcher, with single NR card already installed,
is powered up after Encore. Encore will detect the addition of the
matrix controller but there was no correspondence prior to deletion
of the same matrix controller.
• This condition tells Encore that the RCE MAP may not be correct
and the MAP should be read back from the matrix and used to
refresh the RCE status.
This is also true when Encore rebooted and starts up with a Trinix
routing switcher already running with single NR card installed.

374 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Section 18
Analog Input Processing
TRX-VI-33100 Module
The TRX-VI-33100 video input module consists of a 16-input “uni-
versal” base board (VI-33100) and a 16-input digital-only mezzanine
board (HI-33201).
The VI-33100 universal base board auto-senses and accepts 16 com-
posite analog SD, digital SD, or digital HD signals in any combination
and passes them in digital SD or digital HD form (as appropriate) to the
Trinix matrix board. When analog signals are received, an extensive set
of gain, phase, filtering, and other adjustments are available for each
signal. These adjustments are summarized below.

Analog Processing Control

Adjustments for analog signals connected to the VI-33100 base board
include the following:

• Save/recall settings • Insert Error Detec- • Blank video (per

tion and Handling VBI line)
• Mono mode
(EDH) data
• Add setup (per VBI
• Setup on/off
• Contrast / Y gain line)
• Chroma kill
• Saturation / • Reserve VBI line for
• Comb/trap filter chroma gain data
• AGC on/off • Brightness / Y • Horizontal timing
offset
• Manual gain control • Detail enhancement
• Hue / chroma
• ACC on/off • Display channel
phase
status
• Manual chroma
• Notch decode on/
control
off (VBI)
• Chroma kill (VBI)

Installation and Service Manual375

Section 18 — Analog Input Processing

Customizing Analog Video Processing Settings

When analog video signals are fed to the VI-33100 base board, each of the
16 inputs can be adjusted independently. The adjustments are made using
a terminal connection to the board.

Terminal Setup
1. Connect a straight-through RS-232 serial cable from the VI-33100 card
front-edge 9-pin connector to the serial port of a PC with
HyperTerminal software (or equivalent).

Note An alternative to HyperTerminal is the freeware application Tera Term 3.1.3,

which can be set to a 160- column display. This allows a wide display mode
that will show the settings for all 16 inputs at once.

The location of the D connector is shown in Figure 110 on page 196; the
pinouts are shown in Table 97.

CAUTION The Trinix system should not be operated with the front door open for
extended periods. Therefore the configuration cable should be disconnected
from the VI-33100 board when not in use and the door closed.

Table 97. VI-33100 Card-edge Connector Pinouts.

Shielded 9-Pin D;
Pin
socket contacts
1
2 TX
Pin Pin
3 RX
D-9 Female 5 1
4
5 Logic GND
6
7
Pin Pin
9 6 8
9
Shield

2. Launch the terminal application (for example, HyperTerminal) on the

PC.
3. Set the terminal protocol to: 115200 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no
parity bit, and no flow control.
A terminal window and a blinking cursor should appear.
4. Press ENTER.
You should see the main menu:

376 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 TRX-VI-33100 Module

Figure 266. Main Menu

======= MAIN Menu Options =======

1.) Setup Composite Video.

2.) Setup Video Processing.
3.) Setup Vertical Blanking.
4.) Setup Timing.
5.) Setup Picture Enhancer.
6.) Display Channel status.
7.) Save or Recall a Configuration File.
Select a menu option:

5. At this point you may want to change the display settings to get as
many rows and columns, and as small a font, as practical.
For example, with HyperTerminal go to View > Font > and select a 6-
point font. Then go to File > Properties > Settings > Emulation > ANSI
> Terminal Setup and select 50 rows x 132 columns.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 377

Section 18 — Analog Input Processing

General notes about the setup application editor

Here are a few conventions about the setup application editor
that may be helpful to know:
• Tables are edited using keyboard shortcut keys (not the
mouse or cursor keys). The applicable shortcuts are listed
on the bottom of the display.
• The first step is usually selection of one of the 16 inputs
(channels).
• Channel numbers are hex-based. E.g., channel “a” on this
table is as input “11” on the rear panel of the router. A table
of equivalent channel numbers is shown below in
Table 98.)
• For entries where ON or OFF is selected, 0 = OFF and 1 =
ON.

Table 98. Channel Number Equivalents.

Correspondin
Input number g input
as on router number as
rear panel shown on
table
1 0
2 1
3 2
4 3
5 4
6 5
7 6
8 7
9 8
10 9
11 a
12 b
13 c
14 d
15 e
16 f

378 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 TRX-VI-33100 Module

Main Menu Options

This section assumes that the Terminal Setup procedure has been per-
formed.

1.) Setup Composite Video

Composite video selections are summarized below in Table 99.
These adjustments are made in the composite video path (before
decoding to component digital format) and apply to all lines (active
picture and VBI)
The actual menus are shown on Figure 267 on page 379.
Table 99. Composite Video Selections.

Processing
Range/Choices
Function Default
Resolution
Type
Set to “0” for color input signal.
Monochrome Input 0 May be set to “1” when a monochrome input signal is the source; this
mode turns off luminance notch filters and chroma output.
Set to ”0” when no setup is present (Japanese NTSC)
Remove setup from video 1 Set to “1” when setup is present (US NTSC).
Set to “0” for color signal.
Chroma Kill 0 Set to “1” to turn off chroma difference signals (but leave luminance
notch filter on).
1 = No filter
2 = Comb filter
3 = Trap filter 1.20
Video Decode Mode 2
4 = Trap filter 0.87
5 = Trap filter 0.72
6 = Trap filter 0.50
Set to “0” to enable manual video gain control.
Video Input AGC
1 Set to “1” for Automatic Gain Control.
(before digitizing) Operation is based on sync tip and peak video.
Input Video Gain 100.0 50.0–200% (0.5% steps). 100% = 1 V p-p.
Set to “0” to enable manual chroma gain control
Enable ACC 1
Set to “1” for Automatic Chroma Control
50.0–200%
Input Chroma Gain 100.0
(0.5% steps)

Figure 267. Setup composite video menu for NTSC, showing setup for all 16 inputs. PAL display is
similar. (Only Input 0 is connected in this example.)

Video Composite In -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference - Input 0: Line Rate: 525 Line Type: NTSC (M, J)
================================================================================
Disable (Off) 0 Video Decode Mode: Input Video Gain:
Enable (On) 1 No filter 1 50.0 to 200.0% (0.5% steps)
Comb filter 2
Trap filter 1.20 3
Trap filter 0.87 4
Trap filter 0.72 5
Trap filter 0.50 6
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+------------------------------------- Channel Line Rate -------+
| |
| +--------------------------------- Monochrome Input (On/Off) |
| | +----------------------------- Remove Setup from Video (On/Off) |
| | | +------------------------- Chroma Kill (On/Off) |
| | | | +--------------------- Video Decode Mode |
| | | | | +----------------- Enable AGC (On/Off) |

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 379

Section 18 — Analog Input Processing

| | | | | | +------------- Input Video Gain (%) |

| | | | | | | +----- Enable ACC (On/Off) |
| | | | | | | | |
+---+---+---+---+---+---+-------+--------------------------------------------+--
0, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 525
1, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
2, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
3, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
4, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
5, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
6, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
7, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
8, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
9, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
a, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
b, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
c, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
d, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
e, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
f, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 N/A
Press: '0 ~ 9' or 'A ~ F' to select channel to edit.
Press: 'M' to move/copy channel configuration.
Press: 'Z' to set ALL channels to factory defaults.
Press 'ESC' to return to Main Menu.

When an input (channel) is selected, the display will show the values for
that particular channel. For example, selecting “0” will display the values
for channel 0:

Figure 268. Composite video setup menu for one channel (NTSC shown).

Video Composite In -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference - Input 0: Line Rate: 525 Line Type: NTSC (M, J)
================================================================================
Selected - Input 0: Line Rate: 525 Line Type: NTSC (M, J)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Disable (Off) 0 Video Decode Mode: Input Video Gain:
Enable (On) 1 No filter 1 50.0 to 200.0% (0.5% steps)
Comb filter 2
Trap filter 1.20 3
Trap filter 0.87 4
Trap filter 0.72 5
Trap filter 0.50 6
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+------------------------------------- Channel Line Rate -------+
| |
| +--------------------------------- Monochrome Input (On/Off) |
| | +----------------------------- Remove Setup from Video (On/Off) |
| | | +------------------------- Chroma Kill (On/Off) |
| | | | +--------------------- Video Decode Mode |
| | | | | +----------------- Enable AGC (On/Off) |
| | | | | | +------------- Input Video Gain (%) |
| | | | | | | +----- Enable ACC (On/Off) |
| | | | | | | | |
+---+---+---+---+---+---+-------+--------------------------------------------+--
0, 0, 0, 0, 2, 1, 100.0, 1 525
To Disable/Enable Monochrome Only Input; press: 'Q'.
To Remove/Insert Setup from Video; press: 'E'.
To Enable/Disable Chroma Kill; press: 'R'.
To Set Video Decode Mode; press: 'T'.
To Disable/Enable AGC; press: 'D'.
To Decrement/Increment Input Video Gain; press: 'F'/'G'.
To Disable/Enable ACC; press: 'C'.

Press: 'ESC' to ABORT changes and return to the previous Menu.

Press: 'Enter' to ACCEPT changes and select a different channel.
Press: 'Y' to revert back to last settings.
Press: 'Z' to set THIS channel to factory defaults.

2.) Setup Video Processing

These adjustments are made in the video path and apply to all lines
(active picture and VBI)
Video processing selections are summarized in Table 100.
The actual menus are shown in Figure 269 on page 381.

380 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 TRX-VI-33100 Module

Table 100. Video Processing Selections

Processing
Range/Choices
Function Default
Resolution
Type
Insert EDH 0 1 = Allows EDH to be inserted
50–200%
Contrast / Y Gain 100%
(0.5% steps)
50–200%
Saturation / Chroma Gain 100%
(0.5% steps)

Brightness / Y Offset 0 Mv ±400 mV

(3 mV steps)
±180 degrees
Hue / Chroma Phase 0 degrees
(1.4 degree steps)

Figure 269. Video processing menu for NTSC, showing setup for all 16 inputs. PAL display is
similar. (Only Input 0 is connected in this example.)

Video Processor -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference - Input 0: Line Rate: 525 Line Type: NTSC (M, J)
================================================================================
Disable (Off) 0
Enable (On) 1
Contrast/Y Gain: Brightness/Y Offset:
50.0% to 200.0% (0.5% steps) -100.1 to +100.1Deg (0.7mV steps)
Saturation/Chroma Gain: Hue/Chroma Phase:
50.0% to 200.0% (0.5% steps) -180.0 to +180.0Deg (1.0Deg steps)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+------------------------------------------- Channel Line Rate --------+
| |
| +----------------------------------- Insert EDH (On/Off) |
| | +------------------------------- Contrast / Y Gain (%) |
| | | +---------------------- Saturation / Chroma Gain (%) |
| | | | +-------------- Brightness / Y Offset (mV) |
| | | | | +------ Hue / Chroma Phase (Deg) |
+---+---+--------+-------+-------+-------------------------------------------+--
0, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 525
1, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
2, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
3, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
4, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
5, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
6, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
7, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
8, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
9, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
a, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
b, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
c, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
d, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
e, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
f, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 N/A
Press: '0 ~ 9' or 'A ~ F' to select channel to edit.
Press: 'M' to move/copy channel configuration.
Press: 'Z' to set ALL channels to factory defaults.
Press 'ESC' to return to Main Menu.

When an input (channel) is selected, the display will show the values for
that particular channel:

Figure 270. Video processing setup menu for one channel (NTSC shown).

Video Processor -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference - Input 0: Line Rate: 525 Line Type: NTSC (M, J)
================================================================================
Selected - Input 0: Line Rate: 525 Line Type: NTSC (M, J)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Disable (Off) 0
Enable (On) 1
Contrast/Y Gain: Brightness/Y Offset:
50.0% to 200.0% (0.5% steps) -100.1 to +100.1Deg (0.7mV steps)
Saturation/Chroma Gain: Hue/Chroma Phase:

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 381

Section 18 — Analog Input Processing

50.0% to 200.0% (0.5% steps) -180.0 to +180.0Deg (1.0Deg steps)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+------------------------------------------- Channel Line Rate --------+
| |
| +----------------------------------- Insert EDH (On/Off) |
| | +------------------------------- Contrast / Y Gain (%) |
| | | +---------------------- Saturation / Chroma Gain (%) |
| | | | +-------------- Brightness / Y Offset (mV) |
| | | | | +------ Hue / Chroma Phase (Deg) |
+---+---+--------+-------+-------+-------------------------------------------+--
0, 0, 100.0, 100.0, +000.0, +000.0 525
To Disable/Enable Insert EDH press: 'W'.
To Decrement/Increment Contrast/Y Gain press: 'F'/'G'.
To Decrement/Increment Saturation/Chroma Gain press: 'V'/'B'.
To Decrement/Increment Brightness/Y Offset press: 'H'/'J'.
To Decrement/Increment Hue/Chroma Phase press: 'N'/'M'.
Press: 'ESC' to ABORT changes and return to the previous Menu.
Press: 'Enter' to ACCEPT changes and select a different channel.
Press: 'Y' to revert back to last settings.
Press: 'Z' to set THIS channel to factory defaults.

3.) Setup Vertical Blanking

The Notch Decode Mode and the Chroma Kill selections apply to all
lines in the VBI.
Each line pair in the VBI can be set to pass or blank the incoming signal.
In NTSC systems, each of these line pairs can also be set to add Setup if
desired.
The number of line pairs that can carry data can be extended if desired.
For example:
• In NTSC line pairs 10/273 through line pairs 20/283 are normally
available for data. By using this menu, up to four additional line
pairs can be reserved for data use.
• In PAL systems, up to five additional line pairs can be reserved.
Vertical blanking selections are summarized in Table 101.
The actual menus are shown in Figure 271 on page 383.
Table 101. Vertical Blanking Selections.

Processing
Range/Choices
Function Default
Resolution
Type
Notch Decode Mode 1 With Notch Decode set to “1” and Chroma Kill set to “0,” chroma is
passed.
With Notch Decode set to “2” and Chroma Kill set to “1,” chroma is
Chroma Kill 0 blanked and luminance is passed.

382 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 TRX-VI-33100 Module

Processing
Range/Choices
Function Default
Resolution
Type
0 = Pass this line pair as is
1 = Blank this line pair
Blank Setup 0
2 = (NTSC only) Add Setup to this line pair
3 = (NTSC) Add Setup and blank this line pair
NTSC-Reserve additional lines for data:
0 = No additional lines reserved
1 = Reserve lines 21 and 284
2 = Reserve lines 22 and 285
3 = Reserve lines 23 and 286
4 = Reserve lines 24 and 287

Reserve Line for Data Mode 0 PALx-Reserve additional lines for data:
0 = No additional lines reserved
1 = Reserve lines 24 and 337
2 = Reserve lines 25 and 338
3 = Reserve lines 26 and 339
4 = Reserve lines 27 and 340
5 = Reserve lines 28 and 341

Figure 271. Vertical blanking interval menu for NTSC, showing setup for all 16 inputs. PAL display
is similar. (Only Input 0 is connected in this example.).

Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) -

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference - Input 0: Line Rate: 525 Line Type: NTSC (M, J)
================================================================================
Disable (Off) 0 NTSC-Reserve Data: VBI:
Enable (On) 1 None 0 None 0
21/284 1 Blank Line Only 1
Notch Decode: 22/285 2 Add Setup Only 2
Notch Decode 1 23/286 3 Setup & Blank 3
Pass Through 2 24/287 4
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+------------- Channel Line Rate --------+
| +----------- Notch Decode Mode |
| | +--------- Chroma Kill (On/Off) |
| | | +------- Reserve Line for Data Mode |
| | | | |
| | | | |<-------- VBI Line Pairs ------>|<- Data ->| |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | |E F G H I J K L M N O |P Q R S | |
| | | | |10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20|21 22 23 24| |
+-+-+-+-------------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------------+--
0,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 525
1,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
2,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
3,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
4,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
5,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
6,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
7,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
8,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
9,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
a,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
b,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
c,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
d,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
e,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
f,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 N/A
Press: '0 ~ 9' or 'A ~ F' to select channel to edit.
Press: 'M' to move/copy channel configuration.
Press: 'Z' to set ALL channels to factory defaults.
Press 'ESC' to return to Main Menu.
When an input (channel) is selected, the display will show the values for
that particular channel:

Figure 272. Vertical blanking interval setup menu for one channel (NTSC shown).

Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) -

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference - Input 0: Line Rate: 525 Line Type: NTSC (M, J)
================================================================================
Selected - Input 0: Line Rate: 525 Line Type: NTSC (M, J)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Installation and Service Manual383

Section 18 — Analog Input Processing

Disable (Off) 0 NTSC-Reserve Data: VBI:

Enable (On) 1 None 0 None 0
21/284 1 Blank Line Only 1
Notch Decode: 22/285 2 Add Setup Only 2
Notch Decode 1 23/286 3 Setup & Blank 3
Pass Through 2 24/287 4
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+------------- Channel Line Rate --------+
| +----------- Notch Decode Mode |
| | +--------- Chroma Kill (On/Off) |
| | | +------- Reserve Line for Data Mode |
| | | | |
| | | | |<-------- VBI Line Pairs ------>|<- Data ->| |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | |E F G H I J K L M N O |P Q R S | |
| | | | |10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20|21 22 23 24| |
+-+-+-+-------------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--------------+--
0,1,0,0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 525
To Set Notch Decode Mode Press: '['.
To Disable/Enable Chroma Kill Mode press: ']'.
To Set Reserve for Data Mode Press: '\'.
To Set VBI Pair Data Press: 'A' thru 'W'.
Press: 'ESC' to ABORT changes and return to the previous Menu.
Press: 'Enter' to ACCEPT changes and select a different channel.
Press: 'Y' to revert back to last settings.
Press: 'Z' to set THIS channel to factory defaults.

4.) Setup Timing

The following adjustments are made after conversion to digital format
and apply to all lines (active picture and VBI).
Vertical blanking selections are summarized in Table 102.
The actual menus are shown in Figure 273 on page 384.
Table 102. Timing Selections.

Processing
Range/Choices
Function Default
Resolution
Type
525 signal: 0.0 - 857.5 pixels (0.5 steps)
Horizontal Timing 000.0 625 signal: 0.0 - 863.5 pixels (0.5 steps)

Figure 273. Summary of timing setup for NTSC, showing setup for all 16 inputs. PAL display is
similar. (Only Input 0 is connected in this example.)..

Timing -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference - Input 0: Line Rate: 525 Line Type: NTSC (M, J)
================================================================================
Horizontal Timing:
0.0 to 857.5 pixels (0.5 steps) for 525
0.0 to 863.5 pixels (0.5 steps) for 625
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+---------------------------- Channel Line Rate ----------+
| |
| +-------------------- Horizontal (pixels) |
+-------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+--
0, 000.0 525
1, 000.0 N/A
2, 000.0 N/A
3, 000.0 N/A
4, 000.0 N/A
5, 000.0 N/A
6, 000.0 N/A
7, 000.0 N/A
8, 000.0 N/A
9, 000.0 N/A
a, 000.0 N/A
b, 000.0 N/A
c, 000.0 N/A
d, 000.0 N/A
e, 000.0 N/A
f, 000.0 N/A
Press: '0 ~ 9' or 'A ~ F' to select channel to edit.

384 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 TRX-VI-33100 Module

Press: 'M' to move/copy channel configuration.

Press: 'Z' to set ALL channels to factory defaults.
Press 'ESC' to return to Main Menu.

When an input (channel) is selected, the display will show the values for
that particular channel:

Figure 274. Timing setup menu for one channel (NTSC shown).

Timing -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference - Input 0: Line Rate: 525 Line Type: NTSC (M, J)
================================================================================
Selected - Input 0: Line Rate: 525 Line Type: NTSC (M, J)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Horizontal Timing:
0.0 to 857.5 pixels (0.5 steps) for 525
0.0 to 863.5 pixels (0.5 steps) for 625
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+---------------------------- Channel Line Rate ----------+
| |
| +-------------------- Horizontal (pixels) |
+-------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+--
0, 000.0 525
To Decrement/Increment Horizontal position press: 'F'/'G'.
Press: 'ESC' to ABORT changes and return to the previous Menu.
Press: 'Enter' to ACCEPT changes and select a different channel.
Press: 'Y' to revert back to last settings.
Press: 'Z' to set THIS channel to factory defaults.

5.) Setup Picture Enhancer

Picture enhancement selections are summarized in Table 103.
The actual menus are shown in Figure 275 on page 385.
Table 103. Picture Enhancement Selections.

Processing
Range/Choices
Function Default
Resolution
Type
0 = Disabled
1 = Low
Detail Enhancer Level 0
2 = Medium
3 = High

Figure 275. Picture enhancer menu for NTSC, showing setup for all 16 inputs. PAL display is
similar. (Only Input 0 is connected in this example.).

Picture Enhancer -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference - Input 0: Line Rate: 525 Line Type: NTSC (M, J)
================================================================================
Detail Enhancer Level:
Disabled 0
Low 1
Medium 2
High 3
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+---------------------------- Channel Line Rate ----------+
| |
| +-------------------- Detail Enhancer |
+-------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+--
0, 0 525
1, 0 N/A
2, 0 N/A
3, 0 N/A
4, 0 N/A

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 385

Section 18 — Analog Input Processing

5, 0 N/A
6, 0 N/A
7, 0 N/A
8, 0 N/A
9, 0 N/A
a, 0 N/A
b, 0 N/A
c, 0 N/A
d, 0 N/A
e, 0 N/A
f, 0 N/A
Press: '0 ~ 9' or 'A ~ F' to select channel to edit.
Press: 'M' to move/copy channel configuration.
Press: 'Z' to set ALL channels to factory defaults.
Press 'ESC' to return to Main Menu.

When an input (channel) is selected, the display will show the values for
that particular channel (NTSC shown):

Figure 276. Picture enhancer menu for one channel.

Picture Enhancer -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reference - Input 0: Line Rate: 525 Line Type: NTSC (M, J)
================================================================================
Detail Enhancer Level:
Disabled 0
Low 1
Medium 2
High 3
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+---------------------------- Channel Line Rate ----------+
| |
| +-------------------- Detail Enhancer |
+-------+--------------------------------------------------------------------+--
0, 0 525
To Set Picture Enhancer Mode press: 'Q'.
Press: 'ESC' to ABORT changes and return to the previous Menu.
Press: 'Enter' to ACCEPT changes and select a different channel.
Press: 'Y' to revert back to last settings.
Press: 'Z' to set THIS channel to factory defaults.

6.) Display Channel status

These menus are shown below.

Figure 277.

======= Channel(s) Status Menu Options =======

1.) Display status of channels: 0 thru 3.
2.) Display status of channels: 4 thru 7.
3.) Display status of channels: 8 thru 11.
4.) Display status of channels: 12 thru 15.
5.) Display status of All channels: 0 thru 15.
Note:
For option '5', The terminal application must be setup
to display a width of at least 160 characters. Otherwise
the data may be unreadable!
Press 'ESC' to return to Main Menu.
Select a menu option:

When a group of inputs (channels) is selected, the display will show the
values for those channels:

Figure 278. Channel Status display for four channels.

Channels: 0 1 2 3
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Video Composite In:
Monochrome Input (On/Off) : 0 0 0 0

386 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 TRX-VI-33100 Module

Remove Setup (On/Off) : 0 0 0 0

Chroma Kill (On/Off) : 0 0 0 0
Video Decode Mode : 2 2 2 2
AGC Enable (On/Off) : 1 1 1 1
Input Video Gain (%) : 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0
ACC Enable (On/Off) : 1 1 1 1
Input Chroma Gain (%) : 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0
Video Processor:
Insert EDH (On/Off) : 0 0 0 0
Contrast/Y Gain (%) : 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0
Saturation/Chroma Gain (%): 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0
Brightness/Y Offset (mV) : +000.0 +000.0 +000.0 +000.0
Hue/Chroma Phase (Deg) : +000.0 +000.0 +000.0 +000.0
Vertical Blanking NTSC:
Notch Decode Mode : 1 1 1 1
Chroma Kill (On/Off) : 0 0 0 0
Reserve for Data Mode : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 10/273 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 11/274 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 12/275 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 13/276 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 14/277 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 15/278 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 16/279 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 17/280 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 18/281 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 19/282 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 20/283 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 21/284 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 22/285 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 23/286 : 0 0 0 0
Vertical Blanking PALx:
Notch Decode Mode : 1 1 1 1
Chroma Kill (On/Off) : 0 0 0 0
Reserve for Data Mode : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 06/319 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 07/320 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 08/321 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 09/322 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 10/323 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 11/324 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 12/325 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 13/326 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 14/327 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 15/328 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 16/329 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 17/330 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 18/331 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 19/332 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 20/333 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 21/334 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 22/335 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 23/336 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 24/337 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 25/338 : 0 0 0 0
VBI Line Pair: 26/339 : 0 0 0 0
Timing NTSC:
Horizontal (pixels) : 000.0 000.0 000.0 000.0
Vertical (lines) : 000 000 000 000
Freeze Mode : 0 0 0 0
Timing PALx:
Horizontal (pixels) : 000.0 000.0 000.0 000.0
Vertical (lines) : 000 000 000 000
Freeze Mode : 0 0 0 0
Picture Enhancement:
Detail Level : 0 0 0 0
Press any key to return to the "Status Menu"

Note Vertical timing and Freeze modes are not implemented.

7.) Save or Recall a Configuration File

This selection allows a setup to be saved on the PC and recalled. For
example, if a particular source requires a video level correction, a file
named “VTR3_in7_vid_gain” could be downloaded when needed.

To Save a File On PC
This procedure assumes that video adjustments have been made (as
described above) and need to be saved for future use.
a. Select “Save or Recall a configuration file.”

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 387

Section 18 — Analog Input Processing

b. Select “Save a configuration file to the PC.”

Response:
Prepare your terminal emulator to receive (upload) data now...

c. For HyperTerminal, select “Transfer > Receive File.”

d. Create or browse to a directory on the PC where the file will be
stored.
Suggestion: “c:\Program Files\Thomson\Trinix\VI-33100.”
e. Select Xmodem for the protocol. Then select “Receive.”
f. Enter a filename where the data will be saved on the PC.
Suggestion: “config1.”

Note If you enter the name of an existing file the software will automatically append
a number suffix and save the file under the new name.

g. Select “OK.”

To Recall a File From a PC to a VI Board

a. Select “Save or Recall a configuration file.”
b. Select “Recall and LOAD a configuration file from PC.”
Response:
Prepare your terminal emulator to send (download) data now...

c. For HyperTerminal, select “Transfer > Send File.”

d. Browse to the desired configuration file on the PC.
e. Select “Xmodem” for the protocol. Then select “Send.”

388 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Section 19
Troubleshooting
Note It may take up to 30 seconds for the 3G modules alarms to clear when
starting up the boards. The boards are operational; however the voltage
sensing alarms can take up to 30 seconds to clear. This length of time to
clear the alarms is due to the fact that the 3G modules are using new
voltage averaging algorithms in the 908 Micro controllers to compare
and verify all voltages.

LEDs

Front panel

Display Meaning

POWER/ALARM Red Master alarm for this frame: check internal alarm LEDs

Green Power on, frame OK

Secondary warning: single fan failure or secondary NR board is active. Check

internal alarm LEDs
Amber
Note Only in the Symmetrical frames.

Off System is not powered

Power supplies

Legacy Frames

Display Meaning

AC OK Green AC Power OK

Off Supply is not powered (or is not operating)

DC OK Green DC power OK

Installation and Service Manual389

Section 19 — Troubleshooting

Off Supply is not powered (or is not operating)

Asymmetrical Frames
Power Supply

LED Display Meaning

On The AC input is OK.

Blinking The Input is out of limit.

On The DC input is OK.

Blinking The supply is overloaded.

On This is an Over-temperature warning.

Blinking Service is required.

On There is a fault.

OPM Board

Display Meaning

PWR Red In use

Green In use

ALARM Red Primary alarm

Green no alarms

IN USE Red Alarm

Green OK

390 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Fans

Display Meaning

FAN ALARM Red Check fan

Off Fan OK

Input boards - SI-33110 SD, and HI-33110 HD

Part side

Ref Display Meaning

ALARM DS601 Red Master alarm for this board. A DC supply has failed to turn on

Off Board OK

-5VAOK DS31 Green -5 VA supply OK

Off Check -5 VA supply

IN_USE DS602 Reserved for future use

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 391

Section 19 — Troubleshooting

Input boards - HI-3G

Ref Display Meaning

IN_USE DS610 Reserved for future use

XC_DONE DS521 Green The FPGA is configured.

Off Configure FPGA.

ALARM DS601 Red Master alarm for this board. A DC supply has failed to turn on

Off Board OK

7V DS3004 Green The Gain cell power is OK.

Off Check the Gain cell power.

3V3 DS3003 Green The Equalizer and Misc. power is OK.

Off Check the Equalizer and Misc. power.

2V5 DS3002 Green The SDI and Bus Driver power is OK.

Off Check the SDI and Bus Driver power.

-1V3 DS3001 Green The FPGA Core power is OK.

Off Check the FPGA Core power.

+3V3D DS968 Green The COM bus Digital logic is OK.

Off Check the COM bus Digital logic.

+3V3 DS1 Green The local 3.3 logic is OK.

Off Check the local 3.3 logic.

The Main Conversion is OK.

5V DS963 Green
Feeds 7v conversion.

Off Check the Main Conversion.

392 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Output board - HO-3G

Part side
Ref Display Meaning

XC_DONE DS568 Green The Xilinx FPGAs are properly configured

Off FPGAs failed to configure

P5V DS901 Green +5 V supply voltage present

Off Check +5 V supply

INUSE DS3 Yellow 1 or more outputs now in use on this board*

Off No CrossPoints in use on this board

ALARM DS901 Red Master alarm for this board

Off Board OK

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 393

Section 19 — Troubleshooting

Matrix board - DM-128R-3G and DM-128-3G

Part side
Ref Display Meaning

Primary alarm for this board. A DC supply has failed on the board or
ALARM DS401 Red
the microcontroller

Off Board OK

XC DONE DS402 Green The FPGA is properly configured

Off FPGA failed to configure

XPT-A

IN USE DS2175
Yellow
XPT A is being used

XPT A is not being used

Off

ACTIVE DS2203 Yellow XPT A is the active cross point (X PT)

Off XPT A is not the active cross point (X PT)

PS FAIL
DS940 Red XPT A’s power has failed

Off XPT A’s power is OK

XPT-B (Only on DM128R)

IN USE DS2123
Yellow
XPT B is being used

XPT B is not being used

Off

ACTIVE DS2022 Yellow XPT B is the active cross point (X PT)

Off XPT B is not the active cross point (X PT)

PS FAIL DS937 Red XPT B’s power has failed

Off XPT B’s power is OK

394 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Matrix board - DM-256R-3G and DM-256-3G

Part side
Ref Display Meaning

Primary alarm for this board. A DC supply has failed on the board or
ALARM DS3 Red
the microcontroller

Off Board OK

XC DONE DS4 Green The FPGA is properly configured

Off FPGA failed to configure

IN USE A DS5
Yellow CrossPoint is being used (Both CrossPoints can be “in Use” at the
same time)

XPT A is not being used

Off

PS1 FAIL
DS1 Red XPT ’s power has failed

Off XPT’s power is OK

IN USE B DS7
Yellow CrossPoint is being used (Both CrossPoints can be “in Use” at the
same time)

XPT B is not being used

Off

PS FAIL
DS2 Red XPT ’s power has failed

Off XPT’s power is OK

Matrix board - DM-256R-3G and DM-256-3G (Mezzine)

Part side
Ref Display Meaning

ALARM DS401 Red Primary alarm for this board. A DC supply has failed on the board or
the microcontroller

Off Board OK

XC DONE DS402 Green The FPGA is properly configured

Off FPGA failed to configure

XPT-A

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 395

Section 19 — Troubleshooting

IN USE DS2175
Yellow
XPT A is being used

Off XPT A is not being used

ACTIVE DS2203 Yellow XPT A is the active cross point (X PT)

Off XPT A is not the active cross point (X PT)

PS FAIL
DS940 Red XPT A’s power has failed

Off XPT A’s power is OK

XPT-B (Only on DM256R)

IN USE DS2123 Yellow XPT B is being used

XPT B is not being used

Off

ACTIVE DS2022 Yellow XPT B is the active cross point (X PT)

Off XPT B is not the active cross point (X PT)

PS FAIL
DS937 Red XPT B’s power has failed

Off XPT B’s power is OK

396 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Matrix board - DM-33100

Part side

Ref Display Meaning

PALARM DS952 Red Primary alarm for this board. A DC supply has failed on the board or
the microcontroller

Off Board OK

3V3 DS951 Green 3V3 is OK

Off Check 3V3

INUSE DS901 Yellow 1 or more CrossPoints now in use on this board

Off No CrossPoints in use on this board

-3V3 DS31 Green -3V3 is OK

Off Check -3V3

DONE DS950 Green The Xilinx FPGAs are properly configured

Off FPGAs failed to configure

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 397

Section 19 — Troubleshooting

512 Matrix board - DM-33501/33502

Part side

Ref Display Meaning

IN USE A DS201_1 Yellow A CrossPoint is active in XPT_A IC

Off No CrossPoints are active in XPT_A IC

P2V5A OK DS204_1 Green P2V5A converter is OK (for XPT_A side)

Off P2V5A converter has failed

IN USE B DS201_2 Yellow A CrossPoint is active in XPT_B IC

Off No CrossPoints are active in XPT_B IC

XC DONE DS402 Green FPGAs are configured

Off FPGAs are not configured

ALARM DS401 Red One or more fault conditions exist

Off Normal operation

P2V5B OK DS204_2 Green P2V5B converter is OK (for XPT_B side)

Off P2V5B converter has failed

P5V DS901 Green Logic supply is OK

Off Logic supply has failed

PS1 OK - Green Main DC-DC Converter 1 is OK

Off Main DC-DC Converter 1 has failed

PS2 OK - Green Main DC-DC Converter 2 is OK

Off Main DC-DC Converter 2 has failed

398 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Output boards - SO-33110 SD and HO-33110 HD

Part side
Ref Display Meaning

INUSE DS3 Yellow 1 or more CrossPoints now in use on this board*

Off No CrossPoints in use on this board

DONE DS501 Green The Xilinx FPGAs are properly configured

Off FPGAs failed to configure

+10V DS41 Green +10 V supply OK

Off Check +10 V supply

+5VA DS31 Green +5VA supply OK

Off Check +5VA supply

3.3V DS51 Green 3.3 V supply OK

Off Check 3.3 V supply

ALARM DS601 Red Master alarm for this board

Off Board OK

*Trinix 512 Output Card Used as Power Source Only - In some expanded TRX-NXT-512x512 systems, a single
output board will be the only board in one section of the router. This board is used to provide power to certain
components on some of the input boards. Although the INUSE light is always Off, this board should not be
removed (for example, to swap with another output board). If the board is removed, alarm lights will appear
and some loss of Broadlinx web page browsing functionality may occur. However, the router will continue to
switch, even when the Broadlinx board is being used to control the system (as in Encore applications).

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 399

Section 19 — Troubleshooting

Output board - HO-33120 HD

Part side
Ref Display Meaning

XC_DONE DS568 Green The Xilinx FPGAs are properly configured

Off FPGAs failed to configure

P5V DS901 Green +5 V supply voltage present

Off Check +5 V supply

INUSE DS3 Yellow 1 or more outputs now in use on this board*

Off No CrossPoints in use on this board

P_ALRM_N DS901 Red Master alarm for this board

Off Board OK

SR-33000 Sync Reference / Output Monitor (OPM) board

Part side

Ref Display Meaning

RX DS509 Green Receive COM bus activity

TX DS510 Green Send COM bus activity

DIP side

IN_USE DS Yellow Output Monitor is active

XLD Green Xilinx load done

3V3+OK Green 3V3 supply OK

5V+OK Green 5V+ supply OK

10VOK Green 10 V supply OK

REF_ALRM B Yellow Reference B alarm

400 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 REF_ALRM A Yellow Reference A alarm

PALRM Red Primary alarm

SALRM Red Primary alarm

- single fan failure

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 401

Section 19 — Troubleshooting

NR-33000 NIC/Sync/OPM board

Part side

1 - Software Switch Override

Active LED

2 - Solid

3 - Blinking

Number Ref Display Meaning

1 SW OVR DS1 Yellow Software override switches

This card has control of Com Bus and/or CrossPoint Bus. CrossPoint bus
2 ACTIVE DS2 Solid yellow
active. Internal XPT control.

This card has control of Com Bus. Com bus activity. External XPT control
3 ACTIVE DS2 Dim or blinking yellow
(for example, the Jupiter VM-3000).

402 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 DIP side

11 - LAN link OK

10 - LAN activity

9 - Secondary alarm

8 - Primary alarm

7 - Reference B alarm

6 - Reference A alarm

5 - 10 V (A and B) Supplies OK

4 - 5 V A supply OK

3 - 3V3 supply OK

2 - Xilinx FPGA load complete

1 - Output monitor is active

Number Ref Display Meaning

1 USE DS Yellow Output monitor is active

2 XOK Green Xilinx load done

3 3V3 Green 3V3 supply OK

Off Check 3V3 supply

4 5VA Green 5 VA supply OK

Off Check 5 VA supply

5 10V Green 10 V (A and B) supplies OK

10 V (A and/or B) supply alarm. Failure of both A and B will also trigger

Off
PALARM.

6 A REF Yellow Reference A alarm

7 B REF Yellow Reference B alarm

8 PALR Red Primary alarm

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 403

Section 19 — Troubleshooting

9 SALR Red single fan failure

10 LAN Flashing green LAN activity

11 LINK Green LAN link OK

Dual 7-segment LEDs

12 - Dual 7-segment LEDs

See NR-33000 dual 7-segment LED CPU codes on page 405.

Number Ref Display Meaning

Dual 7-seg-
12 Numeric pattern CPU codes. See below
ment LEDs

Dual 7-seg-
Broadlinx code is loading (faster flashing indicates increase in interrupt
ment LEDs Flashing decimal points
rate)

Dual 7-seg- CPU running with Broadlinx code loaded (faster spinning indicates
ment LEDs Spinning pattern
increase in interrupt rate)

404 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 NR-33000 dual 7-segment LED CPU codes
The CPU codes LEDs indicate the “boot phases” and are followed by a cir-
cular pattern. These “boot phases” are indicated by a sequence of letters/
numbers. The following text describes their meaning.

S.0 End of bus 0 first access to segment display if the start type is
BOOT_COLD
S.1 End of bus 1
B.C If there is a memory check sum error in the EEPROM.
1.C If there is an I2C time out while communicating with the SDRAM module.
B r If there is a DRAM error (unable to determine the memory size,
Not a 32,64,128,256 MB memory bank).
3 2 If a 32 MB memory bank.
6 4 If a 64 MB memory bank.
2 8 If a 128 MB memory bank.
5 6 If a 256 MB memory bank.
1 2 If a 521 MB memory bank.
S.2 End of Bus 2
S.3 End of Bus 3
S.4 End of Bus 4
S.5 End of Bus 5
S.6 End of Bus 6
S.7 End of Bus 7

Start VxWorks Boot process:

sysPhysMemSize() Retrieve auto-sized memory.

B r Bad Ram
3 2 32 MB ram
6 4 64
2 8 128
5 6 256
1 2 512

PCI bus
P.0 When the pci system is initialized and the switch is in position 7 PC-BP
The lsd increments while the PC BIOS is configuring the bus.
P.P. When the secondary bus, atu and bridge initialization is done.
P.P After the private PCI bus devices have been initialized and PCI init is
done.
E.1. If unable to do a configuration read on the secondary PCI bridge. Dev 7
E.2. If unable to do a configuration read on the secondary PCI bridge. Dev 0
While initializing the Ethernet chip.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 405

Section 19 — Troubleshooting

Signal flow
Signal flow for a 256 x 256 router, which requires four matrix cards, is
shown below.

Figure 279. Signal Flow for a 256 x 256 Router

HS-33200

INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS

225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160 097-128 065-096 033-064 001-032 225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160 096-128 065-096 033-064 001-032

INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS

225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160 225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160 097-128 065-096 033-064 001-032 097-128 065-096 033-064 001-032

OUTPUT [001-032]
OUTPUT [033-064]
OUTPUT [065-096]
OUTPUT [097-128]
OUTPUT [129-160]
OUTPUT [161-192]
OUTPUT [193-224]
OUTPUT [225-256]

INPUT [001-032]
INPUT [033-064]
INPUT [065-096]
INPUT [097-128]
INPUT [129-160]
INPUT [161-192]
INPUT [193-224]
INPUT [225-256]

071827609_Signal Flow for a 256 x 256 Router

Signal flow for a 512 x 512 router, which requires four DM-33500 modules
is shown in Figure 280 on page 407.

406 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Figure 280. Signal Flow for a 512 x 512 Router

Outputs 225-256

Outputs 193-224

Outputs 161-192

Outputs 129-160

Outputs 97-128
Inputs 481-512

Inputs 449-480

Inputs 417-448

Inputs 385-416

Outputs 65-96

Outputs 33-64

Inputs 97-128
Outputs 1-32

Inputs 65-96

Inputs 33-64

Inputs 1-32
B B A A
A B
CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS CONTROL

(mez) (base)
512-481 480-449 448-417 416-385 225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160 128-97 96-65 64-33 32-1 97-128 65-96 33-64 1-32
B A

CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS CONTROL

(base) (mez)
384-353 352-321 320-289 288-257 97-128 65-96 33-64 1-32 256-225 224-193 192-161 160-129 225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160

CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS CONTROL

(mez) (base)
512-481 480-449 448-417 416-385 481-512 449-480 417-448 385-416 384-353 352-321 320-289 288-257 97-128 65-96 33-64 1-32

B A
CONTROL INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS CONTROL

(base) (mez)
383-352 351-320 319-288 287-256 353-384 321-352 289-320 257-288 512-481 480-449 448-417 416-385 225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160

B
A
A B A B
Outputs 353-384

Outputs 321-352

Outputs 289-320

Outputs 257-288

Outputs 481-512

Outputs 449-480

Outputs 417-448

Outputs 385-416
Inputs 353-384

Inputs 321-352

Inputs 289-320

Inputs 257-288

Inputs 225-256

Inputs 193-224

Inputs 161-192

Inputs 129-160

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 407

Section 19 — Troubleshooting

Signal flow for a 256 x 256 router, which requires four matrix cards, is
shown below in Figure 281.

Figure 281. Signal Flow for a 256 x 256 Router

HS-33200

INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS

225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160 097-128 065-096 033-064 001-032 225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160 096-128 065-096 033-064 001-032

INPUTS OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS

225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160 225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160 097-128 065-096 033-064 001-032 097-128 065-096 033-064 001-032

OUTPUT [001-032]
OUTPUT [033-064]
OUTPUT [065-096]
OUTPUT [097-128]
OUTPUT [129-160]
OUTPUT [161-192]
OUTPUT [193-224]
OUTPUT [225-256]

INPUT [001-032]
INPUT [033-064]
INPUT [065-096]
INPUT [097-128]
INPUT [129-160]
INPUT [161-192]
INPUT [193-224]
INPUT [225-256]

Signal flow for a 256 x 256 router, which requires four matrix cards, is
shown below in Figure 282 on page 409.

408 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Figure 282. Signal Flow for a 256 x 512 Router
OUTPUT [481-512] OUTPUT [353-384]

OUTPUT [449-480] OUTPUT [321-352]

OUTPUT [417-448] OUTPUT [289-320]

OUTPUT [385-416] OUTPUT [257-288]

INPUTS OUTPUTS CONTROL

(mez)
INPUT [225-256]
001-032 033-064 065-096 097-128 385-416 417-448 449-480 481-512

INPUT [193-224]

INPUTS OUTPUTS CONTROL

INPUT [161-192]
(base)
INPUT [129-160]
225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160 353-384 321-352 289-320 257-288

INPUTS OUTPUTS CONTROL

(mez) INPUT [097-128]

001-032 033-064 065-096 097-128 129-160 161-192 193-224 225-256

INPUT [065-096]

INPUTS OUTPUTS CONTROL INPUT [033-064]

(base)
INPUT [001-032]
225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160 097-128 065-096 033-064 001-032

071827609_TRX-NXT-256X512
OUTPUT [097-128] OUTPUT [225-256]

OUTPUT [065-096] OUTPUT [193-224]

OUTPUT [033-064] OUTPUT [161-192]

OUTPUT [001-032] OUTPUT [129-160]

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 409

Section 19 — Troubleshooting

Incompatible Switches
Grass Valley recommends that you do not use un-managed switches with
Broadlinx.
The following, is a list of switches that do not work with Broadlinx. This list
is not all encompassing and will be added to as new conflicting switches
are found.

Table 104.
Brand Model
Dynex DX-ESW8
Zonet ZFS3124

410 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Section 20
Trinix Fiber Option
Trinix Fiber Boards Overview
Each Trinix Fiber board provide 32 channels for both Input and Output
board sets and may be used to send or receive SD, HD and 1080p/3G
video signals through fiber optic cables. These boards use optical Input
and Output SFP modules for fiber optic connectivity.
These Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) devices are plugged into the
Trinix rear panel, and fit into sockets that have been designed to house
the SFPs. These SFPs may be added, removed, or changed without dis-
rupting the operation of the Trinix Routing switcher.
Both fiber-optic and electrical BNC boards can be used in the same
Trinix frame for mixed optical and electrical signal traffic. The fiber-
optic boards may be used in all of the current Trinix Routing switchers.

Note A Fiber Input card is not currently available for the 512x1024 frame.

Section Overview
This section provides the cleaning requirement, including best prac-
tices, specification information, and the installation steps for the Trinix
Fiber Input board, a Trinix Fiber Output board, and Trinix Fiber Rear
Panel.

Installation and Service Manual411

Section 20 — Trinix Fiber Option

Fiber Optic Cleaning Requirement

Use an industry standard fiber optic cleaning kit, including oil-free com-
pressed air, to clean the fiber connectors and the fiber end faces before
making any fiber optic cable mating connections (including sub-module
installation) and after every time the cables are disconnected. This cleaning
requirement helps ensure optimum performance of the fiber optic inter-
face.
Industry standard fiber optic cleaning kits can be purchased on the web
and in electronics stores.

Best Practices
This section provides Grass Valley’s best practices recommendations for
the precautions, cleaning instructions, service instructions, and trouble-
shooting steps.

Fiber-Optic Cable Precautions

Fiber-optic cables and connectors are easily damaged. Consider the fol-
lowing precautions:
• Avoid kinks in the cable.
• Avoid subjecting the cable to a high-tension force (even momentarily).
• Do not bend the cable beyond the minimum permissible bend range
specified for the cable.
• Do not twist the cable when connecting it to equipment.
• Insert connectors straight and fully into their corresponding sockets.
• Inspect all fiber endfaces and judge they are either acceptable or unac-
ceptable.
• Replace the dust caps on cable and panel connectors immediately after
disconnecting a cable in fiber-optic cable systems. Keep the dust caps
clean.

Cleaning Fiber-optic Connectors

CAUTION Have the correct equipment before beginning optical connector inspection
and cleaning procedures.

Fiber-optic connectors must be cleaned every time they are mated and un-
mated; it is essential that fiber-optic users develop the necessary discipline
to always clean the connectors before they are mated. Use a commercially
available cleaning kit specifically designed for fiber-optic connectors and
carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions.

412 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Fiber Boards Overview

WARNING Fiber-optic connectors need to be cleaned every time they are mated and
un-mated; it is essential that fiber-optic users develop the necessary dis-
cipline to always clean the connectors before they are mated.

Follow these steps when cleaning fiber-optic connectors:

• When cleaning the connector sections, include the tips and sides of fer-
rules, the interior walls of alignment sleeves, and the interior and exte-
rior of connector shells.
• For plugs, the interior surfaces of alignment sleeves and the tips of
ferrules are to be cleaned with a cleaning stick treated with the
appropriate fluid. (Cleaning sticks with a slender design are avail-
able that allow alignment sleeves to be cleaned without having to
detach them.)
• For jacks, it is important to clean both the tips and sides of the com-
pletely protruding ferrules.
• Clean both the insides and outsides of the male and female connector,
as the shells tend to attract dust and metal particles.
• The fiber end face and ferrule must be absolutely clean before it is
inserted into a transmitter or receiver.
• Mate the connector immediately! Do not let the connector collect dust
before connecting.
• Air can be used to remove lint or loose dust from the port of a trans-
mitter or receiver to be mated with the connector. Never insert any
liquid into the ports.
The Trinix Fiber modules make extensive use of surface-mount technology
and programmed parts to achieve compact size and adherence to
demanding technical specifications. Circuit modules should not be ser-
viced in the field unless otherwise directed by Customer Service.

Power-up Diagnostics Failure

If the module has not passed self-diagnostics, do not attempt to trouble-
shoot. Return the unit to Grass Valley.

Troubleshooting
Electronic Circuit Breaker: The electronic circuit breaker works during a
fault condition or an over-current that stops the module.
Remove the module and replace it in the frame. If the problem persists,
please refer to the Grass Valley Customer Service.
Module Repair: If the module is still not operating correctly, replace it with
a known good spare and return the faulty module to a designated Grass
Valley repair depot. Call your Grass Valley representative for depot loca-
tion.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 413

Section 20 — Trinix Fiber Option

Refer to Contacting Grass Valley on page 4 at the front of this document for
information on contacting Grass Valley Customer Service.

414 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Specifications

Specifications
The functionality of the fiber Input and Output boards are similar to the
HI/HO-33300 coax input and output boards.
For the SFP specifications, see the current version of the 8943RDA/-D/-
DFR (SD/HD/3G-SDI Fiber Ready Reclocking DA), Installation manual on
Grass Valleys web site (see Contacting Grass Valley on page 4 for more
information).
http://www.grassvalley.com/assets/media/3540/
Fiber_Optic_SFP_Devices.pdf
The Trinix Fiber rear panels accept cage mount SFPs and do not use the
mounting strap designated by the "-K" option.
Supported SFP Fiber Optic Modules

Supported SFP Fiber Optic Sub-Modules

The Trinix Fiber Input or Output board can be populated with one of the
SFP dual transmitter, transceiver, or dual receiver sub-modules that are
listed below in Table 105.
Table 105. Supported SFP Fiber Optic Sub-Modules

SFP Model Number Function

SFP-3G-M1DRX Dual receiver for 1270 nm to 1610 nm

SFP-13103G-M1DRX Dual transmitter for 1310 nm

SFP-CWDM3G-5 Dual transmitter 1310 nm and 1330 nm

SFP-CWDM3G-6 Dual transmitter 1350 nm and 1370 nm

SFP-CWDM3G-7 Dual transmitter 1390 nm and 1410 nm

SFP-CWDM3G-8 Dual transmitter 1430 nm and 1450 nm

SFP-CWDM3G-1 Dual transmitter 1470 nm and 1490 nm

SFP-CWDM3G-2 Dual transmitter 1510 nm and 1530 nm

SFP-CWDM3G-3 Dual transmitter 1550 nm and 1570 nm

SFP-CWDM3G-4 Dual transmitter 1590 nm and 1610 nm

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 415

Section 20 — Trinix Fiber Option

FO-33300 Fiber Optic Output Board

Outputs </= 32, using 16 dual output SFP modules

Fiber Connector LC type connector (determined by the SFPs used)

Maximum Data Rate 3.0 Gb/s

Minimum Data Rate 270 Mbps

Data Reclocking Switch selectable on an output-by-output basis. The Output Board provides
reclocking for 270Mbps 1.485, and 3Gp/s or non-reclocking for other data
rates.

Output Jitter 3G: </= 0.3 unit interval (excluding incoming jitter)
270 Mbit and 1.5G: </= 0.2 unit interval

Output Optical Power Determined by the selected SFP module

Board Edge LED 6 green "Power" LEDs

1 red "Alarm" LED
1 yellow "In Use" LED
1 green "FPGA Ready" LED

Rear Panel LED 1 LED per channel

FI-33300 Fiber Optic Input Board

Inputs </= 32, using 16 dual Input SFP modules

Fiber Connector LC type connector (determined by the SFPs used)

Maximum Data Rate 3.0 Gb/s

Minimum Data Rate 270 Mbps

Input Optical Power Determined by the selected SFP module. It may be necessary to add input
optical attenuators to reduce the optical input power. This may be necessary
even with the SFP-13103G-M1DRX transmitter. Attenuators are usually
needed in CWDM systems, unless very long cables are used or other opti-
cal losses are present in the interconnecting cabling.

Board Edge LED 8 green "Power" LEDs

1 red "Alarm" LED
1 yellow "Active" LED
1 green "FPGA Ready" LED

Rear Panel LED 1 LED per channel

416 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Specifications

LED Displays
The Input and Output boards have the standard Trinix LEDs:
• Red - Alarm.
• Yellow - In use or Active
• Green - Power supply presence and programmed FPGAs.
The rear panel has dual color red and green LEDs, which will display the
light above the SFP socket. The LEDs provide a visual indicator for valid
SFP module and signal presence.

Note If no LEDs are lighting up the SFP has not been installed.

Input Rear Panel LEDs

Color Condition Indication

None Off No SFPs have been installed.

Red Solid Indicates an SFP alarm. This can be due to insufficient or excess optical
signal input.
The alarm bits can be read through the Broadlinx console port.

Green Solid Indicates the reclocker is locked and the SFP is recognized with no alarms.

Yellow Solid Indicates the reclocker is not locked and the SFP is recognized with no
alarms.

Red and Yellow Blinking Indicates the reclocker is not locked. Indicates an unrecognized or invalid
SFP is installed. No SFP alarms will be reported if the LED is blinking red.

Red and Green Blinking Indicates the reclocker is locked and the input signal may be valid. Indicates
an unrecognized or invalid SFP is installed. No SFP alarms will be reported
if the LED is blinking red.

Input Board LEDs

Figure 283. LEDs Input Board

071827612_input-LED_R1

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 417

Section 20 — Trinix Fiber Option

Number Color Indication

606 Green FPGA is loaded

637 Yellow Active board

518 Red Alarm Condition

910-940 Green Power indicators

Output Rear panel LEDs

Color Condition Indication

None Off No SFPs have been installed.

Red Solid Indicates an SFP alarm. This can be due to several errors, such as insuffi-
cient output power or excess output power, over or under temperature, and
over or under power supply voltages.
The alarm bits can be read through the Broadlinx console port.

Green Solid Indicates the reclocker is locked and the SFP is recognized with no alarms.

Yellow Solid Indicates the reclocker is not locked and the SFP is recognized with no
alarms.

Red and Yellow Blinking Indicates the reclocker is not locked. Indicates an unrecognized or invalid
SFP is installed. No SFP alarms will be reported if the LED is blinking red.

Red and Green Blinking Indicates the reclocker is locked and the input signal may be valid. Indicates
an unrecognized or invalid SFP is installed. No SFP alarms will be reported
if the LED is blinking red.

Green and Yellow Alternating blinking Indicates the reclocker is in the force bypass mode, or is not reliably locked,

Green and Off Alternating blinking Indicates the reclocker is locked and the output is disabled. Indicates an
unrecognized or invalid SFP is installed. No SFP alarms will be reported if
the LED is blinking red.

Yellow and Off Alternating blinking Indicates the reclocker is not locked and the output is disabled. Indicates an
unrecognized or invalid SFP is installed. No SFP alarms will be reported if
the LED is blinking red.

Note The reclocker will not lock when in the force-bypass mode.

418 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Specifications

Output Board LEDs

Figure 284. LEDs Output Board

071827612_Output_LED-R1
Number Color Indication

605 Green FPGA is loaded

637 Yellow Active board

520 Red Alarm Condition

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 419

 Section 20 — Trinix Fiber Option

Trinix Fiber Boards Installation

If you purchased the Trinix Fiber option with a Trinix Routing switcher, the
boards will be installed at the factory. You will only need to install the boards
on-site if they are to be used in an existing routing switcher, or used as a
replacement board.
Installing the three fiber boards requires that you remove the standard BNC
rear panel and coax Input or Output boards, if they are present. The Input or
Output boards will then be plugged in from the front of the Trinix chassis.
The three fiber boards and the SFPs are sensitive to ESD. Use static handling
precautions when installing or removing the sub-module. See ESD Protection
on page 27 for more information.
Grass Valley recommends that you install the boards in the lowest slot
number first. For example, if you had three the Fiber boards, they should be
installed in slots 1-3.
If you are using a Trinix Multiviewer (TMV), install the Fiber boards in slots
after the TMV. The required Output slots for the TMV are listed in Table 106.
The recommended Output slot for the Fiber board are also provided.

Table 106. TMV and Fiber Board Location

Routing Switcher Required Output Slot Recommended Output Slot Numbers for
Size Numbers for the TMV the Fiber Boards
256x512 Slots 20 - 27 Slots 28 and above
128x128* Slots 24 and 26 Slots 28 and above
256x256* Slots 24, 26, 28, and 30 Slots 31 and above
512x512* Slots 48, 50, 52, and 54 Slots 55 and above

The TMV board may be placed in any Output slot for the 128x256 and the
512x1024 Trinix Routing switcher. See the Trinix Multiviewer Installation and
Service manual for more information about the TMV boards.

420 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Fiber Boards Installation

DIP Switch Settings

Figure 285.
Closed Open
SYNC SEL A
SYNC SEL B

S705

AUTO RCLK

BYPASS 0
BYPASS 1
BYPASS 2
BYPASS 3
BYPASS 4
S701
BYPASS 5
BYPASS 6
BYPASS 7

BYPASS 8
BYPASS 9
BYPASS 10
BYPASS 11
BYPASS 12 S702
BYPASS 13
BYPASS 14
BYPASS 15

BYPASS 16
BYPASS 17
BYPASS 18
BYPASS 19
BYPASS 20
BYPASS 21
S703
BYPASS 22
BYPASS 23

BYPASS 24
BYPASS 25
BYPASS 26
BYPASS 27
BYPASS 28
S704
BYPASS 29
BYPASS 30
BYPASS 31

Switch settings are shown in Table 107.

Table 107. Reclock settings for HD output boards.

S705-8 Switch on S701

“AUTO RCLK” through S704

Reclock all outputs if possible. Bypass unlocked outputs.

Closed All closed
(Default setting)

Bypass all outputs Open All open

Reclock selected outputs if possible, otherwise turn OFF. Closed for selected out-
Bypass all other outputs Open puts. All others open

Installing the Trinix Fiber Option

You will need to remove the standard BNC rear panel and coax Input or
Output boards, if they are present. Follow these steps to install the Trinix
fiber option:
1. Remove the coaxial Input or Output boards from the front of the
routing switcher. Move to the rear of the router.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 421

Section 20 — Trinix Fiber Option

2. Remove the standard BNC rear panel from the rear of the Trinix frame.
a. Remove the top and bottom screw for the rear panel (Figure 286).
Hold the rear panel in place to prevent possible damage from it
falling.

Figure 286. Remove the Screws from the Standard Rear Panel
Remove the top screw

071827612_Fiber_Inst_BNC

Remove the bottom

screw

b. Remove the BNC rear panel from the frame.

3. Install the preferred SFP modules to the rear panel. These modules may
include transmitters with different light frequencies for Coarse
wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) operation.

Note For the Installation instructions for the SFP, see the documentation that came
with the SFP.

4. Place the Fiber-Optic rear panel into the slot where the BNC rear panel
was removed.
a. Verify that the SFPs will unplug from the panel, before installing the
rear panel. It is easier to remove a stuck SFP if the panel is not
installed in the frame.

422 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix Fiber Boards Installation

5. Align the panel in the proper direction. The rear panel circuit board
near the end of the panel marked with "32," must fit into the card guide
inside the frame.
If the panel does not fit properly into the hole, or is at an angle relative
to the rear panel surface of the frame, the panel is probably not in the
card guide.
6. Fasten the rear panel to the frame using the provided screws.

Figure 287. Install the Screws for the Trinix -Fiber Rear Panel
Install the top screw

SFP Module connections

071827611_Fiber_rear-pnl

Install the bottom

screw

7. Insert the Fiber-Optic Input or Output cables into the SFP modules.
Move to the front of the Trinix frame.
8. Locate the front slot corresponding to the correct rear panel. For
example, Input slot for Input rear panel.
9. Insert the Fiber Input and Output boards into their corresponding
locations from the front of the Trinix frame and then lock them into
place.
a. To insert the boards, carefully slide the Fiber board along the board
guides while keeping the ejector levers spread apart; slide the board
in until the levers make contact.
b. Fold the levers toward each other until the front ejector levers snap
into place, which will lock the board into the frame.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 423

Section 20 — Trinix Fiber Option

10. Close the Trinix routing switcher’s door. Keep the routing switcher’s
door closed during operation to maintain optimum cooling conditions.

424 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Appendix 21
Front-Air Vent
Front-Air Vent (FAV) Overview
The Front-Air Vent (FAV) is an optional accessory that is installed on the
bottom of a Trinix NXT frame. The FAV will draw cool air through the front
of the frame to cool the Trinix router. The FAV provides another option for
the “bottom to top” airflow feature of the Trinix, which is “natural, proven,
and quiet.” An FAV is quiet and can be used in human work spaces. There
are two versions of the FAV, one for the Symmetrical frames, and one for the
512x1024 Asymmetrical frame. See the 512x1024 Asymmetrical Frame
installation instructions for the 2 RU FAV installation procedure.

Symmetrical Frame
The 1RU Front Air Vent requires a minimum of 2RUs during installation.
This requirement is because the FAV must have enough room to momen-
tarily lower the FAV while the sides or “ears” are slid into place on each side
of the Trinix (Figure 288).

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 425

Appendix 21 — Front-Air Vent

Figure 288. The FAV Front and Side View

Side or “Ear”

Front View
Screws Aligned With the
Cut Outs

Router

FAV Overlap-
ping Router
Side View

Once the FAV is installed, it will occupy 1RU. The additional 1RU that was
used during installation could then be used for other equipment or
however your needs demand.
This section describes the installation process of the FAV. This option is
designed to work with the Trinix 256x256, 512x512, 128x256, and 256x512
frames.

Note The FAV will not work with the 128x128 frame.

426 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Installation Procedure

Installation Procedure
Follow the installation steps to ensure correct installation of the FAV.

Tools Required
• The proper sized Phillips screwdriver,
• A light source (as needed).

Installing the FAV

Note The 1RU Front Air Vent requires a minimum space of 2RUs during installa-
tion.

Follow these steps to install the FAV:

1. Position the FAV under the Trinix frame and align the Rack-Mounting
holes on the FAV with the holes that are on the frame.
2. Slide the sides of the FAV over the Trinix frame and align the screws on
the Trinix with the cut outs on the FAV (Figure 288).

Note A second person to help hold the FAV in place while it is secured to the frame
is recommended.

3. Install the screws into the Rack-Mounting holes on the side of the FAV
(see Figure 289 on page 427).

Figure 289. Front View of the FAV

Trinix router

FAV

Rack-Mounting holes

4. Install the screws in the rear Rack-Mounting holes on the side of the
FAV.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 427

Appendix 21 — Front-Air Vent

From the Rear Panel

1. Remove two screws from the Router’s input\output panel that are
aligned with the screws on the FAV.
2. Place the Mounting brackets over the holes and then replace the
existing screws (see Figure 290 below).

Figure 290. Rear View of the FAV

Rack-Mounting holes

Trinix router

FAV

Mounting brackets

Note The Mounting brackets can be adjusted as necessary.

428 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Appendix 22
Trinix Frame Slot Maps
This appendix provides images with the slot numbers identified. This
information is helpful when updating or down-grading a board as you will
need to know the specific slot that the board occupies.

The frames shown in this appendix are:

• Trinix 512x512 Frame Slot Numbers on page 430
• Trinix 256x256 Frame Slot Numbers on page 431
• Trinix 128x128 Frame Slot Numbers on page 432
• Trinix 256x512 Frame Slot Numbers on page 433
• Trinix 128x256 Frame Slot Numbers on page 434
• Trinix 512x1024 Frame Slot Numbers on page 435

NEED UPDATED FIGURES FOR ALL FRAMES

The maps in the following pages show the location for each slot in the spe-
cific frame.

The current slot information for an installed board can be found by entering
deviceListShow

at the command prompt during a telnet session. However, only slots that
have installed boards are shown, empty slots will not be identified.

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 429

Appendix 22 — Trinix Frame Slot Maps

Trinix 512x512 Frame Slot Numbers

Broadlinx NR-33000 Primary

Power Supply A Power Supply C

Slot # 00
Slot # 70 Slot # 72

Broadlinx NR-33000 Secondary

Slot # 01
Power Supply B Power Supply D

Rear Chassis Boards Slot # 71 Slot # 73

SR-33500 Slot # 04 Sync Ref

RP-33500 Slot # 06 Rear Panel

FAN A FAN B FAN C FAN D FAN E FAN F

Slot # 64 Slot # 65 Slot # 66 Slot # 67 Slot # 68 Slot # 69

Inputs Inputs Inputs Inputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Inputs Inputs Inputs Inputs

481-512 449-480 417-448 385-416 225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160 97-128 65-96 33-64 1-32 97-128 65-96 33-64 1-32

Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot #

15 14 13 12 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 35 34 33 32

Matrix Brd In 1-256 Out 1-128 Slot# 16

Matrix Brd In 257-512 Out 1-128 Slot# 19

Matrix Brd In 1-256 Out 129-256 Slot# 20

Matrix Brd In 257-512 Out 129-256 Slot# 23

Doubble Layer DM-33512 In 257-512 Out 1-256 Doubble Layer DM-33512 In 1-256 Out 1-256

Matrix Brd In 1-256 Out 257-384 Slot# 17

Matrix Brd In 257-512 Out 385-512 Slot# 22

Matrix Brd In 1-256 Out 385-512 Slot# 21

Matrix Brd In 257-512 Out 257-384 Slot# 18

Doubble Layer DM-33512 In 257-512 Out 257-512 Doubble Layer DM-33512 In 1-256 Out 257-512

Inputs Inputs Inputs Inputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Inputs Inputs Inputs Inputs

353-384 321-352 289-320 257-288 352-384 321-352 289-320 257-288 481-512 449-480 417-448 385-416 225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160

Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot #

11 10 09 08 27 26 25 24 31 30 29 28 39 38 37 36

430 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix 256x256 Frame Slot Numbers
N N
R R

FAN A FAN B FAN C Power Supply A Power Supply B

P S
R E
I C Slot # 32 Slot # 33 Slot # 34 Slot # 35 Slot # 36
M N
A D
R R
Y Y

00 01

Matrix Brd In 1-128 Out 129-256 Slot# 18

Matrix Brd In 129-256 Out 1-128 Slot# 17

Matrix Brd In 1-128 Out 1-128 Slot# 16

Matrix Brd In 129-256 Out 129-256 Slot# 19

Inputs Inputs Inputs Inputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Inputs Inputs Inputs Inputs

225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160 225-256 193-224 161-192 129-160 97-128 65-96 33-64 1-32 97-128 65-96 33-64 1-32

Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot # Slot #

15 14 13 12 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 11 10 09 08

071827609_Trinix256SlotMap

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 431

Appendix 22 — Trinix Frame Slot Maps

Trinix 128x128 Frame Slot Numbers

Fan A
Power Supply A Power Supply B Slot # 32
Slot # 34 Slot # 35

Fan B
Primary Broadlinx Secondary Broadlinx Slot # 33
Slot # 00 Slot # 01
Output 97-128 Slot # 27

Output65-96 Slot # 26
M
Output 33-64 Slot # 25 a
t
Output 1-32 Slot # 24 r
i
Input 97-128 Slot # 11 x

Input 65-96 Slot # 10 Slot # 16

Input 33-64 Slot # 09

Input 1-32 Slot # 08

432 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix 256x512 Frame Slot Numbers

071827609_256x512-Slotmap

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 433

Appendix 22 — Trinix Frame Slot Maps

Trinix 128x256 Frame Slot Numbers

434 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Trinix 512x1024 Frame Slot Numbers

071827612_512x1024_slot

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 435

Appendix 22 — Trinix Frame Slot Maps

436 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Appendix 23
Expanded System Sizes
This appendix provides the expanded system sizes, Frame IDs, and the
Video signals that may be processed.

Color Coding
The SD/HD/3G vs. SD/HD color coding represents the use of 2x2 (3G
capable) splitter combiners or the 4x4 splitter combiners (which are not 3G
capable).

Table 108. Color Legend

SD/HD/3G 3 Gb/s Capable
SD/HD Non 3 Gb/s Capable

Expanded Systems
Table 109. 128x128 Frame Expanded System
Inputs
512 Frame ID=5 Frame ID=7 Frame ID=13 Frame ID=15
384 Frame ID=4 Frame ID=6 Frame ID=12 Frame ID=14
256 Frame ID=1 Frame ID=3 Frame ID=9 Frame ID=11
128 Frame ID=0 Frame ID=2 Frame ID=8 Frame ID=10
128 256 384 512 Outputs

Table 110. 128x256 Frame Expanded System

Inputs
128 Frame ID=0 Frame ID=2 Frame ID=8 Frame ID=10
128 - 256 384 - 512 640 - 768 896 -1024 Outputs

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 437

Appendix 23 — Expanded System Sizes

Table 111. 256x256 Frame Expanded System

Inputs
1024 Frame ID=5 Frame ID=7 Frame ID=13 Frame ID=15

896
768 Frame ID=4 Frame ID=6 Frame ID=12 Frame ID=14

640
512 Frame ID=1 Frame ID=3 Frame ID=9 Frame ID=11

384
256 Frame ID=0 Frame ID=2 Frame ID=8 Frame ID=10

128
128 - 256 384 - 512 640 - 768 896 -1024 Outputs

Table 112. 256x512 Frame Expanded System

Inputs*
256 Frame ID=0 Frame ID=2 Frame ID=8 Frame ID=10
256 - 512 768 - 1024 1280 - 1536 1792 - 2048 Outputs

*For input expansion beyond 256 inputs please contact Grass Valley.

Table 113. 512x512 Frame Expanded System

Inputs
2048 Frame ID=5 Frame ID=7 Frame ID=13 Frame ID=15

1792
1536 Frame ID=4 Frame ID=6 Frame ID=12 Frame ID=14

1280
1024 Frame ID=1 Frame ID=3 Frame ID=9 Frame ID=11

768
512 Frame ID=0 Frame ID=2 Frame ID=8 Frame ID=10

256
256 - 512 768 - 1024 1280 - 1536 1792 - 2048 Outputs

438 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Table 114. 512x1024 Frame Expanded System
Inputs
2048 Frame ID=5 Frame ID=13

1792
1536 Frame ID=4 Frame ID=12

1280
1024 Frame ID=1 Frame ID=9

768
512 Frame ID=0 Frame ID=8

256
256 - 512 - 768 - 1024 1280 - 1536 - 792 - 2048 Outputs

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 439

Appendix 23 — Expanded System Sizes

440 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Glossary

Glossary a large number of devices, including a

CE-300A Control Board (internal to
Mars), a SC-400 Control Board (inter-
nal to Venus), a CE-3000 Matrix Con-
troller (BCS-3000 control system), a CE-
10/100BaseT - an ETHERNET configuration
2500 Control Electronics frame, a VM-
that uses twisted pair wiring (typically
3000 Control Processor (Jupiter), or a
Cat 5 UTP unshielded twisted pair
CE-2200 (PARTY LINE system).
cable with RJ45 8-pin connectors) to
transmit data up to 100 Mbps. The protocol for this bus has changed
through the years to accommodate
Binary Super Crosspoint Bus - similar to
larger and larger switchers with
super crosspoint bus, but the units dig-
increasing numbers of levels, being
its are allowed to cover the range of 0
identified as “standard,” “extended,”
to F, rather than 0-9 as in previous
“super,” and “binary.” For example,
switcher systems. Generated only by
the binary protocol uses binary (rather
the Jupiter, CE-2500, and BCS-3000
than BCD) coding to increase maxi-
control systems.
mum control size to 1024 x 1024 on 127
Bus - in distribution switching, a channel levels.
leading to an output or destination.
The “octal” protocol type is used only
Example: “controls 20 buses” means
for Mars switchers.
being able to select sources for 20 desti-
nations. For additional information, refer to the
“Switcher Control Rulebook” appen-
CPL - Control Point Language. Protocol
dix of the Party Line Control Mainte-
used to control router through Encore
nance Manual.
/ SMS 7000 Ethernet connection. In
Trinix applications, the connection is DHCP - Dynamic Host Configuration
made to a NR-33000 Broadlinx board. Protocol. Provides automatic TCP/IP
configuration when a DHCP server is
CPLD - Complex Programmable Logic
present on the network.
Device.
DVB-ASI - Digital Video Broadcasting -
Crosspoint - distribution switcher circuit
Asynchronous Serial Interface.
where input signal can be connected to
output bus. A 10 x 10 crosspoint board EBU - European Broadcasting Union.
has 100 crosspoints. URL: http://www.ebu.ch.

Crosspoint Bus - Also called the matrix Extended Crosspoint Bus - see CROS-
bus. A five-pair bus that carries switch- SPOINT BUS.

ing and status commands between the

Fabric Board - DM-33100 matrix board
crosspoint (matrix) cards and the con-
used in Trinix router.
trol device.
FPGA - Field Programmable Gate Array.
The control device could be any one of

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 441

Glossary

HI-33110- precursor to HI-33200 SD/HD Refresh - continuous repetition of switch-

Input Module. Consists of a 16-input ing instructions and confirmation of
base board (HI-33110) and a 16-input crosspoint status. Reports any inter-
mezzanine board (HI-33011), provid- ruption of service – for example, if
ing 32 inputs. The module supports crosspoint board is removed. When
data rates of 3 Mbps to 1.485 Gbps. A board is replaced, automatically
“gain cell” is included on this board to restores previous switch instructions.
be used in conjunction with the port
SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and
expanders in order to create multi-
Television Engineers.
frame routers.
URL: http://www.smpte.org.
Level - historically, a switcher matrix that
SMPTE 259M-1997 - Television standard:
carries one type of signal, as deter-
“10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc
mined by Dual In-line Package (DIP)
Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digi-
switch settings on crosspoint boards.
tal Interface.”
Example: level 1 for video, levels 2 and
4 for left and right audio, etc. However, SMPTE 269M-1999 - Television standard
in 3-stage switching systems this - “Fault Reporting in Television Sys-
switch-set level is referred to as the tems.”
“physical” level; and large systems
SMPTE 274M-1998 - Television standard:
may require more than one physical
“1920 x 1080 Scanning and Analog and
level to provide enough hardware for
Parallel Digital Interfaces for Multiple
an entire “logical” level (such as
Picture Rates.”
video). The Jupiter Physical Switching
menu refers to a “logical level” that is SMPTE 292M-1998 - Television standard:
actually the logical level number, this “Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-
being the row number on which the Definition Television Systems.”
level is identified on the Switcher Level SNMP - Simple Network Management
Descriptions table. The logical level Protocol.
name also appears on this table.
Status - in a distribution switcher, a dis-
Matrix Bus - see CROSSPOINT BUS. play indicating what source is cur-
OPM - OUTPUT MONITOR. rently switched to a given destination.

Output Monitoring - feature of routing Super Crosspoint Bus - see CROSSPOINT

switcher which allows control system BUS.

to verify switcher performance with-

out interrupting normal operations. A
separate, internal switching system is
used to switch the Monitor Output to
any output of the switcher.

physical level - see LEVEL.

442 Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual

 Index

Index AC OK LED 389

ACTIVE
NR-33000 board LED 402
AGC (Auto Gain Control)
summary table 379
Symbols Airflow 56
... 299 ALARM
+10V 512 Matrix board LED 398
Output board LED 393, 399, 400 Input board LED 391, 392
+5VA Output board LED 399, 400
Output board LED 399 ALARM BNC 132
Analog input 375
processing 375
Numerics
ANSI X3T11 25
0/1-based connector numbers 66 Asymmetric Frame, Front and Back 51, 143, 145
0-based/1-based 218 AUTO RCLK 197, 421
10/100BaseT
defined 441
10VOK B
SR-33000 board LED 400 B REF
16554 NR-33000 board LED 403
Head.4.ToP B switch 149, 209
DV-33512 with Redundant NR Operation
battery 132, 372
167
Belden
3.3V
9505 107, 215
Output board LED 399
Binary super crosspoint bus
-3V3
defined 441
DM-33100 Matrix board LED 397
Boot
3V3
Broadlinx board 287
DM-33100 Matrix board LED 397
NR-33000 board LED 403 Brightness / Y Offset 381
3V3+OK Broadlinx
SR-33000 board LED 400 configuration and operation 259, 285, 371
overview 36
5V+OK
SR-33000 board LED 400 Browser 36
5VA Bus
NR-33000 board LED 403 defined 441
-5VAOK Bypass 0-31 197
Input board LED 391
60 Hz enable 148 C
C switch 149
A Canadian EMC 23
A REF Cat 5 cable 111, 224
NR-33000 board LED 403 Cat 5E cable 109, 221
A switch 148 CB-3000 107, 215

Trinix NXT Installation and Service Manual 443

Index

CDRH 24 rear panel 148

CENELEC 24 DM-33100
CFR 24 LEDs 397
Chassis 39 DM-33501/33502
Chroma gain control 379 LEDs 398
Chroma Kill 382 DM-33501/DM-33502. See also DM-33512
summary 379 DM-33512
CM-4000 106, 214 input equalization 199
Com Bus 36, 111, 224 documentation online 4
Comb filter 379 DONE
DM-33100 Matrix board LED 397
Composite sync 157
Dual output systems 69
Configuration 121, 292
DV-33128 40
Connector numbering 218
DV-33256 40
Connectors 113
0-based/1-based 66 DV-33512 40
miscellaneous 149 DVP-ASI
Console A & B connectors 149 defined 441
Contrast / Y Gain 381
Control connector 150 E
Control system
EBU
Jupiter 33, 106, 214
defined 441
Cooling 56
EDH insertion 381
Cooling Asymmetric Frames
EEC 109, 111, 221, 224
Cooling System 58
EMC 109, 111, 221, 224
CPL 33, 371
EMI
CPU codes
modifications 216
NR-33000 405
EN 55103 23
Crosspoint
Defined 441 EN 60950 25
Crosspoint bus EN Series 109, 111, 221, 224
connections 106, 214 EN55022 117
defined 441 Encore 108, 219
terminator 107, 215 Equalization 114
CSA 25, 109, 111, 221, 224 DM-33512 Digital Matrix board 199
Ethernet 33, 371
Expanded systems 76
D Explorer 36, 311
Data rate 114 Extended crosspoint bus
Data Reclocking 115 Defined 441
Data reclocking 115
Daylight savings time 293
DC OK LED 389
F
DHCP Fabric board 441
defined 441 FAN ALARM LED 390, 391
Dip switch settings FAN IFC connectors 128

444 Trinix NXT Installation and Service Manual

 Index

Fans 56 HO-33121
FAQ database 4 gain switches 192
FCC 23 Hot swapping 153, 154
Ferrite 107, 216 Hyper terminal 376
Firewall 109, 110, 221, 222
Firmware (Broadlinx display) 297 I
Firmware Management menu 297
IEC 24
FPGA
Defined 441 IEC 825 24
FPGA Active/Pending 299 IFC connectors 128
FRAME IFC connector 128 IN USE A
512 Matrix board LED 398
Frame number for input/output blocks 212
IN USE B
Frame switch 212
512 Matrix board LED 398
Freight damage 125
IN_USE
frequently asked questions 4 Input board LED 391, 392
Fuse value requirements 127 Input equalization
Fuses 153, 154 DM-33512 Digital Matrix board 199
Input expand
switch 187, 189, 193
G
Input tab 317
Gain control 379 Installation 125
Gateway IP 296 Int xpt cntl switch 148, 372
GPIO/TC Connector 149 Internet 109, 110, 221, 222
Grass Valley web site 4 Internet Explorer 36, 311
Introduction 31
H INUSE
DM-33100 Matrix board LED 397
HD 482 S1 24
Output board LED 393, 399, 400
HI-33011 442
Ipconfig 287
HI-33110 442
equalization 115
LEDs 391 J
HI-33200 JN3/JN4
DIP switch settings 196 SR board 210
equalization 115
Jupiter 33, 106, 214
HI-3G Input Card 114 connector numbering 218
HO-33110 manual 107
data rate 115 Jupiter control 216
LEDs 399, 400
reclock settings 197
HO-33120 L
data rates 115
LAN
gain switches 192
NR-33000 board LED 404
LEDs 393, 400
reclock settings 197 Laser Compliance 24
LD-33100 87

Trinix NXT Installation and Service Manual 445

Index

LEDs 0-based/1-based 66
power supply 133 connector 218
Level
Defined 442
setting O
Jupiter control 217 online documentation 4
SMS/Encore control 219 OPM
license defined 442
SNMP 37 Output board switches 197
LINK Output jitter 115
NR-33000 board LED 404 Output monitor address 203
lithium-ion battery 132, 372 Output monitoring 61, 200
Loader board 87 defined 442
Logical level name Output reclocker 197
defined 442 Outputs tab 317
Logical level number overlay kit (0/1-based numbering) 66
defined 442

P
M
P2V5A OK
MAC 37 512 Matrix board LED 398
Manually Setting the Time 294 P2V5B OK
Matrix 512 Matrix board LED 398
Cable, VDE modifications 107, 216 P5V
Matrix bus 512 Matrix board LED 398
Defined 442 PALARM 153
Microcontroller active/pending 299 Matrix board LED 394, 395, 397
Microsoft PALR
Internet Explorer 36 NR-33000 board LED 403
Monitor 200 PALRM
Monitor switch 203 SR-33000 board LED 401
Monitor tab 316 part numbers 32
Monitored (Broadlinx display) 316 Performance characteristics 114
Monochrome Input 379 Phase 381
Physical dimensions 119
N Physical level
defined 442
NetCentral 37 Planning guide 39
Notch Decode Mode 382 Power consumption 121, 122, 123
NR-33000 Power supply 55, 151
CPU codes 405 redundant 153, 154
LEDs 402 removing 126
PALARM 153
POWER/ALARM LED 389
switches & jumpers 174
Preemphasis Added (DM-33512 Digital Matrix
NTSC or PAL blackburst 61, 157
Board) 199
Numbering

446 Trinix NXT Installation and Service Manual

 Index

Pre-wiring 66 PC board assembly drawing 179

Primary Contoller IP 296 rear panel 141
Primary Ref In 1 connector 129 RX
Processing (signal) 375 SR-33000 board LED 400
Protected Paths
Configuration 345, 411 S
Encore 363
Jupiter 367 S2
Overview 95 SR board 206
Planning 98 S401 (DM-33512 Digital Matrix Board) 199
Proxy 288 SALR
PS IFC connector 128 NR-33000 board LED 404
PS1 OK SALRM
512 Matrix board LED 398 SR-33000 LED 401
PS2 OK Saturation / Chroma Gain 381
512 Matrix board LED 398 Secondary Controller IP 296
Setup (video) 379, 383
SI-33110
Q equalization 115
Quad output systems 74 LEDs 391
Signal flow 62
Signal Flow for the 512x1024 Routing Switcher -
R Bottom 65
Rack mounting 126 Signal Flow for the 512x1024 Routing Switcher -
spacers for power supply access 126 Top 64
Reboot Signal processing 375
Broadlinx board 287 Signal standards 114
Reclocker (Broadlinx display) 316, 317 Signals (Broadlinx menu) 316
Reclocking SMPTE
HD outputs 197 269M-1999 118
monitor outputs 206
SMPTE 259M-1997
Recommended TMV Location 420 defined 442
Redundacy SMPTE 269M-1999
sync redundant switch 148 defined 442
REF_ALRM A SMPTE 274M-1998
SR-33000 board LED 401 defined 442
REF_ALRM B SMPTE 292M-1998
SR-33000 board LED 400 defined 442
Reference signals 128 SMS 7000 108, 219
Refresh SNMP 37
Defined 442
SNTP IP 293
Regulatory Notices 23
SO-33110
Returning merchandise 125 LEDs 393, 399, 400
RFI modifications 216 software download from web 4
Router (network) 285 Specifications 113
RP-33500

Trinix NXT Installation and Service Manual 447

Index

SR-33000 157 TRX-NXT-512x512 40, 95

LEDs 400 TRX-NXT-512x512 Protected Paths
PALARM 153 Non-Sequential Numbering 99
Switch S2 206, 210 TRX-NXT-512x512Protected Paths 99
switches & jumpers 175 Sequential numbering 99
SR-33500 TX
switches 176 SR-33000 board LED 400
Status
Defined 442
switcher hardware 312 U
Status (red/green light) 300 UL 25, 109, 111, 221, 224
Subnet mask 287 Universal input board 375
Super crosspoint bus URL 288
Defined 441 USE
SW OVR NR-33000 board LED 403
NR-33000 board LED 402 UTC offset 293
Switch point 170
Switched (Broadlinx display) 316
Sync inputs 113, 114 V
Sync redundant switch 148 VDE
Sync reference 61 Cable modifications 216
Vertical Blanking 382
VI-33100
T DIP switch settings 196
Target Name 296 equalization 115
Tera Term 376 signal processing 375
Terminator 107, 215 Video inputs 113
LD-33100 Loader board 87 Video Standard Operation 157
The Asymmetric Frame 34 VIT Redundant 148
The HO-33G Output Board 115 VITC 293
Time Management 292 VxWorks 299
Time Server IP 296
TMV Board Location W
Recommended TMV Location 420
Tri-level Sync 61, 157 Web Interface 299
Trinix board web site documentation 4
Input 341 web site FAQ database 4
Matrix 338 web site Grass Valley 4
Matrix Controller 338 web site software download 4
Output 342 Weight 121, 122, 123
Rear Panel 341
Reference 339
Troubleshooting 345, 375, 389, 411 X
TRX-NXT-128x128 40 X3T11 25
TRX-NXT-256x256 40 XC DONE
TRX-NXT-256x512 40 512 Matrix board LED 398

448 Trinix NXT Installation and Service Manual

XLD
SR-33000 board LED 400
XOK
NR-33000 board LED 403
XPT BUS connector 214

Trinix NXT — Installation and Service Manual 449